Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of American Hand Book of the
Daguerreotype
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: American Hand Book of the Daguerreotype
Author: S. D. Humphrey
Release date: September 1, 1994 [eBook #167]
Most recently updated: July 4, 2020
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/167
Credits: Produced by Gregory Walker, for the Digital Daguerreian Archive
Project.
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AMERICAN
HAND BOOK OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE ***
This etext was created by Gregory Walker, Austin, Texas, for the Digital Daguerreian Archive
Project.
Page numbers explicitly referred to in the text are marked at their beginning by “[page ##]” on a
Daguerreotype
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will
have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using
this eBook.
Title: American Hand Book of the Daguerreotype
Author: S. D. Humphrey
Release date: September 1, 1994 [eBook #167]
Most recently updated: July 4, 2020
Language: English
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/167
Credits: Produced by Gregory Walker, for the Digital Daguerreian Archive
Project.
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AMERICAN
HAND BOOK OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE ***
This etext was created by Gregory Walker, Austin, Texas, for the Digital Daguerreian Archive
Project.
Page numbers explicitly referred to in the text are marked at their beginning by “[page ##]” on a
Page 4
separate line. I hope this etext inspires a wider interest in the origins of photography and in the
modern practice of the Daguerreian Art.
[Updater’s note: In this version, the above page numbering convention has been replaced by “{##}”
sequences placed in line with the surrounding text.]
modern practice of the Daguerreian Art.
[Updater’s note: In this version, the above page numbering convention has been replaced by “{##}”
sequences placed in line with the surrounding text.]
Page 5
AMERICAN HAND BOOK
OF THE
DAGUERREOTYPE
GIVING
THE MOST APPROVED AND CONVENIENT
METHODS FOR PREPARING THE CHEMICALS,
AND
THE COMBINATIONS USED IN THE ART.
CONTAINING THE
DAGUERREOTYPE, ELECTROTYPE,
AND VARIOUS OTHER PROCESSES
EMPLOYED IN TAKING
HELIOGRAPHIC IMPRESSIONS.
OF THE
DAGUERREOTYPE
GIVING
THE MOST APPROVED AND CONVENIENT
METHODS FOR PREPARING THE CHEMICALS,
AND
THE COMBINATIONS USED IN THE ART.
CONTAINING THE
DAGUERREOTYPE, ELECTROTYPE,
AND VARIOUS OTHER PROCESSES
EMPLOYED IN TAKING
HELIOGRAPHIC IMPRESSIONS.
Page 6
BY S. D. HUMPHREY
FIFTH EDITION
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY S. D. HUMPHREY
37 LISPENARD STREET
1858
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1858,
by S. D. HUMPHREY, In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court
of the Southern District of New York.
To J. GURNEY, WHOSE PROFESSIONAL SKILL,
SCIENTIFIC ACCURACY,
AND ENERGETIC PERSEVERANCE, HAVE
WON FOR HIM UNIVERSAL ESTEEM,
FIFTH EDITION
NEW YORK:
PUBLISHED BY S. D. HUMPHREY
37 LISPENARD STREET
1858
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1858,
by S. D. HUMPHREY, In the Clerk’s Office of the District Court
of the Southern District of New York.
To J. GURNEY, WHOSE PROFESSIONAL SKILL,
SCIENTIFIC ACCURACY,
AND ENERGETIC PERSEVERANCE, HAVE
WON FOR HIM UNIVERSAL ESTEEM,
Page 7
THIS WORK IS MOST RESPECTFULLY
INSCRIBED.
INSCRIBED.
Page 8
PREFACE.
There is not an Amateur or practical Daguerreotypist, who has not felt the
want of a manual—Hand Book, giving concise and reliable information for
the processes, and preparations of the Agents employed in his practice.
Since portraits by the Daguerreotype are at this time believed to be more
durable than any other style of “Sun-drawing,” the author has hit upon the
present as being an appropriate time for the introduction of the Fifth Edition
of this work. The earlier edition having a long since been wholly;
exhausted, the one now before you is presented.
The endeavor has been to point out the readiest and most approved
Methods of Operation, and condense in its pages; as much practical
information as its limits will admit. An extended Preface is unnecessary,
since the aim and scope of this work are sufficiently indicated by the title.
S. D. HUMPHREY NEW YORK, 1858.
There is not an Amateur or practical Daguerreotypist, who has not felt the
want of a manual—Hand Book, giving concise and reliable information for
the processes, and preparations of the Agents employed in his practice.
Since portraits by the Daguerreotype are at this time believed to be more
durable than any other style of “Sun-drawing,” the author has hit upon the
present as being an appropriate time for the introduction of the Fifth Edition
of this work. The earlier edition having a long since been wholly;
exhausted, the one now before you is presented.
The endeavor has been to point out the readiest and most approved
Methods of Operation, and condense in its pages; as much practical
information as its limits will admit. An extended Preface is unnecessary,
since the aim and scope of this work are sufficiently indicated by the title.
S. D. HUMPHREY NEW YORK, 1858.
Page 9
CONTENTS
CHAPTER I.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate—Buffing the Plate—Coating the Plate—
Exposure of the Plate in the Camera—Position Developing the
Daguerreotype—Exposure to Mercury—Removing the Coating—Gilding
or fixing the Image—Coloring Daguerreotype, . . . . . 18
CHAPTER II.
Coloring Back Grounds—Transparent ditto—Gilding Dissolvent—Solution
for removing Specks—Solarized Impression—To Purify Water—Cleaning
Mercury—Adhesive Paper—Black Stain for Apparatus—Sealing Wax for
Bottles—Rouge—Rotten Stone—Potassa Solution—Hyposulphite Solution
—Substitute for do.—Gilding Solution—Solution for increasing the
Brilliancy of the Daguerreotype—Bleaching Solution;—Cold Gilding—
Neutralizing Agents—Buff Dryer—Keeping Buffs in order—Cleaning
Buckskins—Reflector for taking Views, . . . . 52
CHAPTER III.
Bromine and its Compounds—Iodine and its Compounds—Chlorine and its
Compounds—Cyanide of Potassium—Hyposulphite of Soda—
Hyphosulphite of Gold—Nitric Acid—Nitro-Muriatic Acid—Hydrochloric
Acid—Hydrofluoric Acid—Sulphuric Acid—Accelerating Substances—
Liquid Sensitives—Dry Sensitives, etc., etc., . . . . . 72
CHAPTER IV.
Light—Optics—Solar Spectrum—Decomposition of Light—Light, Heat,
and Actinism—Blue Paper and Color for the Walls of the Operating Room
—Proportions of Light, Heat and Actinism composing a Sunbeam—
Refraction—Reflection—Lenses—Copying Spherical Aberration—
Chromatic Aberration, . . . 131
CHAPTER V.
CHAPTER I.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate—Buffing the Plate—Coating the Plate—
Exposure of the Plate in the Camera—Position Developing the
Daguerreotype—Exposure to Mercury—Removing the Coating—Gilding
or fixing the Image—Coloring Daguerreotype, . . . . . 18
CHAPTER II.
Coloring Back Grounds—Transparent ditto—Gilding Dissolvent—Solution
for removing Specks—Solarized Impression—To Purify Water—Cleaning
Mercury—Adhesive Paper—Black Stain for Apparatus—Sealing Wax for
Bottles—Rouge—Rotten Stone—Potassa Solution—Hyposulphite Solution
—Substitute for do.—Gilding Solution—Solution for increasing the
Brilliancy of the Daguerreotype—Bleaching Solution;—Cold Gilding—
Neutralizing Agents—Buff Dryer—Keeping Buffs in order—Cleaning
Buckskins—Reflector for taking Views, . . . . 52
CHAPTER III.
Bromine and its Compounds—Iodine and its Compounds—Chlorine and its
Compounds—Cyanide of Potassium—Hyposulphite of Soda—
Hyphosulphite of Gold—Nitric Acid—Nitro-Muriatic Acid—Hydrochloric
Acid—Hydrofluoric Acid—Sulphuric Acid—Accelerating Substances—
Liquid Sensitives—Dry Sensitives, etc., etc., . . . . . 72
CHAPTER IV.
Light—Optics—Solar Spectrum—Decomposition of Light—Light, Heat,
and Actinism—Blue Paper and Color for the Walls of the Operating Room
—Proportions of Light, Heat and Actinism composing a Sunbeam—
Refraction—Reflection—Lenses—Copying Spherical Aberration—
Chromatic Aberration, . . . 131
CHAPTER V.
Page 10
To make Plates for the Daguerreotype—Determining the Time of Exposure
in the Camera—Instantaneous Process for Producing Daguerreotype—
Galvanizing the Daguerreotype Plate—Silvering Solution—Daguerreotype
without Mercury—Management of Chemicals—Hints and Cautions—
Electrotyping—Crayon Daguerreotypes—Illuminated Daguerreotypes—
Natural Colors in Heliography—Multiplying Daguerreotypes on one Plate
—Deposit in Gilding—Practical Hints on the Daguerreotype, . . . 149
CHAPTER VI.
An Account of Wolcott and Johnson’s Early experiments in the
Daguerreotype, . . . 188
in the Camera—Instantaneous Process for Producing Daguerreotype—
Galvanizing the Daguerreotype Plate—Silvering Solution—Daguerreotype
without Mercury—Management of Chemicals—Hints and Cautions—
Electrotyping—Crayon Daguerreotypes—Illuminated Daguerreotypes—
Natural Colors in Heliography—Multiplying Daguerreotypes on one Plate
—Deposit in Gilding—Practical Hints on the Daguerreotype, . . . 149
CHAPTER VI.
An Account of Wolcott and Johnson’s Early experiments in the
Daguerreotype, . . . 188
Page 11
AMERICAN HAND-BOOK
of THE DAGUERREOTYPE.
of THE DAGUERREOTYPE.
Page 12
CHAPTER I.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate—Buffing the Plate—
Coating the Plate—Exposure of the Plate in the Camera—
Position—Developing the Daguerreotype—Exposure to
Mercury—Removing the Coating—Gilding or fixing the
Image—Coloring Daguerreotype.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate.—I shall endeavor to present to the
reader the process I have found productive of good and satisfactory results,
presenting the same in a clear and concise manner, so that any one, by
following the various manipulations given, will be enabled to succeed. If
there is any one part of the process in Daguerreotype in which operators fail
more than all others, it is in not properly preparing the plate. It has truly
been said that it would take a volume to describe all the methods that have
been suggested for polishing the plate.
I shall confine myself to the following description, which has been
successfully practised, also most generally adopted by our operators, and I
believe equal, if not superior to any other method, yet at the same time it is
not of so much importance what particular method is employed, so that it be
thoroughly and skillfully carried out.
There is a general tendency with beginners to slight this operation; hence
the necessity of adopting a system which precludes the possibility of doing
so. During many years’ study and practice in the art, I have tried numerous
methods and substances for the better accomplishment of the end in view,
and have finally settled upon the following, as being (so far as experience
allows me to Judge) the modus operandi, best suited to all circumstances;
under no condition would I approve of a method less rigorous or precise.
The operator being provided with a bottle of finely prepared rotten stone,
cover the mouth of the bottle with a piece of thick paper, this perforated
with a pin so that the rotten stone can be dusted on the plate. Fasten the
plate on the holder, take the rotten stone (Becker’s can always be depended
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate—Buffing the Plate—
Coating the Plate—Exposure of the Plate in the Camera—
Position—Developing the Daguerreotype—Exposure to
Mercury—Removing the Coating—Gilding or fixing the
Image—Coloring Daguerreotype.
Polishing the Daguerreotype Plate.—I shall endeavor to present to the
reader the process I have found productive of good and satisfactory results,
presenting the same in a clear and concise manner, so that any one, by
following the various manipulations given, will be enabled to succeed. If
there is any one part of the process in Daguerreotype in which operators fail
more than all others, it is in not properly preparing the plate. It has truly
been said that it would take a volume to describe all the methods that have
been suggested for polishing the plate.
I shall confine myself to the following description, which has been
successfully practised, also most generally adopted by our operators, and I
believe equal, if not superior to any other method, yet at the same time it is
not of so much importance what particular method is employed, so that it be
thoroughly and skillfully carried out.
There is a general tendency with beginners to slight this operation; hence
the necessity of adopting a system which precludes the possibility of doing
so. During many years’ study and practice in the art, I have tried numerous
methods and substances for the better accomplishment of the end in view,
and have finally settled upon the following, as being (so far as experience
allows me to Judge) the modus operandi, best suited to all circumstances;
under no condition would I approve of a method less rigorous or precise.
The operator being provided with a bottle of finely prepared rotten stone,
cover the mouth of the bottle with a piece of thick paper, this perforated
with a pin so that the rotten stone can be dusted on the plate. Fasten the
plate on the holder, take the rotten stone (Becker’s can always be depended
Page 13
upon), and dust on lightly until the surface is freely covered; now drop on
the plate’s surface a few drops of an alcoholic solution.[1]
[1] This solution is composed of equal parts of alcohol and water, for the
summer, and in winter three parts alcohol to one of water; a few drops of potassa
solution may be added, and is known to have a decided effect upon the plate.
Take a patch of Canton flannel; in order to prevent the moisture from the
hand it should have a thick, firm texture: with this rub the plate in circles
across, then back covering one-half of the former row of circles in each
crossing until you have gone over the plate and back to the point of
beginning, occupying at least half a minute in the operation, for a small
plate, and so in proportion for the other sizes.
Care should be observed to keep the patch wet with the alcoholic solution
forming a paste on the surface of the plate; the motion of the hand should be
brisk and free, not hurried, and the pressure about equal to that of a pound
weight. When the cotton is disposed to adhere to the plate, and slip from
under the finger, spread the fore and middle fingers a little apart, then
pressing down, bring them together in such a manner as to form a fold in
the cloth between them, by which means you will hold it perfectly secure.
Avoid wetting the fingers, and should they perspire, wipe them often, as
the moisture penetrating the cotton and coming in contact with the plate,
would cause streaks it would be difficult to remove. I will here remark that
many operators use much more cotton flannel than there is need of. I have
found in my experience that a single patch, about one and half inch square,
will be better for cleaning a number of plates than a new piece for every
plate. This is the case for the wet, and for the dryrubbing two or three pieces
will be found to answer. Thus with four or five cloths a dozen plates may be
prepared.
Some operators use prepared cotton, and think it more convenient than
the flannel. This may be had prepared free from seeds and in a very perfect
state, if wished.
In going over the plate, great care should be observed, in touching its
surface as equally as possible. The greatest care should be taken neither to
touch the plate with the fingers, nor that part of the cotton flannel which is
to come in contact with its surface; take a clean piece of flannel by one
corner, snap it smartly to free it from dust and loose fibres, lay it face-side
upward, dust on a little fine rotten stone; with this, polish around, or across,
the plate’s surface a few drops of an alcoholic solution.[1]
[1] This solution is composed of equal parts of alcohol and water, for the
summer, and in winter three parts alcohol to one of water; a few drops of potassa
solution may be added, and is known to have a decided effect upon the plate.
Take a patch of Canton flannel; in order to prevent the moisture from the
hand it should have a thick, firm texture: with this rub the plate in circles
across, then back covering one-half of the former row of circles in each
crossing until you have gone over the plate and back to the point of
beginning, occupying at least half a minute in the operation, for a small
plate, and so in proportion for the other sizes.
Care should be observed to keep the patch wet with the alcoholic solution
forming a paste on the surface of the plate; the motion of the hand should be
brisk and free, not hurried, and the pressure about equal to that of a pound
weight. When the cotton is disposed to adhere to the plate, and slip from
under the finger, spread the fore and middle fingers a little apart, then
pressing down, bring them together in such a manner as to form a fold in
the cloth between them, by which means you will hold it perfectly secure.
Avoid wetting the fingers, and should they perspire, wipe them often, as
the moisture penetrating the cotton and coming in contact with the plate,
would cause streaks it would be difficult to remove. I will here remark that
many operators use much more cotton flannel than there is need of. I have
found in my experience that a single patch, about one and half inch square,
will be better for cleaning a number of plates than a new piece for every
plate. This is the case for the wet, and for the dryrubbing two or three pieces
will be found to answer. Thus with four or five cloths a dozen plates may be
prepared.
Some operators use prepared cotton, and think it more convenient than
the flannel. This may be had prepared free from seeds and in a very perfect
state, if wished.
In going over the plate, great care should be observed, in touching its
surface as equally as possible. The greatest care should be taken neither to
touch the plate with the fingers, nor that part of the cotton flannel which is
to come in contact with its surface; take a clean piece of flannel by one
corner, snap it smartly to free it from dust and loose fibres, lay it face-side
upward, dust on a little fine rotten stone; with this, polish around, or across,
Page 14
or in circles, lightly and briskly, passing gradually over the whole surface of
the plate, as was done before with the wet. The plate should now exhibit a
bright, clear, uniform surface, with a strong metallic lustre, perfectly free
from any appearance of film; if not, the last polished should be continued
until the effect is obtained, and when once obtained, the plate is ready for
buffing.
Buffing the Plate.—There are a variety of ways and means employed in
this part of the operation. Some choose wheels, and others prefer the
ordinary hand-buff. I have been unable to detect any peculiar advantage in
the use of the wheel except in the facility of the operation; no doubt,
however, but there is a saving of time, particularly in the preparation of the
larger plates. For general use, we have not seen a wheel better adapted for
this purpose than the one patented by Messrs. Lewis.
It is generally well to use a hand-buff before placing the plate on the
wheel; this is in order to prevent, as far as possible, the dust or other
substance that may be on the surface of the plate from coming in contact
with the cover of the wheel. I will here follow out the use of the hand-buffs
(two are necessary) as they are mostly used.
In the morning, before using the buffs, brush both as clean as possible, in
order to free them from dust; then with the blade of a pair of shears, held
perpendicular, rub the buffs from end to end; then knock them both together
in order to free them from all dust or other substances, occasionally
exposing them to the sun or to the fire.
With one of the buffs (reserving the finest and softest for the last
operation), powder its face with fine rouge and brush off slightly, leaving
only the finest particles in it. Every operator should have two plate-holders;
one for cleaning and one for buffing the plate; for when using only one, the
rotten stone is liable to get on the buff and scratch the plate.
Rest the fingers of the left hand on the back of the buff, near the farther
end, with about the same pressure as in cleaning, while with the right you
bear on the handle to correspond, and give the buff a free, easy, horizontal
motion, passing it very nearly the whole length over the plate each time.
Continue this operation in such a manner that the plate will on all parts of
its surface have received an equal amount of polish. This buff once well
filled with polish, add but little after, say a small quantity once in two or
three plates. The polish as well as the buffs must be kept perfectly dry.
the plate, as was done before with the wet. The plate should now exhibit a
bright, clear, uniform surface, with a strong metallic lustre, perfectly free
from any appearance of film; if not, the last polished should be continued
until the effect is obtained, and when once obtained, the plate is ready for
buffing.
Buffing the Plate.—There are a variety of ways and means employed in
this part of the operation. Some choose wheels, and others prefer the
ordinary hand-buff. I have been unable to detect any peculiar advantage in
the use of the wheel except in the facility of the operation; no doubt,
however, but there is a saving of time, particularly in the preparation of the
larger plates. For general use, we have not seen a wheel better adapted for
this purpose than the one patented by Messrs. Lewis.
It is generally well to use a hand-buff before placing the plate on the
wheel; this is in order to prevent, as far as possible, the dust or other
substance that may be on the surface of the plate from coming in contact
with the cover of the wheel. I will here follow out the use of the hand-buffs
(two are necessary) as they are mostly used.
In the morning, before using the buffs, brush both as clean as possible, in
order to free them from dust; then with the blade of a pair of shears, held
perpendicular, rub the buffs from end to end; then knock them both together
in order to free them from all dust or other substances, occasionally
exposing them to the sun or to the fire.
With one of the buffs (reserving the finest and softest for the last
operation), powder its face with fine rouge and brush off slightly, leaving
only the finest particles in it. Every operator should have two plate-holders;
one for cleaning and one for buffing the plate; for when using only one, the
rotten stone is liable to get on the buff and scratch the plate.
Rest the fingers of the left hand on the back of the buff, near the farther
end, with about the same pressure as in cleaning, while with the right you
bear on the handle to correspond, and give the buff a free, easy, horizontal
motion, passing it very nearly the whole length over the plate each time.
Continue this operation in such a manner that the plate will on all parts of
its surface have received an equal amount of polish. This buff once well
filled with polish, add but little after, say a small quantity once in two or
three plates. The polish as well as the buffs must be kept perfectly dry.
Page 15
The second buff should always be in the best order, and if this is the case,
but little polish after the first need be used. Much depends upon the last
finish of the surface of the plate, and as a fine impression is desired in the
same ratio, the operator must exercise care and skill in this operation. Some
buff the smaller plates on the hands, by resting them on the fingers in such a
manner that the buff cannot touch them; some by holding the edges with
thumb and little finger, with the remaining fingers under, or on the back;
and others buff on the holder. When this last method is adopted, it requires
the greatest caution to prevent the dust from getting on the buff. The holder
should be wiped clean.
The plate frequently slips off or around, and the buff comes in contact
with the bed of the holder. When, however, the operator is so unfortunate as
to meet with this mishap, the utmost care must be observed in thoroughly
cleaning the buff cover before further buffing. In this last buffing it may be
continued as before, except without the application of polish powder to the
last buff. Examine the surface occasionally, and buff more lightly towards
the close of the operation, using at last the mere weight of the buff. This last
buffing should occupy as long a time as the first.
The point to be aimed at is, the production of a surface of such exquisite
polish as to be itself invisible, like the surface of a mirror. The secret of
producing pictures discernible in any light, lies in this: the more dark, deep
and mirror-like the surface of the plate, the more nearly do we approach to
perfection.
In all cases, very light and long continued buffing is productive of the
greater success, since by that means a more perfect polish can be obtained.
The question is often asked, why is it that the plates receive the coating
so unevenly? I will answer by saying that it may arise from two causes: the
first and most general cause is that those parts of the plate’s surface which
will receive the heaviest coating have been more thoroughly polished, and
the consequence is that it is more sensitive to the chemical operation;
second, and might perhaps be considered a part of the first, the heat of the
plate may not be equal in all its parts; this may arise from the heat caused
by the friction in buffing. It is a well known fact, with which every
observing practitioner is familiar, that a silver plate at a temperature of 45
deg. or less, exposed to the vapors of iodine, is less sensitive and takes a
longer time to coat, than when it is at a temperature of 60 deg. or more.
but little polish after the first need be used. Much depends upon the last
finish of the surface of the plate, and as a fine impression is desired in the
same ratio, the operator must exercise care and skill in this operation. Some
buff the smaller plates on the hands, by resting them on the fingers in such a
manner that the buff cannot touch them; some by holding the edges with
thumb and little finger, with the remaining fingers under, or on the back;
and others buff on the holder. When this last method is adopted, it requires
the greatest caution to prevent the dust from getting on the buff. The holder
should be wiped clean.
The plate frequently slips off or around, and the buff comes in contact
with the bed of the holder. When, however, the operator is so unfortunate as
to meet with this mishap, the utmost care must be observed in thoroughly
cleaning the buff cover before further buffing. In this last buffing it may be
continued as before, except without the application of polish powder to the
last buff. Examine the surface occasionally, and buff more lightly towards
the close of the operation, using at last the mere weight of the buff. This last
buffing should occupy as long a time as the first.
The point to be aimed at is, the production of a surface of such exquisite
polish as to be itself invisible, like the surface of a mirror. The secret of
producing pictures discernible in any light, lies in this: the more dark, deep
and mirror-like the surface of the plate, the more nearly do we approach to
perfection.
In all cases, very light and long continued buffing is productive of the
greater success, since by that means a more perfect polish can be obtained.
The question is often asked, why is it that the plates receive the coating
so unevenly? I will answer by saying that it may arise from two causes: the
first and most general cause is that those parts of the plate’s surface which
will receive the heaviest coating have been more thoroughly polished, and
the consequence is that it is more sensitive to the chemical operation;
second, and might perhaps be considered a part of the first, the heat of the
plate may not be equal in all its parts; this may arise from the heat caused
by the friction in buffing. It is a well known fact, with which every
observing practitioner is familiar, that a silver plate at a temperature of 45
deg. or less, exposed to the vapors of iodine, is less sensitive and takes a
longer time to coat, than when it is at a temperature of 60 deg. or more.
Page 16
Whenever a view is to be taken, or any impression which requires the
plate to be turned on the side, it should be buffed in the other direction, so
that the marks will always be horizontal, when the picture is in position.
With the finest possible polish, the plate is ready for the coating box.
The question is often asked by operators, what is the state of the plate
when polished and allowed to stand for a time before using? To meet this
point we hare only to consider the silver and the power acting upon it. Pure
atmosphere does not act upon silver; but we do not have this about in our
operating rooms, as it is more or less charged with sulphurated hydrogen,
which soon tarnishes the surface of the plate with a film of brown
sulphurate. It is this that sometimes causes the specks which appear on
finishing the impression, and are a great annoyance. Hence we see that the
plate should be buffed just before receiving the vapor of iodine. Mr Hunt
gives his opinion of the use of diluted nitric acid as the best solution for
freeing, the surface of the plate; he says:
“Numerous experiments on plated copper, pure silver plates, and on
silvered glass and paper, have convinced me that the first operation of
polishing with nitric acid, etc., is essential to the production of the most
sensitive surface. All who will take the trouble to examine the subject, will
soon be convinced that the acid softens the silver, bringing it to a state in
which it is extremely susceptible of being either oxydized or iodized,
according as the circumstances may occur of its exposure to the atmosphere
or the iodine.”
I cannot see the objection to this solution; not, however, in general use.
Our operators do not find it of sufficient importance to the success of their
pictures to accept it, the alcoholic solution being in its nature less
objectionable.
I will say here, that a plate submitted to only an ordinary polish is found
to contain numberless minute particles of the powder made use of. Should
the same plate be buffed for a long time, the polish will nearly all disappear,
leaving the cavities in the surface free for the action of agents employed in
subsequent operation. For this reason, I find that great amount of polishing
powder should not be applied to the last buff, and it is obvious that three
buffs can be employed to adventure; the two last should not receive any
polishing materials. I have examined a plate that was considered to possess
a fine finish, and similar had produced good impressions; these same plates,
plate to be turned on the side, it should be buffed in the other direction, so
that the marks will always be horizontal, when the picture is in position.
With the finest possible polish, the plate is ready for the coating box.
The question is often asked by operators, what is the state of the plate
when polished and allowed to stand for a time before using? To meet this
point we hare only to consider the silver and the power acting upon it. Pure
atmosphere does not act upon silver; but we do not have this about in our
operating rooms, as it is more or less charged with sulphurated hydrogen,
which soon tarnishes the surface of the plate with a film of brown
sulphurate. It is this that sometimes causes the specks which appear on
finishing the impression, and are a great annoyance. Hence we see that the
plate should be buffed just before receiving the vapor of iodine. Mr Hunt
gives his opinion of the use of diluted nitric acid as the best solution for
freeing, the surface of the plate; he says:
“Numerous experiments on plated copper, pure silver plates, and on
silvered glass and paper, have convinced me that the first operation of
polishing with nitric acid, etc., is essential to the production of the most
sensitive surface. All who will take the trouble to examine the subject, will
soon be convinced that the acid softens the silver, bringing it to a state in
which it is extremely susceptible of being either oxydized or iodized,
according as the circumstances may occur of its exposure to the atmosphere
or the iodine.”
I cannot see the objection to this solution; not, however, in general use.
Our operators do not find it of sufficient importance to the success of their
pictures to accept it, the alcoholic solution being in its nature less
objectionable.
I will say here, that a plate submitted to only an ordinary polish is found
to contain numberless minute particles of the powder made use of. Should
the same plate be buffed for a long time, the polish will nearly all disappear,
leaving the cavities in the surface free for the action of agents employed in
subsequent operation. For this reason, I find that great amount of polishing
powder should not be applied to the last buff, and it is obvious that three
buffs can be employed to adventure; the two last should not receive any
polishing materials. I have examined a plate that was considered to possess
a fine finish, and similar had produced good impressions; these same plates,
Page 17
when subjected to a long and light buffing, would present a surface no finer
in appearance to the naked eye; but upon exposure to the solar radiation,
would produce a well-defined image in one fourth less time than the plate
without the extra buffing.
Coating the Plate.—For this purpose our mechanics and artists have
provided a simple apparatus called a coating-box, which is so arranged as to
be perfectly tight, retaining the vapor of the iodine or accelerators, and at
the same time allowing, by means of a slide, the exposure of the plate to
these vapors. They can readily be obtained by application to any dealer, all
of whom can furnish them.
The principal difficulty in coating the plate, is that of preserving the exact
proportion between the quantity of iodine and bromine, or quick. It is here
necessary to say, that hardly any two persons see alike the same degree of
color, so as to be enabled to judge correctly the exact tint, i. e. what one
might describe as light rose red, might appear to another as bright or cherry
red; consequently, the only rule for the student in Daguerreotype, is to study
what appears to him to be the particular tint or shade required to aid him to
produce the desired result. Practise has proved that but a slight variation in
the chemical coating, of the Daguerreotype plate will very materially affect
the final result.
The operator will proportion the coating of iodine and bromine or
accelerators according to the strength and composition of the latter.
Experience proves that the common impressions, iodized to a rather light
yellow gold tint, and brought by the bromine to a very light, rose color,
have their whites very intense, and their deep shades very black. It is also
known that if you employ a thicker coating of iodine and apply upon it a
proportionate tint of bromine, so as to obtain a deep rose tint, delineations
will be less marked, and the image have a softer tone. This effect has been
obvious to everyone who has practised the art. Thus I may observe that the
light coatings produce strong contrast of light and shade, and that this
contrast grows gradually less, until in the very heavy coating it almost
wholly disappears. From this it will readily be perceived that the middle
shades are the ones to be desired for representing the harmonious blending
of the lights and shades.
Then, if we examine, with respect to strength, or depth of tone, and
sharpness of impression, we see that the light coating, produces a very
in appearance to the naked eye; but upon exposure to the solar radiation,
would produce a well-defined image in one fourth less time than the plate
without the extra buffing.
Coating the Plate.—For this purpose our mechanics and artists have
provided a simple apparatus called a coating-box, which is so arranged as to
be perfectly tight, retaining the vapor of the iodine or accelerators, and at
the same time allowing, by means of a slide, the exposure of the plate to
these vapors. They can readily be obtained by application to any dealer, all
of whom can furnish them.
The principal difficulty in coating the plate, is that of preserving the exact
proportion between the quantity of iodine and bromine, or quick. It is here
necessary to say, that hardly any two persons see alike the same degree of
color, so as to be enabled to judge correctly the exact tint, i. e. what one
might describe as light rose red, might appear to another as bright or cherry
red; consequently, the only rule for the student in Daguerreotype, is to study
what appears to him to be the particular tint or shade required to aid him to
produce the desired result. Practise has proved that but a slight variation in
the chemical coating, of the Daguerreotype plate will very materially affect
the final result.
The operator will proportion the coating of iodine and bromine or
accelerators according to the strength and composition of the latter.
Experience proves that the common impressions, iodized to a rather light
yellow gold tint, and brought by the bromine to a very light, rose color,
have their whites very intense, and their deep shades very black. It is also
known that if you employ a thicker coating of iodine and apply upon it a
proportionate tint of bromine, so as to obtain a deep rose tint, delineations
will be less marked, and the image have a softer tone. This effect has been
obvious to everyone who has practised the art. Thus I may observe that the
light coatings produce strong contrast of light and shade, and that this
contrast grows gradually less, until in the very heavy coating it almost
wholly disappears. From this it will readily be perceived that the middle
shades are the ones to be desired for representing the harmonious blending
of the lights and shades.
Then, if we examine, with respect to strength, or depth of tone, and
sharpness of impression, we see that the light coating, produces a very
Page 18
sharp but shallow impression; while the other extreme gives a deep but very
dull one. Here, then, are still better reasons for avoiding either extreme. The
changes through which the plate passes in coating may be considered a
yellow straw color or dark orange yellow, a rose color more or less dark in
tint, or red violet, steel blue or indigo, and lastly green. After attaining this
latter color, the plate resumes a light yellow tint, and continues to pass
successively a second time, with very few exceptions, through all the
shades above mentioned.
I will here present some excellent remarks upon this subject by Mr.
Finley. This gentleman says:
“It is well known to all who have given much attention to the subject,
that an excess of iodine gives the light portions of objects with peculiar
strength and clearness, while the darker parts are retarded, as it were, and
not brought out by that length of exposure which suffices for the former.
Hence, statuary, monuments, and all objects of like character, were
remarkably well delineated by the original process of Daguerre; the plate
being coated with iodine alone. An excess of bromine, to a certain degree,
has the opposite effect; the white portions of the impression appearing of a
dull, leaden hue, while those which should be black, or dark, appear quite
light. This being the case, I conclude there must be a point between the two
extremes where light and dark objects will be in photogenic equilibrium.
The great object, therefore, is to maintain, as nearly as possible, a perfect
balance between the two elements entering into union to form the sensitive
coating of the plate, in order that the lights and shades be truly and
faithfully represented, and that all objects, whether light or dark, be made to
appear so far conformable to nature, as is consistent with the difference in
the photogenic energy of the different colored rays of light. It is this nicely-
balanced combination which ensures, in the highest degree, a union of the
essential qualities of a fine Daguerreotype, viz., clearness and strength, with
softness and purity of tone.
“So far as I know, it is the universal practice of operators to judge of the
proportion of iodine and bromine in coating the plate, by two standards of
color the one fixed upon for the iodine, the other for the additional coating
of bromine. Now I maintain that these alone form a very fallacious
standard; first, because the color appears to the eye either lighter or darker,
according as there is more or less light by which we inspect the coating; and
dull one. Here, then, are still better reasons for avoiding either extreme. The
changes through which the plate passes in coating may be considered a
yellow straw color or dark orange yellow, a rose color more or less dark in
tint, or red violet, steel blue or indigo, and lastly green. After attaining this
latter color, the plate resumes a light yellow tint, and continues to pass
successively a second time, with very few exceptions, through all the
shades above mentioned.
I will here present some excellent remarks upon this subject by Mr.
Finley. This gentleman says:
“It is well known to all who have given much attention to the subject,
that an excess of iodine gives the light portions of objects with peculiar
strength and clearness, while the darker parts are retarded, as it were, and
not brought out by that length of exposure which suffices for the former.
Hence, statuary, monuments, and all objects of like character, were
remarkably well delineated by the original process of Daguerre; the plate
being coated with iodine alone. An excess of bromine, to a certain degree,
has the opposite effect; the white portions of the impression appearing of a
dull, leaden hue, while those which should be black, or dark, appear quite
light. This being the case, I conclude there must be a point between the two
extremes where light and dark objects will be in photogenic equilibrium.
The great object, therefore, is to maintain, as nearly as possible, a perfect
balance between the two elements entering into union to form the sensitive
coating of the plate, in order that the lights and shades be truly and
faithfully represented, and that all objects, whether light or dark, be made to
appear so far conformable to nature, as is consistent with the difference in
the photogenic energy of the different colored rays of light. It is this nicely-
balanced combination which ensures, in the highest degree, a union of the
essential qualities of a fine Daguerreotype, viz., clearness and strength, with
softness and purity of tone.
“So far as I know, it is the universal practice of operators to judge of the
proportion of iodine and bromine in coating the plate, by two standards of
color the one fixed upon for the iodine, the other for the additional coating
of bromine. Now I maintain that these alone form a very fallacious
standard; first, because the color appears to the eye either lighter or darker,
according as there is more or less light by which we inspect the coating; and
Page 19
secondly, because if it occur that we are deceived in obtaining the exact tint
for the first coating, we are worse misled in obtaining the second, for if the
iodine coating be too light, then an undue proportion of bromine is used in
order to bring it to the second standard, and vice versa.”
The iodine box should be kept clean and dry. The plate immediately after
the last buffing, should be placed over the iodine, and the coating will
depend upon the character of the tone of the impression desired. Coating
over dry iodine to an orange color, then over the accelerator, to a light rose,
and back over iodine one sixth as long as first coating, will produce a fine,
soft tone, and is the coating generally used for most accelerators. The plate
iodized to a dark orange yellow, or tinged slightly with incipient rose color,
coated over the accelerator to a deep rose red, then back over iodine one-
tenth as long as at first coating, gives a clear, strong, bold, deep impression.
I will here state a singular fact, which is not generally known to the
operator. If a plate, coated over the iodine to a rose red, and then exposed to
strong dry quick or weak bromine water, so that a change of color can be
seen, then recoated over the iodine twice as long as at first coating, it will
be found far more sensitive when exposed to the light than when it has been
recoated over the iodine one-fourth of the time of the first coating.
Probably the best accelerating combination is the American compound
formerly known as “Gurney’s American compound,” or some of the
combinations of bromide of lime. The first is thought to possess perhaps
more uniformity in its action than any other combination I have ever used.
The plate once coated should be kept excluded from the light by means
of the plate holder for the camera box.
I will notice one of the principal causes having a tendency to prevent the
perfect uniformity of chemical action, between the iodine and silver;
hydrogen, or the moisture in the atmosphere, makes a very perceptible
barrier. This moisture may arise as the result of the cold, from a want of
friction in the buffing of the plate, which, coming in contact with the
warmer air, as a writer on this subject says:
“It is well known that as often as bodies, when cold, are exposed to a
warmer air, the humidity contained in them is condensed. It is to this effect
that we must attribute the difficulty experienced in operating in most cases.”
This is corroborated by the results experienced by our operators. So it is
seen that the plate should be of a temperature above that of the atmosphere.
for the first coating, we are worse misled in obtaining the second, for if the
iodine coating be too light, then an undue proportion of bromine is used in
order to bring it to the second standard, and vice versa.”
The iodine box should be kept clean and dry. The plate immediately after
the last buffing, should be placed over the iodine, and the coating will
depend upon the character of the tone of the impression desired. Coating
over dry iodine to an orange color, then over the accelerator, to a light rose,
and back over iodine one sixth as long as first coating, will produce a fine,
soft tone, and is the coating generally used for most accelerators. The plate
iodized to a dark orange yellow, or tinged slightly with incipient rose color,
coated over the accelerator to a deep rose red, then back over iodine one-
tenth as long as at first coating, gives a clear, strong, bold, deep impression.
I will here state a singular fact, which is not generally known to the
operator. If a plate, coated over the iodine to a rose red, and then exposed to
strong dry quick or weak bromine water, so that a change of color can be
seen, then recoated over the iodine twice as long as at first coating, it will
be found far more sensitive when exposed to the light than when it has been
recoated over the iodine one-fourth of the time of the first coating.
Probably the best accelerating combination is the American compound
formerly known as “Gurney’s American compound,” or some of the
combinations of bromide of lime. The first is thought to possess perhaps
more uniformity in its action than any other combination I have ever used.
The plate once coated should be kept excluded from the light by means
of the plate holder for the camera box.
I will notice one of the principal causes having a tendency to prevent the
perfect uniformity of chemical action, between the iodine and silver;
hydrogen, or the moisture in the atmosphere, makes a very perceptible
barrier. This moisture may arise as the result of the cold, from a want of
friction in the buffing of the plate, which, coming in contact with the
warmer air, as a writer on this subject says:
“It is well known that as often as bodies, when cold, are exposed to a
warmer air, the humidity contained in them is condensed. It is to this effect
that we must attribute the difficulty experienced in operating in most cases.”
This is corroborated by the results experienced by our operators. So it is
seen that the plate should be of a temperature above that of the atmosphere.
Page 20
Mr. Gurney submits his plates to a gentle heat from a spirit lamp just before
exposing them to the vapor of iodine. Experience has convinced me that a
plate heated to about 80 deg. before being exposed to iodine will present a
far better defined image than a plate at a temperature of 50 deg. I account
for this by noticing that, at a higher temperature, the plate throws off any
larger crystals that might otherwise be deposited, receiving only the finer,
thus producing a more perfect chemical combination of iodide of silver. I
would call the attention of the operator to this point, as presenting
something of interest, and which may direct in a way of accelerating the
future operations.
That the presence of a film of moisture over the plate is a preventive of
uniform chemical action, may be readily understood from the fact that
iodine is almost insoluble in water, requiring seven thousand parts of water
to dissolve one of iodine, or one grain to a gallon of water. Yet its affinities
for silver and other substances are so powerful as to prevent its existing in
an insulated state, hence we can account for the frequent occurrence of a
plate presenting parts of an image over its surface. It is quite evident that
those parts of plate’s surface covered with moisture are nothing like as
sensitive to the iodine as those parts perfectly free.
Exposure of the plate in the Camera, and Position.—The time of
exposure necessary to produce an image upon the Daguerreotype plate, can
only be determined by experiment, and requires a liberality of judgment to
be exercised on the part of the operator. The constant variation of the light
renders it impossible to lay down any exact rule upon this point. Light is not
alone to be considered; the amount of coating exercises a deviating
influence, also the subjects to be represented are not equally photogenic,
some requiring much longer time of exposure than others. This may be
easily observed by exposing the plate at the same time to a plaster bust and
a piece of black velvet, the first being a much stronger reflector of light than
the latter: the time necessary to produce a well developed image of the
velvet being about six times longer than that required to produce an equally
defined image of plaster. The manner of judging correctly of the time is by
the appearance of impression after it has been developed by the mercurial
vapors. Should it present a deep blue or black appearance it is solarized or
over-timed. This sometimes is to an extent, that a perfect negative is
formed, the white being represented black, and the dark light.
exposing them to the vapor of iodine. Experience has convinced me that a
plate heated to about 80 deg. before being exposed to iodine will present a
far better defined image than a plate at a temperature of 50 deg. I account
for this by noticing that, at a higher temperature, the plate throws off any
larger crystals that might otherwise be deposited, receiving only the finer,
thus producing a more perfect chemical combination of iodide of silver. I
would call the attention of the operator to this point, as presenting
something of interest, and which may direct in a way of accelerating the
future operations.
That the presence of a film of moisture over the plate is a preventive of
uniform chemical action, may be readily understood from the fact that
iodine is almost insoluble in water, requiring seven thousand parts of water
to dissolve one of iodine, or one grain to a gallon of water. Yet its affinities
for silver and other substances are so powerful as to prevent its existing in
an insulated state, hence we can account for the frequent occurrence of a
plate presenting parts of an image over its surface. It is quite evident that
those parts of plate’s surface covered with moisture are nothing like as
sensitive to the iodine as those parts perfectly free.
Exposure of the plate in the Camera, and Position.—The time of
exposure necessary to produce an image upon the Daguerreotype plate, can
only be determined by experiment, and requires a liberality of judgment to
be exercised on the part of the operator. The constant variation of the light
renders it impossible to lay down any exact rule upon this point. Light is not
alone to be considered; the amount of coating exercises a deviating
influence, also the subjects to be represented are not equally photogenic,
some requiring much longer time of exposure than others. This may be
easily observed by exposing the plate at the same time to a plaster bust and
a piece of black velvet, the first being a much stronger reflector of light than
the latter: the time necessary to produce a well developed image of the
velvet being about six times longer than that required to produce an equally
defined image of plaster. The manner of judging correctly of the time is by
the appearance of impression after it has been developed by the mercurial
vapors. Should it present a deep blue or black appearance it is solarized or
over-timed. This sometimes is to an extent, that a perfect negative is
formed, the white being represented black, and the dark light.
Page 21
An object requiring the particular care and attention of the operator is the
proper focus. It is not unfrequently the complaint of sitters that their hands
are represented as being magnified and greatly out of proportion with the
general figure. This is the case also with the nose and eyes, but in a less
degree. As this cannot be wholly remedied, it is desirous to come as near as
possible, and in order to do this, it is necessary to present the figure in such
a position as to bring it as nearly as possible upon the same plane by
making all parts nearly at equal distance from the lenses. This must be done
by the sitter inclining the head and bust formed to a natural, easy position,
and placing the hands closely to the body, thus preserving a propel
proportion, and giving a lively familiarity to the general impression. It is
not an uncommon fault among our less experienced operators to give a
front view of the face of nearly every individual, regardless of any
particular form, and this is often insisted upon by the sitter,[2] who seems to
think the truth of the picture exists principally in the eyes staring the
beholder full in the face.
[2] I might here picture some curious scenes experienced by our operators Every
one is familiar with a certain class of our community whose ideas of the
importance of a free and easy position of the body are too closely confined with
stays, attention to toilet, tightly fitting dress coats and the like, to admit of being
represented as if nature had endowed them with least possible power of
flexibility. To such we would suggest the following, to be well learned and
retained in the mind while presenting themselves before the Daguerreotype
camera:
“The experience of one who has often been Daguerreotyped, is, to let the
operator have his own way.”
Nothing, in many instances, can be more out of place in a Daguerreotype
portrait than this, for let a man with a thin, long, defeated-politician-face, be
represented by a directly front view, we have, to all appearances, increased
the width of the face to such an extent as to reveal it flat and broad, losing
the characteristic point by which it would be the most readily recognized.
The method we should adopt in taking the likeness of such an individual as
above, would be to turn the face from the camera, so as to present the end
of the nose and the prominence of the cheek bone equally distant from the
lenses, and then focusing on the corner of the eye towards the nose, we
cannot in many cases, fail to produce an image with the lips, chin, hair, eyes
and forehead in the minutest possible definition.
proper focus. It is not unfrequently the complaint of sitters that their hands
are represented as being magnified and greatly out of proportion with the
general figure. This is the case also with the nose and eyes, but in a less
degree. As this cannot be wholly remedied, it is desirous to come as near as
possible, and in order to do this, it is necessary to present the figure in such
a position as to bring it as nearly as possible upon the same plane by
making all parts nearly at equal distance from the lenses. This must be done
by the sitter inclining the head and bust formed to a natural, easy position,
and placing the hands closely to the body, thus preserving a propel
proportion, and giving a lively familiarity to the general impression. It is
not an uncommon fault among our less experienced operators to give a
front view of the face of nearly every individual, regardless of any
particular form, and this is often insisted upon by the sitter,[2] who seems to
think the truth of the picture exists principally in the eyes staring the
beholder full in the face.
[2] I might here picture some curious scenes experienced by our operators Every
one is familiar with a certain class of our community whose ideas of the
importance of a free and easy position of the body are too closely confined with
stays, attention to toilet, tightly fitting dress coats and the like, to admit of being
represented as if nature had endowed them with least possible power of
flexibility. To such we would suggest the following, to be well learned and
retained in the mind while presenting themselves before the Daguerreotype
camera:
“The experience of one who has often been Daguerreotyped, is, to let the
operator have his own way.”
Nothing, in many instances, can be more out of place in a Daguerreotype
portrait than this, for let a man with a thin, long, defeated-politician-face, be
represented by a directly front view, we have, to all appearances, increased
the width of the face to such an extent as to reveal it flat and broad, losing
the characteristic point by which it would be the most readily recognized.
The method we should adopt in taking the likeness of such an individual as
above, would be to turn the face from the camera, so as to present the end
of the nose and the prominence of the cheek bone equally distant from the
lenses, and then focusing on the corner of the eye towards the nose, we
cannot in many cases, fail to produce an image with the lips, chin, hair, eyes
and forehead in the minutest possible definition.
Page 22
It should be the study of every operator to notice the effect of the lights
and shades while arranging the sitter, and at the same time be very
particular to give ease in the position.
No matter how successful the chemical effect may have been, should the
image appear stiff and monument-like, all is lost. “In the masterpiece, grace
and elegance must be combined.”
I will here use the words of another, which are very true:
“So great is the difference in many faces, when inspected in opposite
directions, that one of the two views, however accurately taken, would not
communicate the likeness—it not being, the usually observed characteristic
form. When the right view of the head is obtained, it is first necessary to
consider the size of the plate it is to be taken on, so as to form an idea of the
proportion the head should bear to it. The mind must arrange these points
before we commence, or we shall find everything, too large or too small for
the happy proportion of the picture, and the conveying of a just notion of
the stature. The work will have to be done over, and time sacrificed, if this
is not attended to. The adjustment of the head to the size of the plate (as
seen from the margin of the mat), is not to be taught: everyone must bring
himself, by scrutinizing practice, to mathematical accuracy; for something
will be discovered in every face which can be surmounted only by
experience.
“The eye nearest the camera, in a three-quarter-face, is placed in the
middle of the breadth of the plate; the chin, in a person of middle stature, in
the middle of the length, and higher according to the proportional height of
the person.”
In regard to the proper elevation of the camera, it may be here stated that
I have found it best in taking portraits where the hands are introduced, to
place the camera at about equal height with the eyes of the sitter, in order to
bring the face and hands equi-distant from the tube. It will be found, if the
above be followed, that by attaching a string to the camera tube, and
making a semi-circle, that the face and hands of the sitter will occupy a
corresponding distance, and the consequence is that the impression will
appear without the hands being magnified. It has been found that a person
with a freckly face can have as fine, fair, and clear an impression as the
most perfect complexion; this may be done by the subject rubbing the face
until it is very red. The effect is to lessen the contrast, by giving the freckles
and shades while arranging the sitter, and at the same time be very
particular to give ease in the position.
No matter how successful the chemical effect may have been, should the
image appear stiff and monument-like, all is lost. “In the masterpiece, grace
and elegance must be combined.”
I will here use the words of another, which are very true:
“So great is the difference in many faces, when inspected in opposite
directions, that one of the two views, however accurately taken, would not
communicate the likeness—it not being, the usually observed characteristic
form. When the right view of the head is obtained, it is first necessary to
consider the size of the plate it is to be taken on, so as to form an idea of the
proportion the head should bear to it. The mind must arrange these points
before we commence, or we shall find everything, too large or too small for
the happy proportion of the picture, and the conveying of a just notion of
the stature. The work will have to be done over, and time sacrificed, if this
is not attended to. The adjustment of the head to the size of the plate (as
seen from the margin of the mat), is not to be taught: everyone must bring
himself, by scrutinizing practice, to mathematical accuracy; for something
will be discovered in every face which can be surmounted only by
experience.
“The eye nearest the camera, in a three-quarter-face, is placed in the
middle of the breadth of the plate; the chin, in a person of middle stature, in
the middle of the length, and higher according to the proportional height of
the person.”
In regard to the proper elevation of the camera, it may be here stated that
I have found it best in taking portraits where the hands are introduced, to
place the camera at about equal height with the eyes of the sitter, in order to
bring the face and hands equi-distant from the tube. It will be found, if the
above be followed, that by attaching a string to the camera tube, and
making a semi-circle, that the face and hands of the sitter will occupy a
corresponding distance, and the consequence is that the impression will
appear without the hands being magnified. It has been found that a person
with a freckly face can have as fine, fair, and clear an impression as the
most perfect complexion; this may be done by the subject rubbing the face
until it is very red. The effect is to lessen the contrast, by giving the freckles
Page 23
and skin the same color and the photogenic intensity of the red and yellow
being nearly the same, an impression can be produced perfectly clear.
When a child is to be taken, and there are doubts of its keeping still, the
operation may be accelerated by placing it nearer the window bringing the
screen nearer, and placing a white muslin cloth over the head; this will
enable you to work in one third of the usual time. Should the person move,
or the plate become exposed to the light, it may be restored to its original
sensitiveness by placing it over the quick, one or two seconds.
Developing the Daguerreotype.—After the plate has been submitted to
the operation of the light, the image is still invisible. It requires to be
exposed to the vapors of heated mercury. It is not absolutely necessary to
apply artificial heat to the mercury to develop the image, for fair proofs
have been produced by placing a plate over the bath at the ordinary
temperature of the atmosphere. This plan, however, requires a long time and
cannot be adopted in practice, even if it were advisable. The time more
usually required in developing the image over the mercurial vapors, is about
two minutes, and the temperature is raised to a point necessary to produce
the desired effect in that time. This point varies as indicated by different
scales, but for the ordinary scales it is not far from 90 deg. cen.
The mercury bath is accompanied with a centigrade thermometer, by
which the heat is regulated. Those furnished by the manufacturers are not
always correct, and it requires some experience to find the proper degree on
the scale.
I would here remark that it is advisable, when placing the spirit lamp
under the bath, to so arrange it that the position of applied heat should
always be on the same point, viz., should the heat be directly under the bulb
containing the thermometer it would raise the mercury in the tube to the
point marked, and the temperature of that in the bath would be far below
what it should be; hence it is (where time is followed for developing) that
many failures occur. This is observed more readily in the large baths made
of thick iron, particularly upon first heating. In practice I apply the heat as
nearly as possible between the centre of the bottom of the bath and the bulb
containing the mercury tube. It is advisable to keep the lamp lighted under
the bath from the time of commencing in the morning to the close of
business at night. By this means you have a uniformity of action, that
cannot be otherwise obtained.
being nearly the same, an impression can be produced perfectly clear.
When a child is to be taken, and there are doubts of its keeping still, the
operation may be accelerated by placing it nearer the window bringing the
screen nearer, and placing a white muslin cloth over the head; this will
enable you to work in one third of the usual time. Should the person move,
or the plate become exposed to the light, it may be restored to its original
sensitiveness by placing it over the quick, one or two seconds.
Developing the Daguerreotype.—After the plate has been submitted to
the operation of the light, the image is still invisible. It requires to be
exposed to the vapors of heated mercury. It is not absolutely necessary to
apply artificial heat to the mercury to develop the image, for fair proofs
have been produced by placing a plate over the bath at the ordinary
temperature of the atmosphere. This plan, however, requires a long time and
cannot be adopted in practice, even if it were advisable. The time more
usually required in developing the image over the mercurial vapors, is about
two minutes, and the temperature is raised to a point necessary to produce
the desired effect in that time. This point varies as indicated by different
scales, but for the ordinary scales it is not far from 90 deg. cen.
The mercury bath is accompanied with a centigrade thermometer, by
which the heat is regulated. Those furnished by the manufacturers are not
always correct, and it requires some experience to find the proper degree on
the scale.
I would here remark that it is advisable, when placing the spirit lamp
under the bath, to so arrange it that the position of applied heat should
always be on the same point, viz., should the heat be directly under the bulb
containing the thermometer it would raise the mercury in the tube to the
point marked, and the temperature of that in the bath would be far below
what it should be; hence it is (where time is followed for developing) that
many failures occur. This is observed more readily in the large baths made
of thick iron, particularly upon first heating. In practice I apply the heat as
nearly as possible between the centre of the bottom of the bath and the bulb
containing the mercury tube. It is advisable to keep the lamp lighted under
the bath from the time of commencing in the morning to the close of
business at night. By this means you have a uniformity of action, that
cannot be otherwise obtained.
Page 24
It is well known to the experienced Daguerreotypist, that different
atmospheres have a decided effect upon the mercury in developing the
Daguerreotype. It will require a greater degree of heat for one atmosphere
than for another. Experience alone determines this little difference.
In summer, on cloudy and stormy days, mercurial vapors rise more
readily and quickly than in the temperature of autumn or winter. From 60
degrees upwards towards the boiling point (660 deg.), the vapors of
mercury rise in greater abundance and collect in larger globules on cold
surfaces.
For various reasons I prefer a high temperature and short exposure. It
accelerates the process. It renders the lights of the picture more strong and
clear, while the deep shades are more intense. It gives a finer lustre to the
drapery. The solarized portions also are very seldom blue, especially after
gilding. If heated too high, however, the light parts become of a dead,
chalky white, and the shadows are injured by numerous little globules of
mercury deposited over them. Just the right quantity of mercury leaves the
impression of a transparent, pearly white tone, which improves in the
highest degree in gilding. To mercurialize with exactness is a nice point. If
there is reason to suspect having timed rather short in the camera, reduce
the time over mercury in a corresponding proportion. A dark impression
will be ruined by the quantity of mercury which would only improve a light
one.
If practicable, it is most expedient that the plate be submitted to the
action of mercury immediately on coming from the camera. I have
frequently, however, carried plates for miles in the plate-holders and after
exposing in the camera, brought them back to expose to mercury, and
obtained fair proofs; but for the reason before given, it is advisable to carry
along the bath, and bring out the impression on the spot.
It is sometimes the practice of inexperienced operators to take the plate
off the bath and examine the impression by solar light. This plan should be
abandoned, as it is almost sure to produce a dense blue film over the
shadows.
This I am led to believe is occasioned by the action of light on the yet
sensitive portions of the plate, and made to appear only by subsequent
exposure to mercury, being equivalent to solarization.
atmospheres have a decided effect upon the mercury in developing the
Daguerreotype. It will require a greater degree of heat for one atmosphere
than for another. Experience alone determines this little difference.
In summer, on cloudy and stormy days, mercurial vapors rise more
readily and quickly than in the temperature of autumn or winter. From 60
degrees upwards towards the boiling point (660 deg.), the vapors of
mercury rise in greater abundance and collect in larger globules on cold
surfaces.
For various reasons I prefer a high temperature and short exposure. It
accelerates the process. It renders the lights of the picture more strong and
clear, while the deep shades are more intense. It gives a finer lustre to the
drapery. The solarized portions also are very seldom blue, especially after
gilding. If heated too high, however, the light parts become of a dead,
chalky white, and the shadows are injured by numerous little globules of
mercury deposited over them. Just the right quantity of mercury leaves the
impression of a transparent, pearly white tone, which improves in the
highest degree in gilding. To mercurialize with exactness is a nice point. If
there is reason to suspect having timed rather short in the camera, reduce
the time over mercury in a corresponding proportion. A dark impression
will be ruined by the quantity of mercury which would only improve a light
one.
If practicable, it is most expedient that the plate be submitted to the
action of mercury immediately on coming from the camera. I have
frequently, however, carried plates for miles in the plate-holders and after
exposing in the camera, brought them back to expose to mercury, and
obtained fair proofs; but for the reason before given, it is advisable to carry
along the bath, and bring out the impression on the spot.
It is sometimes the practice of inexperienced operators to take the plate
off the bath and examine the impression by solar light. This plan should be
abandoned, as it is almost sure to produce a dense blue film over the
shadows.
This I am led to believe is occasioned by the action of light on the yet
sensitive portions of the plate, and made to appear only by subsequent
exposure to mercury, being equivalent to solarization.
Page 25
There has been little said by our professors upon the subject of the
position of the plates while exposed to the mercurial vapour. Mr. Hunt, in
referring to this subject, says: “Daguerre himself laid much stress upon the
necessity of exposing the plate to the mercury at an angle of about 45 deg..
This, perhaps, is the most convenient position as it enables the operator to
view the plate distinctly, and watch the development of the design; but
beyond this, I am satisfied there exists no real necessity for angular
position. Both horizontally and vertically, I have often produced equally
effective Daguerreotypes.” I presume from the last sentence of Mr. Hunt,
that he has confined his experiments to the smaller sized plates. Hence he
may not have thought of the effect of the vertical exposure of a large plate.
In America this is a subject of no little importance. When an impression
is to be developed upon a plate fifteen by seventeen inches, were we to use
an angle of about 45 deg., it would be found to make a perceptible
difference in the appearance of the image. By examining the wood tops of
our baths as formerly made, it will be found that there is a great variation in
the distance from the mercury to the different portions of the plate. By
measuring one of these tops for the size plate above mentioned, I find the
distance to the nearest point between the mercury and the plate, to be
thirteen, and the middle point sixteen, and the furthest point twenty-one and
a half inches: by this we see that one point of the plate is eight and a half
inches further from the mercury than the nearest point; even this is not the
variation there would necessarily be, were we to adopt the angle of 45 deg.
as urged by Daguerre.
Among our principal professors, the bevel top will not be found in use
where the large plates are used. Should any one feel desirous to test more
minutely the effect produced by a bevel top bath, I would suggest to them to
place a frame, so constructed as to hold three sixth size plates, and fit it to
the top of the bath, and so arrange it with openings that the plates may be
placed, one at the nearest point of the mercury, the second midway, and the
third to the greatest distance, and by placing the plates over at one and the
same time, the experimenter will be enabled to judge if there exists a
difference in the developing. In speaking of the above, reference is had to
baths to the ordinary heights used by operators.
We will now proceed to examine the effect produced by mercurial vapor
upon the plate at different lengths of exposure. In some investigations
position of the plates while exposed to the mercurial vapour. Mr. Hunt, in
referring to this subject, says: “Daguerre himself laid much stress upon the
necessity of exposing the plate to the mercury at an angle of about 45 deg..
This, perhaps, is the most convenient position as it enables the operator to
view the plate distinctly, and watch the development of the design; but
beyond this, I am satisfied there exists no real necessity for angular
position. Both horizontally and vertically, I have often produced equally
effective Daguerreotypes.” I presume from the last sentence of Mr. Hunt,
that he has confined his experiments to the smaller sized plates. Hence he
may not have thought of the effect of the vertical exposure of a large plate.
In America this is a subject of no little importance. When an impression
is to be developed upon a plate fifteen by seventeen inches, were we to use
an angle of about 45 deg., it would be found to make a perceptible
difference in the appearance of the image. By examining the wood tops of
our baths as formerly made, it will be found that there is a great variation in
the distance from the mercury to the different portions of the plate. By
measuring one of these tops for the size plate above mentioned, I find the
distance to the nearest point between the mercury and the plate, to be
thirteen, and the middle point sixteen, and the furthest point twenty-one and
a half inches: by this we see that one point of the plate is eight and a half
inches further from the mercury than the nearest point; even this is not the
variation there would necessarily be, were we to adopt the angle of 45 deg.
as urged by Daguerre.
Among our principal professors, the bevel top will not be found in use
where the large plates are used. Should any one feel desirous to test more
minutely the effect produced by a bevel top bath, I would suggest to them to
place a frame, so constructed as to hold three sixth size plates, and fit it to
the top of the bath, and so arrange it with openings that the plates may be
placed, one at the nearest point of the mercury, the second midway, and the
third to the greatest distance, and by placing the plates over at one and the
same time, the experimenter will be enabled to judge if there exists a
difference in the developing. In speaking of the above, reference is had to
baths to the ordinary heights used by operators.
We will now proceed to examine the effect produced by mercurial vapor
upon the plate at different lengths of exposure. In some investigations
Page 26
which I have made upon the appearance of the Daguerreotype impressions
when developed over mercury at 90 deg. C. (194 deg. F.), the following was
the result. Plates, coated and exposed to light in our usual manner of
operating, produced on exposure of
1/2 minute, whole impression, deep blue.
1 minute, ashy and flat; no shadows; linen, deep blue.
1 1/2 minute, coarse and spongy; shadows, muddy; drapery, dirty reddish
brown.
2 minutes, shallow or watery; shadows, yellowish; drapery, brown.
2 1/4 minutes, soft; face, scarcely white; shadows, neutral; drapery, fine
dark brown linen somewhat blue.
2 1/2 minutes, clear and pearly; shadows, clear and positive, of a purple
tint; drapery, jet black, with the dark shades slightly frosted with mercury.
2 3/4 to 3 minutes, hard and chalky; shadows, harsh; drapery, roughened,
and misty with excess of mercury.
The foregoing results will be found general.
There are numerous opinions among our operators in regard to the
quantity of mercury necessary for a bath. As regards this, I need only say,
similar results occur when two pounds or two ounces are used, but the
quantity generally employed is about a quarter of a pound. I am of the
opinion that one ounce will answer as well as a larger quantity. I know of no
better proof in favor of a small quantity than that presented in the following
incident. Several years since, an operator (Mr. Senter, of Auburn, N.Y.) of
my acquaintance, was requested to go several miles to take a Daguerreotype
portrait of a deceased person. He packed up his apparatus and proceeded
over a rough road for some distance to the house where he was to take the
portrait, and arranging his apparatus, with all the expedition which the
occasion required, after having everything in usual order (as was supposed),
he proceeded and took some ten or twelve very superior impressions. They
were fine, clear, and well developed. After taking the number ordered, he
proceeded to repack his apparatus, and to his surprise, when he took up the
bottle he carried the mercury in, he found it still filled, and none in the bath,
except only such particles as had adhered to the sides, after dusting and
being jolted for several miles over the rough road. From this it will be seen
that a very little mercury will suffice to develop fine proofs. I saw some of
when developed over mercury at 90 deg. C. (194 deg. F.), the following was
the result. Plates, coated and exposed to light in our usual manner of
operating, produced on exposure of
1/2 minute, whole impression, deep blue.
1 minute, ashy and flat; no shadows; linen, deep blue.
1 1/2 minute, coarse and spongy; shadows, muddy; drapery, dirty reddish
brown.
2 minutes, shallow or watery; shadows, yellowish; drapery, brown.
2 1/4 minutes, soft; face, scarcely white; shadows, neutral; drapery, fine
dark brown linen somewhat blue.
2 1/2 minutes, clear and pearly; shadows, clear and positive, of a purple
tint; drapery, jet black, with the dark shades slightly frosted with mercury.
2 3/4 to 3 minutes, hard and chalky; shadows, harsh; drapery, roughened,
and misty with excess of mercury.
The foregoing results will be found general.
There are numerous opinions among our operators in regard to the
quantity of mercury necessary for a bath. As regards this, I need only say,
similar results occur when two pounds or two ounces are used, but the
quantity generally employed is about a quarter of a pound. I am of the
opinion that one ounce will answer as well as a larger quantity. I know of no
better proof in favor of a small quantity than that presented in the following
incident. Several years since, an operator (Mr. Senter, of Auburn, N.Y.) of
my acquaintance, was requested to go several miles to take a Daguerreotype
portrait of a deceased person. He packed up his apparatus and proceeded
over a rough road for some distance to the house where he was to take the
portrait, and arranging his apparatus, with all the expedition which the
occasion required, after having everything in usual order (as was supposed),
he proceeded and took some ten or twelve very superior impressions. They
were fine, clear, and well developed. After taking the number ordered, he
proceeded to repack his apparatus, and to his surprise, when he took up the
bottle he carried the mercury in, he found it still filled, and none in the bath,
except only such particles as had adhered to the sides, after dusting and
being jolted for several miles over the rough road. From this it will be seen
that a very little mercury will suffice to develop fine proofs. I saw some of
Page 27
the impressions referred to above, and they were certainly well developed,
and very superior specimens of our art.
Removing the Coating.—After the impression has been developed over
the mercurial vapor, the next step is to remove the sensitive coating. For
this purpose the following solution is used:
Put about two ounces of hyposulphite of soda in a pint of water, which
should always be filtered before using. A convenient way of doing this is to
have two bottles, and a large funnel with a sponge pressed into the neck of
it; or, what is better, some filtering paper folded in it. The solution in one
bottle, the funnel is placed in the other, and the picture held over it; when
the solution is poured on the plate, it runs from it into the filter, and is
always ready for use.
It is best that the washing be done immediately on the plate coming from
the mercury bath. If allowed to stand long with the coating on, it assumes a
very dark tint—as the operation of the light continues, though less active
than while exposed in the camera, and destroys that brightness which would
otherwise have been obtained. It is preferable to wash and gild a picture
without it first being dried; yet when there are doubts of its giving
satisfaction, there would sometimes be a saving by drying and getting the
decision of the subject before gilding, as this last injures the plate for
another impression. First, light your spirit-lamp, then with your plyers take
the plate by the lower right-hand corner, holding it in such a manner that the
plyers will form in a line with the upper left-hand corner; pour on, slowly,
the hyposulphite solution, slightly agitating the plate, until all the coating is
dissolved off; then rinse off with clean water, and if it is not to be gilded,
dry by holding the plate perpendicular with the bottom left-hand corner
lowest, and applying the blaze of the spirit-lamp to the back, at the same
time blowing gently downward on the face of the plate.
The hyposulphite solution should be often filtered through a sponge, and
it will answer for a great number of washings. Yet it is observed that the
mercury collects in this solution in small globules; these often come in
contact with the plate, causing white spots, which spoil the impression.
They should be guarded against, and the solution renewed. Again, in order
to prevent streaks or scum on the surface of the plate, it is necessary that the
coating should be removed with a good degree of uniformity. I find in
practice that the hyposulphite of soda in our market varies much as regards
and very superior specimens of our art.
Removing the Coating.—After the impression has been developed over
the mercurial vapor, the next step is to remove the sensitive coating. For
this purpose the following solution is used:
Put about two ounces of hyposulphite of soda in a pint of water, which
should always be filtered before using. A convenient way of doing this is to
have two bottles, and a large funnel with a sponge pressed into the neck of
it; or, what is better, some filtering paper folded in it. The solution in one
bottle, the funnel is placed in the other, and the picture held over it; when
the solution is poured on the plate, it runs from it into the filter, and is
always ready for use.
It is best that the washing be done immediately on the plate coming from
the mercury bath. If allowed to stand long with the coating on, it assumes a
very dark tint—as the operation of the light continues, though less active
than while exposed in the camera, and destroys that brightness which would
otherwise have been obtained. It is preferable to wash and gild a picture
without it first being dried; yet when there are doubts of its giving
satisfaction, there would sometimes be a saving by drying and getting the
decision of the subject before gilding, as this last injures the plate for
another impression. First, light your spirit-lamp, then with your plyers take
the plate by the lower right-hand corner, holding it in such a manner that the
plyers will form in a line with the upper left-hand corner; pour on, slowly,
the hyposulphite solution, slightly agitating the plate, until all the coating is
dissolved off; then rinse off with clean water, and if it is not to be gilded,
dry by holding the plate perpendicular with the bottom left-hand corner
lowest, and applying the blaze of the spirit-lamp to the back, at the same
time blowing gently downward on the face of the plate.
The hyposulphite solution should be often filtered through a sponge, and
it will answer for a great number of washings. Yet it is observed that the
mercury collects in this solution in small globules; these often come in
contact with the plate, causing white spots, which spoil the impression.
They should be guarded against, and the solution renewed. Again, in order
to prevent streaks or scum on the surface of the plate, it is necessary that the
coating should be removed with a good degree of uniformity. I find in
practice that the hyposulphite of soda in our market varies much as regards
Page 28
strength, and consequently the rule to be adopted is to make a solution of
sufficient strength to remove the coating in about ten seconds. I am aware
that it may be said that this strong solution would have a tendency to injure
the impression by destroying in a measure the sharpness of outline. To meet
this, it need only to be said that the preventive is, to not let the solution rest
on the surface of the plate for a longer time than is absolutely necessary,
and then it should be drenched copiously with water; hence a chemical
action upon the image is prevented and the general operation facilitated.
This plan is adopted by our first operators with the greatest success.
If the operator should allow the hyposulphite solution to run over the
plate unevenly, it is quite likely that white or blue streaks would result.
These it is impossible to remove without injury to the impression. Some, in
order to prevent this, breathe over the surface, thus moistening it and
putting it in a condition to receive the solution with greater uniformity. The
plate should be well washed with water before gilding.
Gilding, or Fixing the Image.—The next process to be given is that for
fixing the image on the plate. This is done by precipitating a thin film of
gold over the surface and is productive of the most brilliant effect when
prepared immediately after the plate has been washed with water after the
application of the hyposulphite solution, and before the plate has been
allowed to dry. When, however, the plate has been dried and allowed to
stand for any time, before gilding, the hyposulphite wash should be applied
as at first, in order to destroy any chemical coating that may have been
formed on exposure of the plate to the air. For gilding the larger plates, we
have a gilding stand so constructed that the plate can be put on a perfect
level. In practice, I prefer holding the plate with nippers, fastened at one
corner. Hold the plate in the same manner as in removing the coating; pour
on the gilding, newly filtered, until the surface is wholly covered, and with
the blaze of the spirit lamp, at least three inches high, apply it to the back of
the plate, moving it about, that the surface may be heated with as much
uniformity as possible. Continuing this operation, the surface will generally
become covered with small yellow bubbles which soon disappear, leaving
the image clear and distinct.
It is advisable to make use of a lamp having a sufficiently strong flame to
produce the effect in a few minutes. If after a first heating, it is found that
the impression can admit of a greater degree of intensity, it might be heated
sufficient strength to remove the coating in about ten seconds. I am aware
that it may be said that this strong solution would have a tendency to injure
the impression by destroying in a measure the sharpness of outline. To meet
this, it need only to be said that the preventive is, to not let the solution rest
on the surface of the plate for a longer time than is absolutely necessary,
and then it should be drenched copiously with water; hence a chemical
action upon the image is prevented and the general operation facilitated.
This plan is adopted by our first operators with the greatest success.
If the operator should allow the hyposulphite solution to run over the
plate unevenly, it is quite likely that white or blue streaks would result.
These it is impossible to remove without injury to the impression. Some, in
order to prevent this, breathe over the surface, thus moistening it and
putting it in a condition to receive the solution with greater uniformity. The
plate should be well washed with water before gilding.
Gilding, or Fixing the Image.—The next process to be given is that for
fixing the image on the plate. This is done by precipitating a thin film of
gold over the surface and is productive of the most brilliant effect when
prepared immediately after the plate has been washed with water after the
application of the hyposulphite solution, and before the plate has been
allowed to dry. When, however, the plate has been dried and allowed to
stand for any time, before gilding, the hyposulphite wash should be applied
as at first, in order to destroy any chemical coating that may have been
formed on exposure of the plate to the air. For gilding the larger plates, we
have a gilding stand so constructed that the plate can be put on a perfect
level. In practice, I prefer holding the plate with nippers, fastened at one
corner. Hold the plate in the same manner as in removing the coating; pour
on the gilding, newly filtered, until the surface is wholly covered, and with
the blaze of the spirit lamp, at least three inches high, apply it to the back of
the plate, moving it about, that the surface may be heated with as much
uniformity as possible. Continuing this operation, the surface will generally
become covered with small yellow bubbles which soon disappear, leaving
the image clear and distinct.
It is advisable to make use of a lamp having a sufficiently strong flame to
produce the effect in a few minutes. If after a first heating, it is found that
the impression can admit of a greater degree of intensity, it might be heated
Page 29
anew; but that is seldom necessary, and often by trying to do too, well, the
operator, if he persists in heating certain parts of the plate, may find the
liquid dry up just above the flame, and inevitably cause a stain; [3] or else
the blacks are covered with a film, or even the coating of gold may
suddenly exfoliate, when small particles are detached from the plate. The
impression is then entirely spoiled, but the plate may be re-polished.
[3] This can be remedied, however, if it is immediately washed over with the
same solution that is on the plate, so that the surface shall not become cool;
continue for a short time to apply the lamp under, and agitate the plate slightly,
and it will soon be free from all imperfections and give a fine clear tone.
It is not unfrequent that the surface assumes a dark, cloudy appearance.
This is generally the best sign that the gilding will bring out the impression
with the greatest degree of distinctness. Soon, the clouds gradually begin to
disappear, and, “like a thing of life” stands forth the image, clothed with all
the brilliancy and clearness that the combined efforts of nature and art can
produce. When in the operator’s judgment the operation has arrived at the
highest state of perfection, rinse suddenly, with an abundance of clean
water, and dry as before described.
When an impression is dark, the gilding process may be longer
continued; but when light, it should be gilded quickly, as lengthening the
time tends to bleach the impression and make it too white. The cause of this
appears to be, that with a moderate heat the chlorine is merely set free from
the gold, and remaining in the solution, instead of being driven off, with its
powerful bleaching, properties, it immediately acts upon the shades of the
picture. A dark impression can thus, by a low heat, long-continued, be made
quite light. To procure the best effect, then, heat suddenly with a large
blaze, and judging it to be at the maximum, cool as suddenly as possible.
When the hyposulphite of gold is used instead of the chloride, a less heat
should be employed.
Coloring Daguerreotypes.—Of all the so-called improvements in the
Daguerreotype, the coloring is the least worthy of notice. Yet the operator is
often, in fact most generally, called upon to hide an excellent specimen
under paint. I can conceive of nothing more perfect in a Daguerreotype than
a finely-developed image, with clearness of lights and shadows, possessing
the lively tone resulting from good gilding. Such pictures, however, are not
always had, and then color may perform the part of hiding the
operator, if he persists in heating certain parts of the plate, may find the
liquid dry up just above the flame, and inevitably cause a stain; [3] or else
the blacks are covered with a film, or even the coating of gold may
suddenly exfoliate, when small particles are detached from the plate. The
impression is then entirely spoiled, but the plate may be re-polished.
[3] This can be remedied, however, if it is immediately washed over with the
same solution that is on the plate, so that the surface shall not become cool;
continue for a short time to apply the lamp under, and agitate the plate slightly,
and it will soon be free from all imperfections and give a fine clear tone.
It is not unfrequent that the surface assumes a dark, cloudy appearance.
This is generally the best sign that the gilding will bring out the impression
with the greatest degree of distinctness. Soon, the clouds gradually begin to
disappear, and, “like a thing of life” stands forth the image, clothed with all
the brilliancy and clearness that the combined efforts of nature and art can
produce. When in the operator’s judgment the operation has arrived at the
highest state of perfection, rinse suddenly, with an abundance of clean
water, and dry as before described.
When an impression is dark, the gilding process may be longer
continued; but when light, it should be gilded quickly, as lengthening the
time tends to bleach the impression and make it too white. The cause of this
appears to be, that with a moderate heat the chlorine is merely set free from
the gold, and remaining in the solution, instead of being driven off, with its
powerful bleaching, properties, it immediately acts upon the shades of the
picture. A dark impression can thus, by a low heat, long-continued, be made
quite light. To procure the best effect, then, heat suddenly with a large
blaze, and judging it to be at the maximum, cool as suddenly as possible.
When the hyposulphite of gold is used instead of the chloride, a less heat
should be employed.
Coloring Daguerreotypes.—Of all the so-called improvements in the
Daguerreotype, the coloring is the least worthy of notice. Yet the operator is
often, in fact most generally, called upon to hide an excellent specimen
under paint. I can conceive of nothing more perfect in a Daguerreotype than
a finely-developed image, with clearness of lights and shadows, possessing
the lively tone resulting from good gilding. Such pictures, however, are not
always had, and then color may perform the part of hiding the
Page 30
imperfections. We present the following method as given in Willat’s
Manual:
“Daguerreotype portraits are now commonly met with beautifully
colored; but the coloring is a process requiring great care and judgment, and
many good pictures are spoiled in fruitless experiments. Several different
methods of coloring have been proposed. The simplest mode appears to be
that of using dry colors prepared in the following manner: A little of the
color required, very finely ground, is thrown into a glass containing water,
in which a few grains of gum arabic have been dissolved. After standing a
few moments, the mixture may be passed through bibulous paper, and the
residue perfectly dried for use. The principal colors used are Carmine,
Chrome Yellow, Burnt Sienna, Ultramarine and White; boxes fitted with
sets of colors properly prepared, may be obtained of the dealers, and
include Carmine, White, Lilac, Sky Blue, Pink, Yellow, Flesh color, Orange,
Brown, Purple, Light Green, Dark Green and Blue. With a few colors,
however, all the rest may be made thus: Orange, by Yellow and Red;
Purple, with Blue and Red; Green, Blue and Yellow; Brown, with Umber,
Carmine and Lamp Black; Scarlet, Carmine and Light Red. While it is true
that a little color may relieve the dark metallic look of some
Daguerreotypes, it must not be concealed that the covering of the fine
delicate outline and exquisite gradations of tone of a good picture with such
a coating, is barbarous and unartistic.
“The prevaling taste is, however, decidedly for colored proofs, and the
following directions will assist the amateur in ministering to this perverted
taste, should he be so inclined. The coloring should commence with the
face, and the flesh tint must be stippled on (not rubbed) with a small
camel’s-hair brush, beginning from the centre of the cheek, taking great
care not to go over the outline of the face, and also not to have too much
color in the brush; the eyes and eyebrows must not be touched with color.
After the flesh color is applied, take a piece of very soft cotton and pass it
very gently backwards and forwards over the face, so as to soften down the
color, and then apply the carmine to give the required tint. For men, the
darker tints should predominate, and for women the warmer. Very light hair
may be improved by a slight tint of brown, or yellow and brown, according
to the color. In coloring the drapery, the same care must be used. No rules
can be laid down for all the different colors required, and the amateur had
better obtain the assistance or advice of some one accustomed to the use of
Manual:
“Daguerreotype portraits are now commonly met with beautifully
colored; but the coloring is a process requiring great care and judgment, and
many good pictures are spoiled in fruitless experiments. Several different
methods of coloring have been proposed. The simplest mode appears to be
that of using dry colors prepared in the following manner: A little of the
color required, very finely ground, is thrown into a glass containing water,
in which a few grains of gum arabic have been dissolved. After standing a
few moments, the mixture may be passed through bibulous paper, and the
residue perfectly dried for use. The principal colors used are Carmine,
Chrome Yellow, Burnt Sienna, Ultramarine and White; boxes fitted with
sets of colors properly prepared, may be obtained of the dealers, and
include Carmine, White, Lilac, Sky Blue, Pink, Yellow, Flesh color, Orange,
Brown, Purple, Light Green, Dark Green and Blue. With a few colors,
however, all the rest may be made thus: Orange, by Yellow and Red;
Purple, with Blue and Red; Green, Blue and Yellow; Brown, with Umber,
Carmine and Lamp Black; Scarlet, Carmine and Light Red. While it is true
that a little color may relieve the dark metallic look of some
Daguerreotypes, it must not be concealed that the covering of the fine
delicate outline and exquisite gradations of tone of a good picture with such
a coating, is barbarous and unartistic.
“The prevaling taste is, however, decidedly for colored proofs, and the
following directions will assist the amateur in ministering to this perverted
taste, should he be so inclined. The coloring should commence with the
face, and the flesh tint must be stippled on (not rubbed) with a small
camel’s-hair brush, beginning from the centre of the cheek, taking great
care not to go over the outline of the face, and also not to have too much
color in the brush; the eyes and eyebrows must not be touched with color.
After the flesh color is applied, take a piece of very soft cotton and pass it
very gently backwards and forwards over the face, so as to soften down the
color, and then apply the carmine to give the required tint. For men, the
darker tints should predominate, and for women the warmer. Very light hair
may be improved by a slight tint of brown, or yellow and brown, according
to the color. In coloring the drapery, the same care must be used. No rules
can be laid down for all the different colors required, and the amateur had
better obtain the assistance or advice of some one accustomed to the use of
Page 31
colors. A little white with a dash of blue or a little silver, will improve white
linen, lace, etc. The jewelry may be touched with gold or silver from the
shells, moistened with distilled water, and laid on with a fine-pointed sable-
hair brush.
“Brilliants may be represented by picking the plate with the point of a pin
or knife.”
linen, lace, etc. The jewelry may be touched with gold or silver from the
shells, moistened with distilled water, and laid on with a fine-pointed sable-
hair brush.
“Brilliants may be represented by picking the plate with the point of a pin
or knife.”
Page 32
CHAPTER II.
MISCELLANEOUS.
Coloring Back Grounds—Transparent ditto—Gilding
Dissolvent Solution for removing Specks—Solarized
Impression—To Purify Water—Cleaning Mercury—
Adhesive Paper—Black Stain for Apparatus—Sealing Wax
for Bottles—Rouge—Rotten Stone—Potassa Solution—
Hyposulphite Solution—Substitute for do.—Gilding
Solution—Solution for increasing the Brilliancy of the
Daguerreotype—Bleaching Solution;—Cold Gilding—
Neutralizing Agents—Buff Dryer—Keeping Buffs in order
—Cleaning Buckskins—Reflector for taking Views.
To Color Back-grounds—To obtain a properly colored back ground is a
matter of no little importance to the Daguerreotype operator. I had nearly
exhausted all patience, and tried the skill of painters to obtain a back-
ground that would be suitable to my purpose; but all to no avail. At last I
adopted the following method, and at a cost of coloring of twenty-five
cents, can now produce a back-ground far more valuable than those which
had cost five dollars before.
Take common earth paint, such as is used in painting roofs; mix this with
water to about the consistency of cream; then to four quarts of this mixture
add about one pint of glue water (common glue dissolved in water, also
about as thick as cream). This last will cause the paint to adhere to the cloth,
to which it is applied with a common white-wash brush. By applying the
brush on the coating while it is wet, it may be so blended that not a line can
be seen, and a perfectly smooth color of any shade can be obtained. The
MISCELLANEOUS.
Coloring Back Grounds—Transparent ditto—Gilding
Dissolvent Solution for removing Specks—Solarized
Impression—To Purify Water—Cleaning Mercury—
Adhesive Paper—Black Stain for Apparatus—Sealing Wax
for Bottles—Rouge—Rotten Stone—Potassa Solution—
Hyposulphite Solution—Substitute for do.—Gilding
Solution—Solution for increasing the Brilliancy of the
Daguerreotype—Bleaching Solution;—Cold Gilding—
Neutralizing Agents—Buff Dryer—Keeping Buffs in order
—Cleaning Buckskins—Reflector for taking Views.
To Color Back-grounds—To obtain a properly colored back ground is a
matter of no little importance to the Daguerreotype operator. I had nearly
exhausted all patience, and tried the skill of painters to obtain a back-
ground that would be suitable to my purpose; but all to no avail. At last I
adopted the following method, and at a cost of coloring of twenty-five
cents, can now produce a back-ground far more valuable than those which
had cost five dollars before.
Take common earth paint, such as is used in painting roofs; mix this with
water to about the consistency of cream; then to four quarts of this mixture
add about one pint of glue water (common glue dissolved in water, also
about as thick as cream). This last will cause the paint to adhere to the cloth,
to which it is applied with a common white-wash brush. By applying the
brush on the coating while it is wet, it may be so blended that not a line can
be seen, and a perfectly smooth color of any shade can be obtained. The
Page 33
shade of color I use is a light reddish-brown. Tripoli, rotten-stone, or any
earthy matter, may be applied in the same manner.
Transparent or Invisible Back-ground.—I give this as originally
published in my System of Photography, 1849:
“Take a large woollen blanket with long nap, the longer and rougher it is
the finer will be the effect produced; stretch it on a frame of sufficient size,
and suspend the frame at the centre of the upper end by a string fastened to
a nail in the ceiling, from three to five feet back of the sitter. Having
arranged this, fasten another string to the side of the frame, and while the
operation is going on in the camera, swing the back-ground from right to
left, continuing this during the whole time of sitting, and you have a clear
“transparent” back-ground, which throws the image out in bold relief, and
renders the surface of the plate invisible. If equalled at all it is only by
atmospheric back-ground. I consider it to be the best ever known, and think
it needs but to be tried to afford satisfactory proof that it is so. Although
used by few before, since the first edition of this work at least two thirds of
the operators have adopted its use; for any one can at once understand the
principle and the effect which it produces.”
It may be added that a motion imparted to to any back-ground where
softness is desired, produces an excellent effect.
Gilding Dissolvent.—To one quart of muriatic acid add as much oxide of
iron (common iron rust) as it will dissolve in two days. This may be done
by putting in the oxide in excess. It should be frequently shook, and when
wanted for bottling it should be allowed to stand in order to settle. When
this is done the solution may be poured off, and reduced by adding to it an
equal quantity of water; then it is ready for use. This constitutes a gilding
dissolvent now in our market.
Solution for Removing Specks.—There is probably no one cause of
complaint so general as “what makes those black specks?” There are
several causes which produce them, and probably the most general are dust,
rouge, or a spray of moisture on the plate. It this be the case, there is no
solution which can remove them, as they have prevented a chemical action
with the silver, and their removal would only expose the surface of the plate
which in itself would afford a contrast with the impression. Another and
less dangerous source of these specks is organic matter contained in the
solution employed in dissolving the chemicals, or the water in washing.
earthy matter, may be applied in the same manner.
Transparent or Invisible Back-ground.—I give this as originally
published in my System of Photography, 1849:
“Take a large woollen blanket with long nap, the longer and rougher it is
the finer will be the effect produced; stretch it on a frame of sufficient size,
and suspend the frame at the centre of the upper end by a string fastened to
a nail in the ceiling, from three to five feet back of the sitter. Having
arranged this, fasten another string to the side of the frame, and while the
operation is going on in the camera, swing the back-ground from right to
left, continuing this during the whole time of sitting, and you have a clear
“transparent” back-ground, which throws the image out in bold relief, and
renders the surface of the plate invisible. If equalled at all it is only by
atmospheric back-ground. I consider it to be the best ever known, and think
it needs but to be tried to afford satisfactory proof that it is so. Although
used by few before, since the first edition of this work at least two thirds of
the operators have adopted its use; for any one can at once understand the
principle and the effect which it produces.”
It may be added that a motion imparted to to any back-ground where
softness is desired, produces an excellent effect.
Gilding Dissolvent.—To one quart of muriatic acid add as much oxide of
iron (common iron rust) as it will dissolve in two days. This may be done
by putting in the oxide in excess. It should be frequently shook, and when
wanted for bottling it should be allowed to stand in order to settle. When
this is done the solution may be poured off, and reduced by adding to it an
equal quantity of water; then it is ready for use. This constitutes a gilding
dissolvent now in our market.
Solution for Removing Specks.—There is probably no one cause of
complaint so general as “what makes those black specks?” There are
several causes which produce them, and probably the most general are dust,
rouge, or a spray of moisture on the plate. It this be the case, there is no
solution which can remove them, as they have prevented a chemical action
with the silver, and their removal would only expose the surface of the plate
which in itself would afford a contrast with the impression. Another and
less dangerous source of these specks is organic matter contained in the
solution employed in dissolving the chemicals, or the water in washing.
Page 34
Much of the hyposulphite of soda in market contains a sulphuret, which,
coming in contact with the silver surface, immediately causes oxidation.
Such spots, as well also as most all others found on the plate after it has
been exposed in the camera, can be removed by the following, solution: To
one ounce of water add a piece of cyanide of potassium the size of a pea;
filter the solution and apply by pouring it on the surface of the plate. In all
cases the plate should first be wet with water. Apply a gentle heat, and soon
the spots disappear, leaving the impression clear and free from all organic
matter.
In the absence of cyanide of potassium, a solution of pure hyposulphite
of soda will answer as a fair substitute.
To Redeem, a Solarized Impression.—The Daguerreotype plate, prepared
in the ordinary manner, should be exposed in the camera a sufficient time to
solarize the impression. Then, before it be exposed to the vapor of mercury,
expose it for a very brief period to the vapor of either chlorine, bromine or
iodine. Then expose over mercury, as usual. I have produced singularly
interesting results by this process.
To Purify Water.—Filter the water well, and then add about three drops
of nitric acid to the pint. This can be used as absolutely pure water, but I
would recommend the use of distilled water as preferable.
Cleaning Mercury.—Make a small bag of chamois skin, pour in the
mercury, and squeeze it through the leather. Repeat this several times, and
filter by means of a funnel made of paper, with a very small aperture,
through which it will escape and leave the particles of dust, or other
substances, in the paper. A paper with a pinhole through it will answer as
well, and it is less difficult to make.
Adhesive Paper.—Take gum arabic, four ounces, put it in a wide-
mouthed bottle and pour on water about one-third above the gum. Add half
ounce of isinglass, or fish glue, and a small piece of loaf sugar. Let all
dissolve, and spread over French letter paper, with a brush or piece of
sponge. If once spreading is not enough, perform the same operation a
second time.
Black Stain for Apparatus.—Dissolve gum shellac in alcohol, or procure
shellac varnish at the druggists’, stir in lampblack, and apply with a sponge
or bit of rag. This will adhere to metal, as well as wood, and is used for the
inside of camera, tubes, etc.
coming in contact with the silver surface, immediately causes oxidation.
Such spots, as well also as most all others found on the plate after it has
been exposed in the camera, can be removed by the following, solution: To
one ounce of water add a piece of cyanide of potassium the size of a pea;
filter the solution and apply by pouring it on the surface of the plate. In all
cases the plate should first be wet with water. Apply a gentle heat, and soon
the spots disappear, leaving the impression clear and free from all organic
matter.
In the absence of cyanide of potassium, a solution of pure hyposulphite
of soda will answer as a fair substitute.
To Redeem, a Solarized Impression.—The Daguerreotype plate, prepared
in the ordinary manner, should be exposed in the camera a sufficient time to
solarize the impression. Then, before it be exposed to the vapor of mercury,
expose it for a very brief period to the vapor of either chlorine, bromine or
iodine. Then expose over mercury, as usual. I have produced singularly
interesting results by this process.
To Purify Water.—Filter the water well, and then add about three drops
of nitric acid to the pint. This can be used as absolutely pure water, but I
would recommend the use of distilled water as preferable.
Cleaning Mercury.—Make a small bag of chamois skin, pour in the
mercury, and squeeze it through the leather. Repeat this several times, and
filter by means of a funnel made of paper, with a very small aperture,
through which it will escape and leave the particles of dust, or other
substances, in the paper. A paper with a pinhole through it will answer as
well, and it is less difficult to make.
Adhesive Paper.—Take gum arabic, four ounces, put it in a wide-
mouthed bottle and pour on water about one-third above the gum. Add half
ounce of isinglass, or fish glue, and a small piece of loaf sugar. Let all
dissolve, and spread over French letter paper, with a brush or piece of
sponge. If once spreading is not enough, perform the same operation a
second time.
Black Stain for Apparatus.—Dissolve gum shellac in alcohol, or procure
shellac varnish at the druggists’, stir in lampblack, and apply with a sponge
or bit of rag. This will adhere to metal, as well as wood, and is used for the
inside of camera, tubes, etc.
Page 35
Sealing Wax for Bottles.—Melt together six parts rosin and one beeswax,
and add a small quantity of lampblack; or, if red is preferable, add red lead.
Common white wax is best, as most chemicals act less upon it.
When bottles containing bromine are to be sealed, it is well to grease the
stopper. This, however, only when the bottle is in frequent use, for if it were
to be sent by any conveyance it would be likely to fly out.
Rouge.—The method employed by Lord Ross is probably unsurpassed in
the production of rouge. He has given his process as follows:
“I prepare the peroxide of iron by precipitation with water of ammonia,
from a pure dilute solution of sulphate of iron; the precipitate is washed,
pressed in a screw press till nearly dry, and exposed to a heat which in the
dark appears a dull, low red. The only points of importance are, that the
sulphate of iron should be pure, that the water of ammonia should be
decidedly in excess, and that the heat should not exceed that I have
described. The color will be a bright crimson inclining to yellow. I have
tried both potash and soda, pure, instead of water of ammonia, but after
washing with some degree of care, a trace of the alkali still remained, and
the peroxide was of an ochrey color, till overheated, and did not polish
properly.”
Care should be observed to apply rouge in a dry state to the surface of the
plate.
I would remark, that so far as my experience has gone, I consider good
rouge fully equal to any other polishing, material for the last or finishing
polishing; consequently I shall not take up my space in enumerating any of
the great variety that find few advocates.
Why Rouge is to be preferred.—“Because it burnishes better, and
because it assists in fixing the layer of gold, rendering it less susceptible of
being removed in scales when heated too much.”
Rotten Stone.—“Purchase the best ground rotten stone of the druggist,
put a few ounces at a time in a wedgewood or porcelain mortar, with plenty
of clean rain water. This should have about forty drops of nitric acid to the
quart. Grind well, and after letting the mortar stand two minutes, pour into a
third. After remaining undisturbed eight minutes, finally pour off into a
fourth to settle. Rinse back the sediment in the second and third, and grind
over with a new batch. Repeat the operation till you have all in the fourth
vessel. Let this stand several hours, and pour off the water very carefully.
and add a small quantity of lampblack; or, if red is preferable, add red lead.
Common white wax is best, as most chemicals act less upon it.
When bottles containing bromine are to be sealed, it is well to grease the
stopper. This, however, only when the bottle is in frequent use, for if it were
to be sent by any conveyance it would be likely to fly out.
Rouge.—The method employed by Lord Ross is probably unsurpassed in
the production of rouge. He has given his process as follows:
“I prepare the peroxide of iron by precipitation with water of ammonia,
from a pure dilute solution of sulphate of iron; the precipitate is washed,
pressed in a screw press till nearly dry, and exposed to a heat which in the
dark appears a dull, low red. The only points of importance are, that the
sulphate of iron should be pure, that the water of ammonia should be
decidedly in excess, and that the heat should not exceed that I have
described. The color will be a bright crimson inclining to yellow. I have
tried both potash and soda, pure, instead of water of ammonia, but after
washing with some degree of care, a trace of the alkali still remained, and
the peroxide was of an ochrey color, till overheated, and did not polish
properly.”
Care should be observed to apply rouge in a dry state to the surface of the
plate.
I would remark, that so far as my experience has gone, I consider good
rouge fully equal to any other polishing, material for the last or finishing
polishing; consequently I shall not take up my space in enumerating any of
the great variety that find few advocates.
Why Rouge is to be preferred.—“Because it burnishes better, and
because it assists in fixing the layer of gold, rendering it less susceptible of
being removed in scales when heated too much.”
Rotten Stone.—“Purchase the best ground rotten stone of the druggist,
put a few ounces at a time in a wedgewood or porcelain mortar, with plenty
of clean rain water. This should have about forty drops of nitric acid to the
quart. Grind well, and after letting the mortar stand two minutes, pour into a
third. After remaining undisturbed eight minutes, finally pour off into a
fourth to settle. Rinse back the sediment in the second and third, and grind
over with a new batch. Repeat the operation till you have all in the fourth
vessel. Let this stand several hours, and pour off the water very carefully.
Page 36
Set the deposit in the sun, or by a stove to dry. When perfectly dry,
pulverize, and it is ready for use. With a little trouble you will obtain in this
way a much better article than can generally be bought of dealers. For the
last washing, alcohol, or a mixture of alcohol and water, is preferable.”
Potassa Solution.—The use of a solution of potassa in the preparation of
the plate was suggested in the early history of the Daguerreotype. It was
thought to possess some peculiar property for improving the tone of the
impression. It is used for moistening the rotten stone in polishing the plate,
and may be prepared by putting about an ounce and a half of alcohol in a
close bottle, and add half a stick of caustic potash. This will soon become of
a deep red color. For use, fill your small bottle, having a quill in the cork,
with alcohol, and add a few drops of the above, or enough to change it to a
bright orange or saffron color.
A Substitute for the Hyposulphite Solution.—M. DAGUERRE
recommends the use of a solution of salt water for removing the coating off
the plate. I found this of some service at one time during my travels. My
hyposulphite bottle got broke and its contents lost, so as only to leave
enough for preparing gilding. I resorted to the use of salt solution, and
found it to answer well. Make a saturated solution of salt in water. First
wash the plate with clear water; then immerse it in the saline solution, when
it should be agitated, and the coating will soon disappear. Another process
with a salt solution of half the strength of the above is very interesting and
effectual. The plate having been dipped into cold water, is placed in a
solution of common salt, of moderate strength; it lies without being acted
upon at all; but if it be now touched on one corner with a piece of zinc,
which has been scraped bright, the yellow coat of iodine moves off like a
wave and disappears. It is a very pretty process. The zinc and silver forming
together a voltaic pair, with the salt water intervening, oxidation of the zinc
takes place, and the silver surface commences to evolve hydrogen gas;
while this is in a nascent condition it decomposes the film of iodide of
silver, giving rise to the production of hydriodic acid, which is very soluble
in water, and hence instantly removed.
This process, therefore, differs from that with hyposulphite. The latter
acts by dissolving the iodide of silver, the former by decomposing it. It is
necessary not to leave the zinc in contact too long, or it deposits stains, and
pulverize, and it is ready for use. With a little trouble you will obtain in this
way a much better article than can generally be bought of dealers. For the
last washing, alcohol, or a mixture of alcohol and water, is preferable.”
Potassa Solution.—The use of a solution of potassa in the preparation of
the plate was suggested in the early history of the Daguerreotype. It was
thought to possess some peculiar property for improving the tone of the
impression. It is used for moistening the rotten stone in polishing the plate,
and may be prepared by putting about an ounce and a half of alcohol in a
close bottle, and add half a stick of caustic potash. This will soon become of
a deep red color. For use, fill your small bottle, having a quill in the cork,
with alcohol, and add a few drops of the above, or enough to change it to a
bright orange or saffron color.
A Substitute for the Hyposulphite Solution.—M. DAGUERRE
recommends the use of a solution of salt water for removing the coating off
the plate. I found this of some service at one time during my travels. My
hyposulphite bottle got broke and its contents lost, so as only to leave
enough for preparing gilding. I resorted to the use of salt solution, and
found it to answer well. Make a saturated solution of salt in water. First
wash the plate with clear water; then immerse it in the saline solution, when
it should be agitated, and the coating will soon disappear. Another process
with a salt solution of half the strength of the above is very interesting and
effectual. The plate having been dipped into cold water, is placed in a
solution of common salt, of moderate strength; it lies without being acted
upon at all; but if it be now touched on one corner with a piece of zinc,
which has been scraped bright, the yellow coat of iodine moves off like a
wave and disappears. It is a very pretty process. The zinc and silver forming
together a voltaic pair, with the salt water intervening, oxidation of the zinc
takes place, and the silver surface commences to evolve hydrogen gas;
while this is in a nascent condition it decomposes the film of iodide of
silver, giving rise to the production of hydriodic acid, which is very soluble
in water, and hence instantly removed.
This process, therefore, differs from that with hyposulphite. The latter
acts by dissolving the iodide of silver, the former by decomposing it. It is
necessary not to leave the zinc in contact too long, or it deposits stains, and
Page 37
in large plates the contact should be made at the four corners successively,
to avoid this accident.
Gilding Solution.—To one pint of pure rain or distilled water add fifteen
grains of pure chloride of gold, and to another pint add sixty grains of
hyposulphite of soda. When dissolved, pour the gold solution into the
hyposulphite by small quantities, shaking well after each addition. The soda
solution must not be poured into the gold, as the gold would be immediately
decomposed, and the solution turn black, and be unfit for use.
Some operators add muriate of potash and other substances, but these do
not possess any advantage except in cases where it is necessary to bleach
the solarized portions of the impression, and when such is the case, chloride
of sodium (common salt) is probably as effective and is the most
convenient. Add about a teaspoonful to two ounces of the gilding.
Solution, for Increasing the Brilliancy of the Daguerreotype.—This
solution will have the effect to thoroughly cleanse the surface of the gilded
plate and excite a powerful influence on the general character of the
impression. To a solution of three ounces of water, in which is dissolved a
quarter of an ounce of cyanide of potassium, add one teaspoonful of a
solution containing six ounces of water and half an ounce of each pure
carbonate of potash, alum, common salt, gallic acid, sulphate of copper, and
purified borax. While the plate is wet, pour on a little, and heat it with a
powerful blaze. The effect will be quickly produced, in from three to fifteen
seconds. Rinse and dry, as in the gilding.
Bleaching Solution.—Make a saturated solution of muriate of ammonia
(sal ammoniac) in pure water, and filter through paper. Reduce with an
equal quantity of water when used. When the linen or any other portion of
the impression is badly solarized, after removing the coating, rinse with
water; then pour this upon the surface in the same manner as the gilding
solution. If the solarization be very deep, apply the lamp beneath, and warm
the plate a trifle. Now pour off, and, without rinsing, apply the gilding. The
whole operation must be quickly performed, or the chlorine soon attacks the
shades of the picture. When properly done, however, the solarized parts are
restored to a clear, transparent white.
Electro, or Cold Gilding.—This process I have adopted, and it produces
exceedingly beautiful impressions for the stereoscope, adding a great charm
to the pleasing effect of that instrument. It also possesses a pretty and
to avoid this accident.
Gilding Solution.—To one pint of pure rain or distilled water add fifteen
grains of pure chloride of gold, and to another pint add sixty grains of
hyposulphite of soda. When dissolved, pour the gold solution into the
hyposulphite by small quantities, shaking well after each addition. The soda
solution must not be poured into the gold, as the gold would be immediately
decomposed, and the solution turn black, and be unfit for use.
Some operators add muriate of potash and other substances, but these do
not possess any advantage except in cases where it is necessary to bleach
the solarized portions of the impression, and when such is the case, chloride
of sodium (common salt) is probably as effective and is the most
convenient. Add about a teaspoonful to two ounces of the gilding.
Solution, for Increasing the Brilliancy of the Daguerreotype.—This
solution will have the effect to thoroughly cleanse the surface of the gilded
plate and excite a powerful influence on the general character of the
impression. To a solution of three ounces of water, in which is dissolved a
quarter of an ounce of cyanide of potassium, add one teaspoonful of a
solution containing six ounces of water and half an ounce of each pure
carbonate of potash, alum, common salt, gallic acid, sulphate of copper, and
purified borax. While the plate is wet, pour on a little, and heat it with a
powerful blaze. The effect will be quickly produced, in from three to fifteen
seconds. Rinse and dry, as in the gilding.
Bleaching Solution.—Make a saturated solution of muriate of ammonia
(sal ammoniac) in pure water, and filter through paper. Reduce with an
equal quantity of water when used. When the linen or any other portion of
the impression is badly solarized, after removing the coating, rinse with
water; then pour this upon the surface in the same manner as the gilding
solution. If the solarization be very deep, apply the lamp beneath, and warm
the plate a trifle. Now pour off, and, without rinsing, apply the gilding. The
whole operation must be quickly performed, or the chlorine soon attacks the
shades of the picture. When properly done, however, the solarized parts are
restored to a clear, transparent white.
Electro, or Cold Gilding.—This process I have adopted, and it produces
exceedingly beautiful impressions for the stereoscope, adding a great charm
to the pleasing effect of that instrument. It also possesses a pretty and
Page 38
curious effect on views. It is easy of trial, and may be used by dissolving
one gramme of chloride of gold in half a litre of ordinary water, and thirty
grammes of hyposulphite of soda in another half litre of similar water; then
pour the solution of chloride of gold into that of soda, by little and little,
agitating it exactly as in M. Fizeau’s preparation, of which there is but a
variation.
When you wish to use it, pour some into a plate, or any other vessel of
the same kind, sufficient to cover the proof; then, after having added to it a
drop of ammonia, immerse the plate in it as soon as you take it out of the
mercury-box, after having wiped its back and edges, and agitate the mixture
quickly from right to left, so as to dissolve rapidly the coating of iodide of
silver as usual. As soon as the plate appears white, cease all rapid motion,
but continue to give it a slight undulating one; for if it were allowed to
remain still for only a few minutes, the proof would be clouded. By little
and little, the surface of the plate takes a yellow tint, which darkens more
and more, approaching to bistre. You stop therefore, at the color you wish;
and when the proof has been washed and dried, in the manner previously
explained, it will be found to be fixed, without any stain, with a limpid
surface, and an extraordinary warm tone. If you were to augment the
proportions of the ammonia or chloride of gold, the operation would
progress much quicker, but then the middle of the proof would be always
much clearer than towards the border. The mixture may be used several
times without being renewed. It does not, however, give such a beautiful
color to the impression as when it is newly prepared. By communicating to
the vessel containing the solution a continual motion, the impression, when
once immersed, will be fixed. During that time, and while attending to
anything else, watch its color; and at the end of ten minutes or a quarter of
an hour, take it out of the bath and dry it.
Agent for Neutralizing Bromine, Chlorine, and Iodine Vapors.—Aqua
ammonia, sprinkled about the chemical or coating room, will soon
neutralize all the vapor in the atmosphere of either chlorine, bromine, or
iodine. No operator should be without, at least, a six-ounce bottle filled with
ammonia. A little of its vapor about the camera-box has a decided and
happy effect. Burnt coffee, pulverized, has also the property of destroying
the vapors of the above chemicals, as also almost any other agent employed
about the Daguerreotype room. Its deodorizing properties are such that if
brought in contact with air filled with the odor of decomposing meat, it will
one gramme of chloride of gold in half a litre of ordinary water, and thirty
grammes of hyposulphite of soda in another half litre of similar water; then
pour the solution of chloride of gold into that of soda, by little and little,
agitating it exactly as in M. Fizeau’s preparation, of which there is but a
variation.
When you wish to use it, pour some into a plate, or any other vessel of
the same kind, sufficient to cover the proof; then, after having added to it a
drop of ammonia, immerse the plate in it as soon as you take it out of the
mercury-box, after having wiped its back and edges, and agitate the mixture
quickly from right to left, so as to dissolve rapidly the coating of iodide of
silver as usual. As soon as the plate appears white, cease all rapid motion,
but continue to give it a slight undulating one; for if it were allowed to
remain still for only a few minutes, the proof would be clouded. By little
and little, the surface of the plate takes a yellow tint, which darkens more
and more, approaching to bistre. You stop therefore, at the color you wish;
and when the proof has been washed and dried, in the manner previously
explained, it will be found to be fixed, without any stain, with a limpid
surface, and an extraordinary warm tone. If you were to augment the
proportions of the ammonia or chloride of gold, the operation would
progress much quicker, but then the middle of the proof would be always
much clearer than towards the border. The mixture may be used several
times without being renewed. It does not, however, give such a beautiful
color to the impression as when it is newly prepared. By communicating to
the vessel containing the solution a continual motion, the impression, when
once immersed, will be fixed. During that time, and while attending to
anything else, watch its color; and at the end of ten minutes or a quarter of
an hour, take it out of the bath and dry it.
Agent for Neutralizing Bromine, Chlorine, and Iodine Vapors.—Aqua
ammonia, sprinkled about the chemical or coating room, will soon
neutralize all the vapor in the atmosphere of either chlorine, bromine, or
iodine. No operator should be without, at least, a six-ounce bottle filled with
ammonia. A little of its vapor about the camera-box has a decided and
happy effect. Burnt coffee, pulverized, has also the property of destroying
the vapors of the above chemicals, as also almost any other agent employed
about the Daguerreotype room. Its deodorizing properties are such that if
brought in contact with air filled with the odor of decomposing meat, it will
Page 39
instantly destroy all disagreeable smell. It can easily be used in the
Daguerreotype room by placing a little of the raw bean, finely pulverized,
on an old plate, and roasting it over the spirit-lamp.
Buff Dryer.—There are various methods for keeping buffs dry and free
from dust. Some place a sheet of iron against the wall at an angle sufficient
to put a lamp between it and the wall, and then let the buff rest against the
top of the sheet. By this method the buff is for its full length close to the
heated iron, and at the same time exposed to the heated atmosphere and any
dust that may be free. I would recommend some arrangement by which the
buff would be inclosed. I have found the following to answer the purpose
well, which is a box of sheet iron twenty inches long, eight wide and five
high, with one end left open and the other closed; the cover is made of the
same material, with the edges bent over to go on and off. There are several
wires running through the centre of the sides, which it is necessary to cover
with cloth or paper to absorb all the moisture that may be made by applying
the heat, and the buffs are put in and taken out at the open end. In order that
the heat may be as nearly uniform as possible, an iron bar one inch wide,
eighteen inches long and one half inch thick, is so bent that the centre is one
quarter inch from the bottom of the box, and that at least two inches of each
end come in contact with the bottom; this being riveted on the bottom, and a
lamp with a small blaze applied to the centre of the bar of iron. This will
constitute one of the best and cheapest buff dryers in use. It may be
suspended from the wall by placing wires around it, or it may stand upon
legs. Perhaps a more convenient plan is to place it under the workbench in a
similar position to a drawer. One precaution is necessary: when first heating
the dryer, apply but a very gentle heat. This will prevent an accumulation of
moisture, which would otherwise pass off in steam, coming in contact with
the buff, thus causing a dampness. Another caution: never have the
temperature of the air in the heater more than ten degrees above that which
surrounds it.
When wheels are used, they should be encased in a sheet iron or wood
case. All those made for our market are provided in this respect.
Keeping Buffs in Order.—This is one of the most important objects to
arrest the attention of the operator. Every buff is more or less liable to get
out of order by dust falling upon or coming in contact with the polishing
powder employed in cleaning the plate. The edge of every plate should be
Daguerreotype room by placing a little of the raw bean, finely pulverized,
on an old plate, and roasting it over the spirit-lamp.
Buff Dryer.—There are various methods for keeping buffs dry and free
from dust. Some place a sheet of iron against the wall at an angle sufficient
to put a lamp between it and the wall, and then let the buff rest against the
top of the sheet. By this method the buff is for its full length close to the
heated iron, and at the same time exposed to the heated atmosphere and any
dust that may be free. I would recommend some arrangement by which the
buff would be inclosed. I have found the following to answer the purpose
well, which is a box of sheet iron twenty inches long, eight wide and five
high, with one end left open and the other closed; the cover is made of the
same material, with the edges bent over to go on and off. There are several
wires running through the centre of the sides, which it is necessary to cover
with cloth or paper to absorb all the moisture that may be made by applying
the heat, and the buffs are put in and taken out at the open end. In order that
the heat may be as nearly uniform as possible, an iron bar one inch wide,
eighteen inches long and one half inch thick, is so bent that the centre is one
quarter inch from the bottom of the box, and that at least two inches of each
end come in contact with the bottom; this being riveted on the bottom, and a
lamp with a small blaze applied to the centre of the bar of iron. This will
constitute one of the best and cheapest buff dryers in use. It may be
suspended from the wall by placing wires around it, or it may stand upon
legs. Perhaps a more convenient plan is to place it under the workbench in a
similar position to a drawer. One precaution is necessary: when first heating
the dryer, apply but a very gentle heat. This will prevent an accumulation of
moisture, which would otherwise pass off in steam, coming in contact with
the buff, thus causing a dampness. Another caution: never have the
temperature of the air in the heater more than ten degrees above that which
surrounds it.
When wheels are used, they should be encased in a sheet iron or wood
case. All those made for our market are provided in this respect.
Keeping Buffs in Order.—This is one of the most important objects to
arrest the attention of the operator. Every buff is more or less liable to get
out of order by dust falling upon or coming in contact with the polishing
powder employed in cleaning the plate. The edge of every plate should be
Page 40
thoroughly wiped and freed from any material that may adhere while
cleaning. I have adopted the following method, which proves highly
successful:
Rub the buff leather, holding the face down, with the sharp edge of a pair
of shears or a piece of glass. This brings out any portion of the skin which
may have become matted from any moisture, and also takes out any
substance imbedded in it, and prevents it from scratching. Then, with a stiff
brush, rub the buff well, and it will be found to work well. This same
process employ on wheels and hand buffs every morning, or oftener, as
occasion requires.
Preparing Buffs.—Two of these are necessary. That part of the stick to be
covered should be about eighteen or twenty inches long, and three wide,
and made crowning on the face from one end to the other, about one half
inch. Before covering, these are to be padded with two or three thicknesses
of Canton flannel. The buff should not be too hard, but padded with flannel,
so that by drawing it over the plate, it may touch across the surface. The
only proper material for buffs is prepared buckskin; and if prepared in a
proper manner, this needs nothing but to be tacked upon the stick. There are
several varieties of wheels employed; the one most generally adopted is
Lewis’ patent, which consists of several varieties of wheels. Any operator
can make a suitable wheel on the same plan of a turning lathe.
To Clean Buckskins.—When the operator is compelled to purchase an
unprepared buckskin, the following is a good process for cleaning it: There
is always in the buckskin leather that is purchased, more or less of an oily
matter, which is acquired in its preparation, sometimes even amounting, to a
third of its weight. The following is the mode of ridding it of this noxious
ingredient: Dissolve, in about six or seven quarts of filtered water, about
five ounces of potash; when dissolved, wash with the solution an ordinary
buckskin; when it has been well stirred in the liquid, the water becomes
very soapy, owing to the combination of the potash with the oily matters
contained in the skin. Throw away this solution and use some fresh water
without potash and rather tepid; change it several times until it remains
quite limpid. Then gently stretch the skin to dry in an airy shaded place.
When thoroughly dried, rub it well between the hands. It thus becomes very
pliant and velvet-like.
cleaning. I have adopted the following method, which proves highly
successful:
Rub the buff leather, holding the face down, with the sharp edge of a pair
of shears or a piece of glass. This brings out any portion of the skin which
may have become matted from any moisture, and also takes out any
substance imbedded in it, and prevents it from scratching. Then, with a stiff
brush, rub the buff well, and it will be found to work well. This same
process employ on wheels and hand buffs every morning, or oftener, as
occasion requires.
Preparing Buffs.—Two of these are necessary. That part of the stick to be
covered should be about eighteen or twenty inches long, and three wide,
and made crowning on the face from one end to the other, about one half
inch. Before covering, these are to be padded with two or three thicknesses
of Canton flannel. The buff should not be too hard, but padded with flannel,
so that by drawing it over the plate, it may touch across the surface. The
only proper material for buffs is prepared buckskin; and if prepared in a
proper manner, this needs nothing but to be tacked upon the stick. There are
several varieties of wheels employed; the one most generally adopted is
Lewis’ patent, which consists of several varieties of wheels. Any operator
can make a suitable wheel on the same plan of a turning lathe.
To Clean Buckskins.—When the operator is compelled to purchase an
unprepared buckskin, the following is a good process for cleaning it: There
is always in the buckskin leather that is purchased, more or less of an oily
matter, which is acquired in its preparation, sometimes even amounting, to a
third of its weight. The following is the mode of ridding it of this noxious
ingredient: Dissolve, in about six or seven quarts of filtered water, about
five ounces of potash; when dissolved, wash with the solution an ordinary
buckskin; when it has been well stirred in the liquid, the water becomes
very soapy, owing to the combination of the potash with the oily matters
contained in the skin. Throw away this solution and use some fresh water
without potash and rather tepid; change it several times until it remains
quite limpid. Then gently stretch the skin to dry in an airy shaded place.
When thoroughly dried, rub it well between the hands. It thus becomes very
pliant and velvet-like.
Page 41
Reflectors for Taking Views.—There have been excellent cameras
introduced for taking views, but the time of exposure, which is increased in
proportion to the focal length, is considered an objection; consequently
many adhere to the old plan of using the speculum, or rather, substitute a
mirror. I now have one which I have used for several years and find it equal
to any article of the kind have ever tried. One is easily made by a tin man, at
a trifling expense. Procure a piece of best plate looking-glass, two and a
half by five inches for a quarter, or four by eight for a half-sized camera;
put a piece of pasteboard of the same size on the back, to protect the
silvering, and stick around the edge in the same manner as in putting up a
picture. Take a sheet of tin for the large size, or a half sheet for the other;
place the glass crosswise in the centre; bend the ends of the tin over the
edge of the glass and turn them back so as to form a groove to hold the
glass, and still allow it to slide out and in. These ends of the tin must be
turned out flaring, that they may not reflect in the glass.
Have a tin band about an inch wide made to fit close on the end of the
camera tube; place it on, and taking the tin containing the glass, bring it to
an angle of forty-five degrees with the tube, extending nearly the whole
length of the glass in front of the lenses; lap the loose ends of the tin on
each side of the tin rim, and having your camera turned on the side to throw
the view lengthwise, arrange the exact angle by examining the image on the
ground-glass. When you have it exactly right, hold it while it is soldered
fast to the band. Take out your glass and stain the tin black, to prevent
reflection.
introduced for taking views, but the time of exposure, which is increased in
proportion to the focal length, is considered an objection; consequently
many adhere to the old plan of using the speculum, or rather, substitute a
mirror. I now have one which I have used for several years and find it equal
to any article of the kind have ever tried. One is easily made by a tin man, at
a trifling expense. Procure a piece of best plate looking-glass, two and a
half by five inches for a quarter, or four by eight for a half-sized camera;
put a piece of pasteboard of the same size on the back, to protect the
silvering, and stick around the edge in the same manner as in putting up a
picture. Take a sheet of tin for the large size, or a half sheet for the other;
place the glass crosswise in the centre; bend the ends of the tin over the
edge of the glass and turn them back so as to form a groove to hold the
glass, and still allow it to slide out and in. These ends of the tin must be
turned out flaring, that they may not reflect in the glass.
Have a tin band about an inch wide made to fit close on the end of the
camera tube; place it on, and taking the tin containing the glass, bring it to
an angle of forty-five degrees with the tube, extending nearly the whole
length of the glass in front of the lenses; lap the loose ends of the tin on
each side of the tin rim, and having your camera turned on the side to throw
the view lengthwise, arrange the exact angle by examining the image on the
ground-glass. When you have it exactly right, hold it while it is soldered
fast to the band. Take out your glass and stain the tin black, to prevent
reflection.
Page 42
CHAPTER III.
CHEMICALS.
Bromine and its Compounds—Iodine and its Compounds—
Chlorine and its compounds—Cyanide of Potassium—
Hyposulphite of Soda—Hyposulphite of Gold—Nitric Acid
—Nitro-Muriatic Acid—Hydrochloric Acid—Hydrofluoric
Acid—Sulphuric Acid—Accelerating Substances—Liquid
Sensitives—Dry Sensitives, etc., etc.
BROMINE.
An article so extensively used in the practice of the Daguerreotypic art as
Bromine, is deserving of especial attention, and accordingly every person
should endeavor to make himself familiar with its properties and
applications.
History.—This element was discovered in 1826 by M. Balard, in the
mother-liquor, or residue of the evaporation of sea-water. It is named from
its offensive odor (bromos, bad odor). In nature it is found in sea-water
combined with alkaline bases, and in the waters of many saline springs and
inland seas. The salt springs of Ohio abound in the compounds of bromine,
and it is found in the waters of the Dead Sea. The only use which has been
made of bromine in the arts is in the practice of photography. It is also used
in medicine In a chemical point of view it is very interesting, from its
similarity in properties, and the parallelism of its compounds to chlorine
and iodine.
CHEMICALS.
Bromine and its Compounds—Iodine and its Compounds—
Chlorine and its compounds—Cyanide of Potassium—
Hyposulphite of Soda—Hyposulphite of Gold—Nitric Acid
—Nitro-Muriatic Acid—Hydrochloric Acid—Hydrofluoric
Acid—Sulphuric Acid—Accelerating Substances—Liquid
Sensitives—Dry Sensitives, etc., etc.
BROMINE.
An article so extensively used in the practice of the Daguerreotypic art as
Bromine, is deserving of especial attention, and accordingly every person
should endeavor to make himself familiar with its properties and
applications.
History.—This element was discovered in 1826 by M. Balard, in the
mother-liquor, or residue of the evaporation of sea-water. It is named from
its offensive odor (bromos, bad odor). In nature it is found in sea-water
combined with alkaline bases, and in the waters of many saline springs and
inland seas. The salt springs of Ohio abound in the compounds of bromine,
and it is found in the waters of the Dead Sea. The only use which has been
made of bromine in the arts is in the practice of photography. It is also used
in medicine In a chemical point of view it is very interesting, from its
similarity in properties, and the parallelism of its compounds to chlorine
and iodine.
Page 43
Dr. D. Alter, of Freeport, Pa., is the only American manufacturer, and
furnishes all of the “American Bromine.” Yet we understand much
purporting to be of German manufacture is prepared from that made in
Freeport. This is done by individuals in this city, who get well paid for the
deception.
For the successful application of bromine as an accelerating agent, we are
indebted to Mr. John Goddard of London, who at the time was associated
with Mr. John Johnson, now a resident of this city.
Preparation.—The mother-liquor containing bromides is treated with a
current of chlorine gas, which decomposes these salts, setting the bromine
free, which at once colors the liquid to a reddish brown color. Ether is
added and shaken with the liquid, until all the bromine is taken up by the
ether, which acquires a fine red color and separates from the saline liquid.
{74}
Solution of caustic potash is then added to the ethereal solution, forming
bromide of potassium and bromate of potash. This solution is evaporated to
dryness, and the salts being collected are heated in a glass retort with
sulphuric acid and a little oxide of manganese. The bromine is distilled, and
is condensed in a cooled receiver, into a red liquid.
Properties.—Bromine somewhat resembles chlorine in its odor, but is
more offensive. At common temperatures it is a very volatile liquid, of a
deep red color, and with a specific gravity of 3, being one of the heaviest
fluids known. Sulphuric acid floats on its surface, and is used to prevent its
escape. At zero it freezes into a brittle solid. A few drops in a large flask
will fill the whole vessel when slightly warmed, with blood red vapors,
which have a density of nearly 6.00, air being one. It is a non-conductor of
electricity, and suffers no change of properties from heat, or any other of the
imponderable agents. It dissolves slightly in water, forming a bleaching
solution.
Chloride of Bromine.—This as an accelerating agent is by many
considered superior {75} to the other Bromide combinations. It can be
readily prepared by passing a current of chlorine through a vessel
containing bromine. A mixture of two parts muriatic acid and one of black
oxide of manganese, should be put into a flask having a bent tube to
conduct the chlorine vapor into the bromine in another vessel. This last
vessel should also be supplied with a bent tube for conducting the combined
furnishes all of the “American Bromine.” Yet we understand much
purporting to be of German manufacture is prepared from that made in
Freeport. This is done by individuals in this city, who get well paid for the
deception.
For the successful application of bromine as an accelerating agent, we are
indebted to Mr. John Goddard of London, who at the time was associated
with Mr. John Johnson, now a resident of this city.
Preparation.—The mother-liquor containing bromides is treated with a
current of chlorine gas, which decomposes these salts, setting the bromine
free, which at once colors the liquid to a reddish brown color. Ether is
added and shaken with the liquid, until all the bromine is taken up by the
ether, which acquires a fine red color and separates from the saline liquid.
{74}
Solution of caustic potash is then added to the ethereal solution, forming
bromide of potassium and bromate of potash. This solution is evaporated to
dryness, and the salts being collected are heated in a glass retort with
sulphuric acid and a little oxide of manganese. The bromine is distilled, and
is condensed in a cooled receiver, into a red liquid.
Properties.—Bromine somewhat resembles chlorine in its odor, but is
more offensive. At common temperatures it is a very volatile liquid, of a
deep red color, and with a specific gravity of 3, being one of the heaviest
fluids known. Sulphuric acid floats on its surface, and is used to prevent its
escape. At zero it freezes into a brittle solid. A few drops in a large flask
will fill the whole vessel when slightly warmed, with blood red vapors,
which have a density of nearly 6.00, air being one. It is a non-conductor of
electricity, and suffers no change of properties from heat, or any other of the
imponderable agents. It dissolves slightly in water, forming a bleaching
solution.
Chloride of Bromine.—This as an accelerating agent is by many
considered superior {75} to the other Bromide combinations. It can be
readily prepared by passing a current of chlorine through a vessel
containing bromine. A mixture of two parts muriatic acid and one of black
oxide of manganese, should be put into a flask having a bent tube to
conduct the chlorine vapor into the bromine in another vessel. This last
vessel should also be supplied with a bent tube for conducting the combined
Page 44
vapors with a third vessel or receiver. On the application of the heat from a
spirit lamp to the bottom of the flask, a current of chlorine gas will be
disengaged, and pass into the bromine, when it readily combines, and gives
off a vapor, which, when condensed in the third vessel, forms a volatile
yellowish-red liquid. It is best, even at ordinary temperature, to place the
receiver in an ice bath. For manner of using, see farther on, under head of
Accelerators.
Bromides.—A bromide treated with oil of vitriol, disengages
chlorohyadic acid; but vapors of bromine are constantly disengaged, at the
same time imparting a brown color to the gas. If the bromide be treated with
a mixture of sulphuric acid, and peroxide of manganese, bromide is only
disengaged. A solution of a bromide gives, with of nitrate {76} silver, a
light yellowish white precipitate of bromide of silver, which is insoluble in
an excess of acid, and readily dissolves in ammonia. The precipitated
bromide is colored by light like the chloride, but is immediately tinged
brown, while the chloride assumes at first a violet hue. The bromides, in
solution, are readily decomposed and chloride being set free, colors the
liquid brown.
In the whole range of heliographic chemicals there is probably not
another collection less understood and being so productive of interesting
investigation as the bromides.
Bromide of Iodine.—M. de Valicours furnishes us with the best method
for preparing this mixture:
“Into a bottle of the capacity of about two ounces, pour thirty or forty
drops of bromine, the precise quantity not being of importance. Then add,
grain by grain, as much iodine as the bromine will dissolve till quite
saturated. This point is ascertained when some grains of the iodine remain
undissolved. They may remain in the bottle, as they will not interfere with
the success of the preparation.
“The bromide of iodine thus prepared, from its occupying so small a
space, can very easily be carried, but in this state it is much too
concentrated to be used. When it is to be employed, pour a small quantity,
say fifteen drops, by means of a dropping-tube, into a bottle containing
about half an ounce of filtered river water. It will easily be understood that
the bromide of iodine can be used with a greater or less quantity of water
spirit lamp to the bottom of the flask, a current of chlorine gas will be
disengaged, and pass into the bromine, when it readily combines, and gives
off a vapor, which, when condensed in the third vessel, forms a volatile
yellowish-red liquid. It is best, even at ordinary temperature, to place the
receiver in an ice bath. For manner of using, see farther on, under head of
Accelerators.
Bromides.—A bromide treated with oil of vitriol, disengages
chlorohyadic acid; but vapors of bromine are constantly disengaged, at the
same time imparting a brown color to the gas. If the bromide be treated with
a mixture of sulphuric acid, and peroxide of manganese, bromide is only
disengaged. A solution of a bromide gives, with of nitrate {76} silver, a
light yellowish white precipitate of bromide of silver, which is insoluble in
an excess of acid, and readily dissolves in ammonia. The precipitated
bromide is colored by light like the chloride, but is immediately tinged
brown, while the chloride assumes at first a violet hue. The bromides, in
solution, are readily decomposed and chloride being set free, colors the
liquid brown.
In the whole range of heliographic chemicals there is probably not
another collection less understood and being so productive of interesting
investigation as the bromides.
Bromide of Iodine.—M. de Valicours furnishes us with the best method
for preparing this mixture:
“Into a bottle of the capacity of about two ounces, pour thirty or forty
drops of bromine, the precise quantity not being of importance. Then add,
grain by grain, as much iodine as the bromine will dissolve till quite
saturated. This point is ascertained when some grains of the iodine remain
undissolved. They may remain in the bottle, as they will not interfere with
the success of the preparation.
“The bromide of iodine thus prepared, from its occupying so small a
space, can very easily be carried, but in this state it is much too
concentrated to be used. When it is to be employed, pour a small quantity,
say fifteen drops, by means of a dropping-tube, into a bottle containing
about half an ounce of filtered river water. It will easily be understood that
the bromide of iodine can be used with a greater or less quantity of water
Page 45
without altering the proportion which exists between the bromine and
iodine.”
This article forms a very good dry accelerator, and is by some persons
thought superior to all others, as it works with great uniformity, and is less
liable to scum the plate in coating at high temperatures, or when the
thermometer indicates a heat above 60 deg.
Bromide of Potassium—Is prepared by mixing bromine and a solution of
pure potass together, and evaporating to dryness; it crystallizes in small
cubes, and dissolves readily in water. This agent is extensively employed in
the paper and glass processes.
Bromide of Lime. This the principal accelerator used in the American
practice, and is the best of all dry combinations at present employed. There
are many reasons why the dry is advantageous; these are too familiar to
repeat.
“The bromide of lime may be produced by allowing bromine vapor to act
upon hydrate of lime for some hours. The most convenient method of doing
this is to place some of the hydrate at the bottom of the flask, and then put
some bromine into a glass capsule supported a little above the lime. As heat
is developed during the combination, it is better to place the lower part of
the flask in water at the temperature of about 50 deg. Fah.; the lime
gradually assumes a beautiful scarlet color, and acquires an appearance very
similar to that of the red iodide of mercury. The chloro-iodide of lime may
be formed in the same manner; it has a deep brown color. Both these
compounds, when the vapor arising from them is not too intense, have an
odor analogous to that of bleaching powder, and quite distinguishable from
chlorine, bromine, or iodine alone.”
Farther on, I have given, in connection with accelerators, a process I
adopt, which is far less tedious and equally reliable.
Bromide of Silver—May be formed by pouring an alkaline bromide into
a solution of nitrate of silver, in the shape of a white, slightly yellowish
precipitate, which is insoluble in water and nitric acid, but readily dissolves
in ammonia and the alkaline hyposulphites. Chlorine easily decomposes
bromide of silver, and transforms it into chloride.
M. Biot has expressed his opinion, that it is not possible to find any
substance more sensitive to light than the bromide of silver. This is true to a
iodine.”
This article forms a very good dry accelerator, and is by some persons
thought superior to all others, as it works with great uniformity, and is less
liable to scum the plate in coating at high temperatures, or when the
thermometer indicates a heat above 60 deg.
Bromide of Potassium—Is prepared by mixing bromine and a solution of
pure potass together, and evaporating to dryness; it crystallizes in small
cubes, and dissolves readily in water. This agent is extensively employed in
the paper and glass processes.
Bromide of Lime. This the principal accelerator used in the American
practice, and is the best of all dry combinations at present employed. There
are many reasons why the dry is advantageous; these are too familiar to
repeat.
“The bromide of lime may be produced by allowing bromine vapor to act
upon hydrate of lime for some hours. The most convenient method of doing
this is to place some of the hydrate at the bottom of the flask, and then put
some bromine into a glass capsule supported a little above the lime. As heat
is developed during the combination, it is better to place the lower part of
the flask in water at the temperature of about 50 deg. Fah.; the lime
gradually assumes a beautiful scarlet color, and acquires an appearance very
similar to that of the red iodide of mercury. The chloro-iodide of lime may
be formed in the same manner; it has a deep brown color. Both these
compounds, when the vapor arising from them is not too intense, have an
odor analogous to that of bleaching powder, and quite distinguishable from
chlorine, bromine, or iodine alone.”
Farther on, I have given, in connection with accelerators, a process I
adopt, which is far less tedious and equally reliable.
Bromide of Silver—May be formed by pouring an alkaline bromide into
a solution of nitrate of silver, in the shape of a white, slightly yellowish
precipitate, which is insoluble in water and nitric acid, but readily dissolves
in ammonia and the alkaline hyposulphites. Chlorine easily decomposes
bromide of silver, and transforms it into chloride.
M. Biot has expressed his opinion, that it is not possible to find any
substance more sensitive to light than the bromide of silver. This is true to a
Page 46
certain extent, but in combination with deoxidizing agents, other
preparations have a decided superiority over the pure bromide of silver.
Bromide of Gold—Is readily prepared by adding a little bromide to the
brown gold of the assayers, and allowing it to remain some time under
water, or assisting its action by a gentle heat. It forms a salt of a bright
crimson color, but in its general properties is precisely similar to the
chloride used in gilding.
Bromide of Magnesia—Is prepared in the same manner as bromide of
lime.
This mixture is particularly adapted for hot climates, and is used in this
country by some few who regard its use as a valuable secret.
Bromide of Starch.—This preparation is much used, but not alone. It is
combined with lime by putting about one part in measure of starch to four
of lime. It is prepared by adding bromine to finely pulverized starch, in the
same manner as bromide of lime. (See Accelerators.)
Experiments with Bromine.—Place in a very flaring wine glass a few
drops (say ten) of bromine, then place a small piece of phosphorus about
one-twentieth of an inch in diameter. Place the latter on the end of a stick
from five to ten feet in length. So place it that the phosphorus can be
dropped into the glass, and in an instant combustion giving a loud report
will be the result.
b. Expose a daguerreotype plate to the vapor of bromine, it assumes a
leaden-grey color, which, blackens by light very readily. Exposing this to
mercury will not produce any decided action upon the lights. Immerse it in
the solution of the muriate of soda, and the parts unacted upon by light
becomes a jet black, while the parts on which the light has acted will be
dissolved off, leaving a clean coating of silver. This will be a most decided
black picture on a white ground.
c. Expose an impressioned plate, that has been sufficient time in the
camera to become solarized, to the vapors of bromine, and the impression
will be fully developed and exhibit no signs of solarization. The exposure
over the bromine most be very brief. Chlorine or iodine will produce the
same result. The latter is preferable.
Again, should the impressioned plate be exposed too long over the vapor
of bromine, the impression would be rendered wholly insensitive to the
preparations have a decided superiority over the pure bromide of silver.
Bromide of Gold—Is readily prepared by adding a little bromide to the
brown gold of the assayers, and allowing it to remain some time under
water, or assisting its action by a gentle heat. It forms a salt of a bright
crimson color, but in its general properties is precisely similar to the
chloride used in gilding.
Bromide of Magnesia—Is prepared in the same manner as bromide of
lime.
This mixture is particularly adapted for hot climates, and is used in this
country by some few who regard its use as a valuable secret.
Bromide of Starch.—This preparation is much used, but not alone. It is
combined with lime by putting about one part in measure of starch to four
of lime. It is prepared by adding bromine to finely pulverized starch, in the
same manner as bromide of lime. (See Accelerators.)
Experiments with Bromine.—Place in a very flaring wine glass a few
drops (say ten) of bromine, then place a small piece of phosphorus about
one-twentieth of an inch in diameter. Place the latter on the end of a stick
from five to ten feet in length. So place it that the phosphorus can be
dropped into the glass, and in an instant combustion giving a loud report
will be the result.
b. Expose a daguerreotype plate to the vapor of bromine, it assumes a
leaden-grey color, which, blackens by light very readily. Exposing this to
mercury will not produce any decided action upon the lights. Immerse it in
the solution of the muriate of soda, and the parts unacted upon by light
becomes a jet black, while the parts on which the light has acted will be
dissolved off, leaving a clean coating of silver. This will be a most decided
black picture on a white ground.
c. Expose an impressioned plate, that has been sufficient time in the
camera to become solarized, to the vapors of bromine, and the impression
will be fully developed and exhibit no signs of solarization. The exposure
over the bromine most be very brief. Chlorine or iodine will produce the
same result. The latter is preferable.
Again, should the impressioned plate be exposed too long over the vapor
of bromine, the impression would be rendered wholly insensitive to the
Page 47
mercurial vapor. Hence this method is resorted to for restoring the
sensibility of the plate when there is reason to believe that the impression
would not be a desirable one; as, for example, if a likeness of a child be
wanted, and it had moved before the plate had been sufficiently long
exposed in the camera, the plate may be restored to its original sensitiveness
by re-coating over bromine, as above, thus saving the time and labor of re-
preparing the plate for the chemicals.
d. If by accident (we would not advise a trial to any extent of this), you
should inhale a quantity of the vapor of bromine, immediately inhale the
vapor of aqua ammonia, as this neutralizes the dangerous effect of the
bromine vapor. Every operator should be provided with a bottle of
ammonia, as a little sprinkled about the chemical room soon disinfects it of
all iodine or bromine vapor, and also tends to facilitate the operation in the
camera.
IODINE.
History of Iodine.—This is one of the simple chemical bodies which was
discovered in 1812 by M. Courtois, of Paris, a manufacturer of saltpetre,
who found it in the mother-water of that salt. Its properties were first
studied into by M. Gay Lussac. It partakes much of the nature of chlorine
and bromine. Its affinity for other substances is so powerful as to prevent it
from existing in an isolated state. It occurs combined with potassium and
sodium in many mineral waters, such as the brine spring of Ashby-de-la-
Zouche, and other strongly saline springs. This combination exists sparingly
in sea-water, abundantly in many species of fucus or sea-weed, and in the
kelp made from them. It is an ingredient in the Salt Licks, saline, and brine
springs of this country, especially of those in the valley of the Mississippi. It
is sparingly found in fresh-water plants, as well also in coal, and in
combination with numerous other bodies.
Fermented liquors contain iodine; wine, cider, and perry are more
iodureted than the average of fresh waters. Milk is richer in iodine than
wine; independently of the soil, with which it varies, the proportion of
iodine in milk is in the inverse ratio of the abundance of that secretion. Eggs
(not the shell) contain much iodine. A fowl’s egg weighing 50 gr. contains
sensibility of the plate when there is reason to believe that the impression
would not be a desirable one; as, for example, if a likeness of a child be
wanted, and it had moved before the plate had been sufficiently long
exposed in the camera, the plate may be restored to its original sensitiveness
by re-coating over bromine, as above, thus saving the time and labor of re-
preparing the plate for the chemicals.
d. If by accident (we would not advise a trial to any extent of this), you
should inhale a quantity of the vapor of bromine, immediately inhale the
vapor of aqua ammonia, as this neutralizes the dangerous effect of the
bromine vapor. Every operator should be provided with a bottle of
ammonia, as a little sprinkled about the chemical room soon disinfects it of
all iodine or bromine vapor, and also tends to facilitate the operation in the
camera.
IODINE.
History of Iodine.—This is one of the simple chemical bodies which was
discovered in 1812 by M. Courtois, of Paris, a manufacturer of saltpetre,
who found it in the mother-water of that salt. Its properties were first
studied into by M. Gay Lussac. It partakes much of the nature of chlorine
and bromine. Its affinity for other substances is so powerful as to prevent it
from existing in an isolated state. It occurs combined with potassium and
sodium in many mineral waters, such as the brine spring of Ashby-de-la-
Zouche, and other strongly saline springs. This combination exists sparingly
in sea-water, abundantly in many species of fucus or sea-weed, and in the
kelp made from them. It is an ingredient in the Salt Licks, saline, and brine
springs of this country, especially of those in the valley of the Mississippi. It
is sparingly found in fresh-water plants, as well also in coal, and in
combination with numerous other bodies.
Fermented liquors contain iodine; wine, cider, and perry are more
iodureted than the average of fresh waters. Milk is richer in iodine than
wine; independently of the soil, with which it varies, the proportion of
iodine in milk is in the inverse ratio of the abundance of that secretion. Eggs
(not the shell) contain much iodine. A fowl’s egg weighing 50 gr. contains
Page 48
more iodine than a quart of cow’s milk. Iodine exists in arable land. It is
abundant in sulphur, iron, and manganese ores, and sulphuret of mercury:
but rare in gypsum, chalk, calcareous and silicious earths. Any attempt to
extract iodine economically should be made with the plants of the ferro-
iodureted fresh waters. Most of the bodies regarded by the therapeutists as
pectoral and anti-scrofulous are rich in iodine.
It is probably to the application of this body that we owe the discovery of
the daguerreotype. There is no record of the precise date when Daguerre
commenced experimenting with iodine, but by the published
correspondence between him and M. Neipce, his partner, it was previous to
1833. There is no doubt, however, that the first successful application was
made in 1838, as the discovery was reported to the world early in January,
1839.
Preparation.—Iodine is mostly prepared from kelp, or the half vitrified
ashes of seaweed, prepared by the inhabitants of the western islands, and
the northern shores of Scotland and Ireland. It is treated with water, which
washes out all the soluble salts, and the filtered solution is evaporated until
nearly all the carbonate of soda and other saline matters have crystallized
out. The remaining liquor, which contains the iodine, is mixed with
successive portions of sulphuric acid in a leaden retort, and after standing
some days to allow the sulphureted hydrogen, etc., to escape, peroxide of
manganese is added, and the whole gently heated. Iodine distills over in a
purple vapor, and is condensed in a receiver, or in a series of two-necked
globes.
Properties.—Iodine is solid at the ordinary temperature, presenting the
appearance of dark-grey or purple spangles, possessing a high degree of
metallic lustre. It somewhat resembles plumbago, with which it is
sometimes diluted, particularly when it is fine. Operators should endeavor
to secure the larger crystals. It melts at 224.6 deg., forming a brown or
nearly black liquid. It boils at about 356 deg., and emits a very deep violet
colored vapor. It gives off a very appreciable vapor, sufficient for all
purposes of forming the iodide of silver on the daguerreotype plate, at a
temperature of 45 deg. or even lower. Iodine crystallizes readily. Every
operator has found upon the side of the jar in his coating-box, perfectly
regular crystals, deposited there by sublimation.
abundant in sulphur, iron, and manganese ores, and sulphuret of mercury:
but rare in gypsum, chalk, calcareous and silicious earths. Any attempt to
extract iodine economically should be made with the plants of the ferro-
iodureted fresh waters. Most of the bodies regarded by the therapeutists as
pectoral and anti-scrofulous are rich in iodine.
It is probably to the application of this body that we owe the discovery of
the daguerreotype. There is no record of the precise date when Daguerre
commenced experimenting with iodine, but by the published
correspondence between him and M. Neipce, his partner, it was previous to
1833. There is no doubt, however, that the first successful application was
made in 1838, as the discovery was reported to the world early in January,
1839.
Preparation.—Iodine is mostly prepared from kelp, or the half vitrified
ashes of seaweed, prepared by the inhabitants of the western islands, and
the northern shores of Scotland and Ireland. It is treated with water, which
washes out all the soluble salts, and the filtered solution is evaporated until
nearly all the carbonate of soda and other saline matters have crystallized
out. The remaining liquor, which contains the iodine, is mixed with
successive portions of sulphuric acid in a leaden retort, and after standing
some days to allow the sulphureted hydrogen, etc., to escape, peroxide of
manganese is added, and the whole gently heated. Iodine distills over in a
purple vapor, and is condensed in a receiver, or in a series of two-necked
globes.
Properties.—Iodine is solid at the ordinary temperature, presenting the
appearance of dark-grey or purple spangles, possessing a high degree of
metallic lustre. It somewhat resembles plumbago, with which it is
sometimes diluted, particularly when it is fine. Operators should endeavor
to secure the larger crystals. It melts at 224.6 deg., forming a brown or
nearly black liquid. It boils at about 356 deg., and emits a very deep violet
colored vapor. It gives off a very appreciable vapor, sufficient for all
purposes of forming the iodide of silver on the daguerreotype plate, at a
temperature of 45 deg. or even lower. Iodine crystallizes readily. Every
operator has found upon the side of the jar in his coating-box, perfectly
regular crystals, deposited there by sublimation.
Page 49
Water dissolves but a small proportion of iodine, requiring 7000 parts of
water to dissolve one of iodine, {85} or one grain to the gallon of water.
Alcohol and ether dissolve it freely, as does a solution of nitrate or
hydrochlorate of ammonia and of iodides.
The density of solid iodine is 4.95; that of its vapor 8.716. It greatly
resembles chlorine and bromine in its combinations, but its affinities are
weaker. It does not destroy the majority of organic substances, and
vegetable colors generally resist its action. It combines with several organic
substances, imparting to them peculiar colors. It colors the skin brown, but
the stain soon disappears.
Chloride of Iodine—Is formed by passing chlorine into a bottle
containing some iodine. This can be readily done by pouring one ounce and
a half of muriatic acid upon a quarter of an ounce of powdered black oxide
of manganese, and heat it gradually in a flask, to which is adapted a bent
glass tube. This tube must connect with the bottle containing the iodine, and
the yellowish-green gas disengaged will readily combine with the iodine,
forming a deep red liquid, and the operation is complete. The use of
chloride of iodine will be referred to in connection with the Accelerators.
{86}
Iodides.—The iodide treated with the oil of vitriol, instantly produces a
considerable deposit of iodine; and if the mixture be heated, intense violent
vapors are disengaged. The reaction is due to the decomposition of oil of
vitriol by iodohydric acid, water and sulphurous acid being formed, and
iodine set free. The iodides in solution are decomposed by chlorine, iodine
being precipitated, the smallest quantity of which in solution is instantly
detected by its imparting to starch an intensely blue color.
Iodide of Potassium.[4]—This compound is easily made in the following
manner: Subject to a moderate heat a mixture of 100 parts of iodine, 75 of
carbonate of potash, 30 of iron filings, and 120 parts of water. This mass
must be thoroughly dried and then heated to redness; the resulting reddish
powder is to be washed with water, and the solution obtained filtered, and
evaporated to dryness. It is found that 100 parts of iodine yield 135 parts of
very white, but slightly alkaline, iodide of potassium.
[4] I shall present the preparation of only a few iodides, and such as are more
intimately connected with the Daguerreotype.
water to dissolve one of iodine, {85} or one grain to the gallon of water.
Alcohol and ether dissolve it freely, as does a solution of nitrate or
hydrochlorate of ammonia and of iodides.
The density of solid iodine is 4.95; that of its vapor 8.716. It greatly
resembles chlorine and bromine in its combinations, but its affinities are
weaker. It does not destroy the majority of organic substances, and
vegetable colors generally resist its action. It combines with several organic
substances, imparting to them peculiar colors. It colors the skin brown, but
the stain soon disappears.
Chloride of Iodine—Is formed by passing chlorine into a bottle
containing some iodine. This can be readily done by pouring one ounce and
a half of muriatic acid upon a quarter of an ounce of powdered black oxide
of manganese, and heat it gradually in a flask, to which is adapted a bent
glass tube. This tube must connect with the bottle containing the iodine, and
the yellowish-green gas disengaged will readily combine with the iodine,
forming a deep red liquid, and the operation is complete. The use of
chloride of iodine will be referred to in connection with the Accelerators.
{86}
Iodides.—The iodide treated with the oil of vitriol, instantly produces a
considerable deposit of iodine; and if the mixture be heated, intense violent
vapors are disengaged. The reaction is due to the decomposition of oil of
vitriol by iodohydric acid, water and sulphurous acid being formed, and
iodine set free. The iodides in solution are decomposed by chlorine, iodine
being precipitated, the smallest quantity of which in solution is instantly
detected by its imparting to starch an intensely blue color.
Iodide of Potassium.[4]—This compound is easily made in the following
manner: Subject to a moderate heat a mixture of 100 parts of iodine, 75 of
carbonate of potash, 30 of iron filings, and 120 parts of water. This mass
must be thoroughly dried and then heated to redness; the resulting reddish
powder is to be washed with water, and the solution obtained filtered, and
evaporated to dryness. It is found that 100 parts of iodine yield 135 parts of
very white, but slightly alkaline, iodide of potassium.
[4] I shall present the preparation of only a few iodides, and such as are more
intimately connected with the Daguerreotype.
Page 50
Experiment.—On projecting dry pulverized iodide of potassium into
fused anhydrous phosphoric acid, a violent disengagement of iodine takes
place, attended by a transient ignition; fused hydrate of phosphoric acid
liberates iodine abundantly from iodide of potassium; this reaction is
accompanied by the phenomenon of flame and formation of a considerable
quantity of hydriodic acid.
Iodide of Mercury.—For the preparation of iodide of mercury, Dublanc
recommends to cover 100 grms. of mercury with 1 kilogrm. of alcohol, to
add 124 grms. of iodine gradually in portions of ten grms., and agitating
between each fresh addition, until the alcohol becomes colorless again.
After the addition of the last 4 grms. the alcohol remains colored, the whole
of the mercury having become converted into iodide. The resulting
preparation is washed with alcohol; it is crystalline and of a hyacinth color.
Iodide of Silver.—This compound is formed upon every plate upon
which a Daguerreotype is produced. The vapor of iodine coming in contact
with the silver surface, forms an iodide which is peculiarly sensitive to
light.
The various colors produced are owing to the thickness of the coating,
and the maximum sensibility of the coating, as generally adopted, is when it
assumes a deep yellow, or slightly tinged with rose color.
This compound is largely employed in most photographic processes on
paper, and may be easily prepared by the following formula: By adding
iodide of potassium to a solution of nitrate of silver, a yellowish-white
precipitate of iodide of silver is obtained, which is insoluble in water,
slightly soluble in nitric acid, and soluble in a small degree in ammonia,
which properties seem easily to distinguish it from the chloride and bromide
of silver. Chlorine decomposes it and sets the iodine free, and chlorohydric
acid converts it into a chloride. It fuses below a red heat. Although the
effect of light on the iodide is less rapid than on the chloride, the former
sooner turning black, assuming a brown tinge; but when in connection with
gallic acid and the ferrocyanate of potash, it forms two of the most sensitive
processes on paper.
Iodide of silver dissolves easily in a solution of iodide of potassium, and
the liquid deposits in evaporation crystals of a double iodide.
Iodide of Gold.—If a solution of potassium be added to a solution of
chloride of gold, a precipitate of iodide of gold takes place, soluble in an
fused anhydrous phosphoric acid, a violent disengagement of iodine takes
place, attended by a transient ignition; fused hydrate of phosphoric acid
liberates iodine abundantly from iodide of potassium; this reaction is
accompanied by the phenomenon of flame and formation of a considerable
quantity of hydriodic acid.
Iodide of Mercury.—For the preparation of iodide of mercury, Dublanc
recommends to cover 100 grms. of mercury with 1 kilogrm. of alcohol, to
add 124 grms. of iodine gradually in portions of ten grms., and agitating
between each fresh addition, until the alcohol becomes colorless again.
After the addition of the last 4 grms. the alcohol remains colored, the whole
of the mercury having become converted into iodide. The resulting
preparation is washed with alcohol; it is crystalline and of a hyacinth color.
Iodide of Silver.—This compound is formed upon every plate upon
which a Daguerreotype is produced. The vapor of iodine coming in contact
with the silver surface, forms an iodide which is peculiarly sensitive to
light.
The various colors produced are owing to the thickness of the coating,
and the maximum sensibility of the coating, as generally adopted, is when it
assumes a deep yellow, or slightly tinged with rose color.
This compound is largely employed in most photographic processes on
paper, and may be easily prepared by the following formula: By adding
iodide of potassium to a solution of nitrate of silver, a yellowish-white
precipitate of iodide of silver is obtained, which is insoluble in water,
slightly soluble in nitric acid, and soluble in a small degree in ammonia,
which properties seem easily to distinguish it from the chloride and bromide
of silver. Chlorine decomposes it and sets the iodine free, and chlorohydric
acid converts it into a chloride. It fuses below a red heat. Although the
effect of light on the iodide is less rapid than on the chloride, the former
sooner turning black, assuming a brown tinge; but when in connection with
gallic acid and the ferrocyanate of potash, it forms two of the most sensitive
processes on paper.
Iodide of silver dissolves easily in a solution of iodide of potassium, and
the liquid deposits in evaporation crystals of a double iodide.
Iodide of Gold.—If a solution of potassium be added to a solution of
chloride of gold, a precipitate of iodide of gold takes place, soluble in an
Page 51
excess of the precipitate. A little free potash should be added to combine
with any iodide that may chance to be set free by the chloride of gold.
Iodide of Lime is prepared by adding iodine to hydrate of lime (which
will be referred to farther on) until the mixture assumes a light yellow
shade, when wanted for combinations with accelerators, or to a dark brown
when employed for the first coating. This latter mixture has been sold in our
market under the name of “Iodide of Brome.”
Iodide of Bromine.—(See page 76.)
Experiments with Iodine.—Place a plate which has been exposed in the
camera over the vapor of iodine for a very brief period, and it will present
the appearance of the impression having been solarized.
b. Upon a Daguerreotype plate, from which an impression has been
effaced by rubbing or otherwise, the picture may be made to reappear by
merely coating it over with iodine.
c. Place in a vessel a little water, into which put the smallest possible
quantity of free iodine and add a little starch, and the liquid will instantly
assume a blue color. Advantage is taken of this fact in the laboratory to
detect the presence of iodine in liquids. The starch should be dissolved in
boiling water and allowed to cool. There are numerous other interesting
experiments that can be performed by the aid of iodine, but it is
unnecessary here to consume more space.
CHLORINE.
History.—The Swedish chemist, Scheele, in 1774, while examining the
action of hydrochloric acid on peroxide of manganese, first noticed this
element. He called it dephlogisticated muriatic acid. It was afterwards, by
the French nomenclaturists, termed oxygenated muriatic acid, conceiving it
to be a compound of oxygen and muriatic acid. This view of its notice was
corrected by Sir H. Davy (in 1809), who gave it the present name. In 1840-
41, this gas vas employed for accelerating the operation of light upon the
iodized Daguerreotype plate. John Goddard, Wolcott & Johnson, Claudet,
Draper, Morse and others, were among the first made acquainted with its
use. Count Rumford, Ritter, Scheele, Seebert and others, experimented with
with any iodide that may chance to be set free by the chloride of gold.
Iodide of Lime is prepared by adding iodine to hydrate of lime (which
will be referred to farther on) until the mixture assumes a light yellow
shade, when wanted for combinations with accelerators, or to a dark brown
when employed for the first coating. This latter mixture has been sold in our
market under the name of “Iodide of Brome.”
Iodide of Bromine.—(See page 76.)
Experiments with Iodine.—Place a plate which has been exposed in the
camera over the vapor of iodine for a very brief period, and it will present
the appearance of the impression having been solarized.
b. Upon a Daguerreotype plate, from which an impression has been
effaced by rubbing or otherwise, the picture may be made to reappear by
merely coating it over with iodine.
c. Place in a vessel a little water, into which put the smallest possible
quantity of free iodine and add a little starch, and the liquid will instantly
assume a blue color. Advantage is taken of this fact in the laboratory to
detect the presence of iodine in liquids. The starch should be dissolved in
boiling water and allowed to cool. There are numerous other interesting
experiments that can be performed by the aid of iodine, but it is
unnecessary here to consume more space.
CHLORINE.
History.—The Swedish chemist, Scheele, in 1774, while examining the
action of hydrochloric acid on peroxide of manganese, first noticed this
element. He called it dephlogisticated muriatic acid. It was afterwards, by
the French nomenclaturists, termed oxygenated muriatic acid, conceiving it
to be a compound of oxygen and muriatic acid. This view of its notice was
corrected by Sir H. Davy (in 1809), who gave it the present name. In 1840-
41, this gas vas employed for accelerating the operation of light upon the
iodized Daguerreotype plate. John Goddard, Wolcott & Johnson, Claudet,
Draper, Morse and others, were among the first made acquainted with its
use. Count Rumford, Ritter, Scheele, Seebert and others, experimented with
Page 52
chlorine in regard to its effect when exposed to the action of light in
combination with silver. In 1845, M. Edward Becquerel announced that he
had “been successful in obtaining, by the agency of solar radiations, distinct
impressions, of the colors of nature.”
On the 4th of March, 1851, Neipce, St. Victor, a former partner of
DAGUERRE, announced that he had produced “all the colors by using a
bath of bichloride of copper, and that a similar phenomenon occurs with all
salts of copper, mixed with chlorine.”
Preparation.—This is easily accomplished by putting about two parts of
hydrochloric (muriatic) acid on one of powdered black oxide of manganese,
and heating it gradually in a flask or retort, to which may be adapted a bent
glass tube. A yellowish-green gas is disengaged, which being conducted
through the glass tube to the bottom of a bottle, can readily be collected,
being much heavier than the air, displaces it completely and the bottle is
filled (which can be seen by the green color); a greased stopper is tightly
fitted to it, and another bottle may be substituted.
In all experiments with chlorine, care should be taken not to inhale the
gas!
Properties.—Chlorine is a greenish-yellow gas (whence its name, from
chloros, green), with a powerful and suffocating odor, and is wholly
irrespirable. Even when much diluted with air, it produces the most
annoying irritation of the throat, with stricture of the chest and a severe
cough, which continues for hours, with the discharge of much thick mucus.
The attempt to breathe the undiluted gas would be fatal; yet, in a very small
quantity, and dissolved in water, it is used with benefit by patients suffering
under pulmonary consumption.
Under a pressure of about four atmospheres, it becomes a limpid fluid of
a fine yellow color, which does not freeze at zero, and is not a conductor of
electricity. It immediately returns to the gaseous state with effervescence on
removing the pressure.
Water recently boiled will absorb, if cold, about twice its bulk of chlorine
gas, acquiring its color and characteristic properties. The moist gas, exposed
to a cold of 32 deg., yields beautiful yellow crystals, which are a definite
compound of one equivalent of chlorine and ten of water. If these crystals
are hermetically sealed up in a glass tube, they will, on melting, exert such a
pressure as to liquefy a portion of the gas, which is distinctly seen as a
combination with silver. In 1845, M. Edward Becquerel announced that he
had “been successful in obtaining, by the agency of solar radiations, distinct
impressions, of the colors of nature.”
On the 4th of March, 1851, Neipce, St. Victor, a former partner of
DAGUERRE, announced that he had produced “all the colors by using a
bath of bichloride of copper, and that a similar phenomenon occurs with all
salts of copper, mixed with chlorine.”
Preparation.—This is easily accomplished by putting about two parts of
hydrochloric (muriatic) acid on one of powdered black oxide of manganese,
and heating it gradually in a flask or retort, to which may be adapted a bent
glass tube. A yellowish-green gas is disengaged, which being conducted
through the glass tube to the bottom of a bottle, can readily be collected,
being much heavier than the air, displaces it completely and the bottle is
filled (which can be seen by the green color); a greased stopper is tightly
fitted to it, and another bottle may be substituted.
In all experiments with chlorine, care should be taken not to inhale the
gas!
Properties.—Chlorine is a greenish-yellow gas (whence its name, from
chloros, green), with a powerful and suffocating odor, and is wholly
irrespirable. Even when much diluted with air, it produces the most
annoying irritation of the throat, with stricture of the chest and a severe
cough, which continues for hours, with the discharge of much thick mucus.
The attempt to breathe the undiluted gas would be fatal; yet, in a very small
quantity, and dissolved in water, it is used with benefit by patients suffering
under pulmonary consumption.
Under a pressure of about four atmospheres, it becomes a limpid fluid of
a fine yellow color, which does not freeze at zero, and is not a conductor of
electricity. It immediately returns to the gaseous state with effervescence on
removing the pressure.
Water recently boiled will absorb, if cold, about twice its bulk of chlorine
gas, acquiring its color and characteristic properties. The moist gas, exposed
to a cold of 32 deg., yields beautiful yellow crystals, which are a definite
compound of one equivalent of chlorine and ten of water. If these crystals
are hermetically sealed up in a glass tube, they will, on melting, exert such a
pressure as to liquefy a portion of the gas, which is distinctly seen as a
Page 53
yellow fluid, not miscible with the water which is present. Chlorine is one
of the heaviest of the gases, its density being 2.47, and 100 cubic inches
weighing 76.5 grains.
Chlorine Water.—This combination, which is used in conducting M.
Neipce’s process, can be readily prepared by conducting the gas into a
bottle containing distilled water. One part water dissolves two parts of
chlorine.
Chlorides.—The metallic chlorides are nearly all soluble in water; that of
silver and protochloride of mercury being the only exceptions. A metallic
chloride, treated with oil of vitriol, disengages chlorohydric acid. Heated
with a mixture of peroxide of manganese and sulphuric acid, chlorine is
given off, which is easily recognized by its odor and other physical
properties.
The chlorides dissolve in water; give with nitrate of silver, a white
precipitate, even in highly diluted solutions, becoming violet colored and
finally black when exposed to the light. The rapidity of the change of color
is proportioned to the intensity of the light. It is insoluble in nitric acid, but
readily soluble in ammonia; it fuses without decomposition, forming, when
cold, a tough, horny mass, and is reduced by hydrogen and by fusion with
carbonate of soda, or with resin.
Chloride of Bromine. (See page 74.)
Chloride of Iodine. (See page 85.)
Chloride of potassium.—or (Muriate of Potassa).—Dissolve half an
ounce of carbonate of potassa in water, and neutralize with muriatic acid.
Upon concentrating the solutions, cubic crystals will be obtained, having a
taste similar to common salt. They consist of potassium and chloride, and
when dissolved in water they may be regarded as muriate of potassa.
Chloride of Lime.—Mix half an ounce of slacked lime (hydrate of lime)
with six ounces of water, and conduct into this milk of lime, with frequent
agitation, as much chlorine gas as will evolve from two ounces of muriatic
acid and half an ounce of black oxide of manganese. The liquid clarifies by
standing; may be regarded as a solution of chloride of lime, and must be
protected from the air and light. It may also be made without putting in the
water with the hydrate of lime, by merely passing the chlorine into the
hydrate of lime. This last is by some used in preparations for accelerating
of the heaviest of the gases, its density being 2.47, and 100 cubic inches
weighing 76.5 grains.
Chlorine Water.—This combination, which is used in conducting M.
Neipce’s process, can be readily prepared by conducting the gas into a
bottle containing distilled water. One part water dissolves two parts of
chlorine.
Chlorides.—The metallic chlorides are nearly all soluble in water; that of
silver and protochloride of mercury being the only exceptions. A metallic
chloride, treated with oil of vitriol, disengages chlorohydric acid. Heated
with a mixture of peroxide of manganese and sulphuric acid, chlorine is
given off, which is easily recognized by its odor and other physical
properties.
The chlorides dissolve in water; give with nitrate of silver, a white
precipitate, even in highly diluted solutions, becoming violet colored and
finally black when exposed to the light. The rapidity of the change of color
is proportioned to the intensity of the light. It is insoluble in nitric acid, but
readily soluble in ammonia; it fuses without decomposition, forming, when
cold, a tough, horny mass, and is reduced by hydrogen and by fusion with
carbonate of soda, or with resin.
Chloride of Bromine. (See page 74.)
Chloride of Iodine. (See page 85.)
Chloride of potassium.—or (Muriate of Potassa).—Dissolve half an
ounce of carbonate of potassa in water, and neutralize with muriatic acid.
Upon concentrating the solutions, cubic crystals will be obtained, having a
taste similar to common salt. They consist of potassium and chloride, and
when dissolved in water they may be regarded as muriate of potassa.
Chloride of Lime.—Mix half an ounce of slacked lime (hydrate of lime)
with six ounces of water, and conduct into this milk of lime, with frequent
agitation, as much chlorine gas as will evolve from two ounces of muriatic
acid and half an ounce of black oxide of manganese. The liquid clarifies by
standing; may be regarded as a solution of chloride of lime, and must be
protected from the air and light. It may also be made without putting in the
water with the hydrate of lime, by merely passing the chlorine into the
hydrate of lime. This last is by some used in preparations for accelerating
Page 54
the operation of taking Daguerreotypes, but when used for this purpose it is
in small quantities.
Chloride of Calcium.—To one part of water add two parts of muriatic
acid, and add pieces of common chalk until effervescence ceases; then filter
through cotton cloth and evaporate it by placing it in all earthen or porcelain
dish, over a slow fire, to the consistency of a syrup. When cooling, large
prismatic crystals of chloride of calcium are formed. These must be quickly
dried by pressing between folds of blotting paper and kept carefully
excluded from the air, as it readily attracts hydrogen. For most
daguerreotype purposes, the syrup may be at once evaporated to dryness.
This is frequently placed in the iodine coating box for the purpose of
keeping the atmosphere dry. It is so easily made that every operator can
provide himself with it in a short time, and at little expense.
Chloride of Gold.—Is prepared by dissolving gold in aqua regia, a
composition of one part of nitric to two parts of muriatic acid. Gold foil is
the best for our purposes; coin, however, answers, in most cases, for the
daguerreotype operator, as the alloy, being so slight is not noticed in the
gilding process. When the latter is used, it will facilitate the operation to
beat it out, forming a thin sheet, and then cutting in small strips. Where
purity is required, foil is better. The gold is placed in three or four times its
own weight of the above acids. For this purpose, an evaporating dish is best
(a common saucer will do); a moderate heat may be applied to favor the
action. The mixture should be stirred often with a glass rod; care should be
observed not to apply too much heat, for at a temperature of about 300 deg.
the chlorine would be expelled and leave a metallic precipitate, which
would require re-dissolving. Acid may at any time be added if necessary to
dissolve the gold, but it is advisable to add as little excess as possible, as it
would require more time to evaporate. After all the gold has dissolved, and
the liquid assumes a deep red color, the solution should be allowed to cool,
being stirred nearly all the time. This salt is of a reddish-brown color. It is
rarely we find in our market good chloride of gold, as common, salt is used
for the bulk; and when the bottles are labelled “15 grains,” “20 grains,”
nine-tenths do not in reality contain exceeding five grains of chloride of
gold. The salt is mixed with the above solution when it is cooling, and gives
bright yellow crystals, which some of our uninformed operators conceive to
be the best quality.
in small quantities.
Chloride of Calcium.—To one part of water add two parts of muriatic
acid, and add pieces of common chalk until effervescence ceases; then filter
through cotton cloth and evaporate it by placing it in all earthen or porcelain
dish, over a slow fire, to the consistency of a syrup. When cooling, large
prismatic crystals of chloride of calcium are formed. These must be quickly
dried by pressing between folds of blotting paper and kept carefully
excluded from the air, as it readily attracts hydrogen. For most
daguerreotype purposes, the syrup may be at once evaporated to dryness.
This is frequently placed in the iodine coating box for the purpose of
keeping the atmosphere dry. It is so easily made that every operator can
provide himself with it in a short time, and at little expense.
Chloride of Gold.—Is prepared by dissolving gold in aqua regia, a
composition of one part of nitric to two parts of muriatic acid. Gold foil is
the best for our purposes; coin, however, answers, in most cases, for the
daguerreotype operator, as the alloy, being so slight is not noticed in the
gilding process. When the latter is used, it will facilitate the operation to
beat it out, forming a thin sheet, and then cutting in small strips. Where
purity is required, foil is better. The gold is placed in three or four times its
own weight of the above acids. For this purpose, an evaporating dish is best
(a common saucer will do); a moderate heat may be applied to favor the
action. The mixture should be stirred often with a glass rod; care should be
observed not to apply too much heat, for at a temperature of about 300 deg.
the chlorine would be expelled and leave a metallic precipitate, which
would require re-dissolving. Acid may at any time be added if necessary to
dissolve the gold, but it is advisable to add as little excess as possible, as it
would require more time to evaporate. After all the gold has dissolved, and
the liquid assumes a deep red color, the solution should be allowed to cool,
being stirred nearly all the time. This salt is of a reddish-brown color. It is
rarely we find in our market good chloride of gold, as common, salt is used
for the bulk; and when the bottles are labelled “15 grains,” “20 grains,”
nine-tenths do not in reality contain exceeding five grains of chloride of
gold. The salt is mixed with the above solution when it is cooling, and gives
bright yellow crystals, which some of our uninformed operators conceive to
be the best quality.
Page 55
Chloride of Silver.—(Oxide of Silver.)—Take any quantity of silver coin
or other silver, roll or hammer it thin; cut in small pieces. This in order to
save time. Put the silver in a glass or earthen vessel (Florence flask is best);
pour in nitric acid and water, about three parts of the former to one of the
latter. The operation of cutting up the silver may be facilitated by applying a
gentle heat. This blue solution consists of oxide of silver and oxide of
copper, both combined with nitric acid. Should the operator wish a pure
solution of silver, which, however, is not always used, he may obtain it in
the following manner:
To separate the two metals contained in the above solution from each
other, put some bright copper coins into the solution and set it aside in a
warm place for three or four days, occasionally giving it a circular motion.
The separated laminae are pure silver, which is to be digested with
ammonia until it ceases to be colored blue. The silver, after being washed
and dried, is again dissolved in nitric acid, and the liquid, diluted with
water, is kept as solution, of silver.
Either of the above solutions (the one of oxide of silver and copper, and
the pure silver solution) may be prepared for use by putting them in a bottle,
with a quantity of water, and adding common fine salt, you obtain a white
curdy precipitate of chloride of silver. No matter how much salt is used,
provided enough be added to throw down all the chloride of silver. This
solution should be well agitated and then allowed to stand for a few
minutes; thus the white precipitate is in the bottom of the bottle. When the
water has become clear, pour it off with care, leaving the sediment behind,
then add a fresh quantity of clean water, shake, let settle, and pour off as
before. Repeat the same for several times, and the excess of salt will
disappear, leaving the white precipitate, which may be drained of the water
and dried in the dark, and kept free from light and air.
CYANIDE OF POTASSIUM.
Cyanide of Potassium.—This important article is worthy the undivided
attention of every Daguerreotypist. I here give Mr. Smee’s process for its
preparation. This is from that author’s work entitled, “Electro Metallurgy,”
American edition:
or other silver, roll or hammer it thin; cut in small pieces. This in order to
save time. Put the silver in a glass or earthen vessel (Florence flask is best);
pour in nitric acid and water, about three parts of the former to one of the
latter. The operation of cutting up the silver may be facilitated by applying a
gentle heat. This blue solution consists of oxide of silver and oxide of
copper, both combined with nitric acid. Should the operator wish a pure
solution of silver, which, however, is not always used, he may obtain it in
the following manner:
To separate the two metals contained in the above solution from each
other, put some bright copper coins into the solution and set it aside in a
warm place for three or four days, occasionally giving it a circular motion.
The separated laminae are pure silver, which is to be digested with
ammonia until it ceases to be colored blue. The silver, after being washed
and dried, is again dissolved in nitric acid, and the liquid, diluted with
water, is kept as solution, of silver.
Either of the above solutions (the one of oxide of silver and copper, and
the pure silver solution) may be prepared for use by putting them in a bottle,
with a quantity of water, and adding common fine salt, you obtain a white
curdy precipitate of chloride of silver. No matter how much salt is used,
provided enough be added to throw down all the chloride of silver. This
solution should be well agitated and then allowed to stand for a few
minutes; thus the white precipitate is in the bottom of the bottle. When the
water has become clear, pour it off with care, leaving the sediment behind,
then add a fresh quantity of clean water, shake, let settle, and pour off as
before. Repeat the same for several times, and the excess of salt will
disappear, leaving the white precipitate, which may be drained of the water
and dried in the dark, and kept free from light and air.
CYANIDE OF POTASSIUM.
Cyanide of Potassium.—This important article is worthy the undivided
attention of every Daguerreotypist. I here give Mr. Smee’s process for its
preparation. This is from that author’s work entitled, “Electro Metallurgy,”
American edition:
Page 56
“The cyanide of potassium, so often alluded to while treating of the
metallo-cyanides, may be formed in several ways. It may be obtained by
heating to a dull redness the yellow ferrocyanate of potash, in a covered
vessel, filtering and rapidly evaporating it. The objection to this method,
however, is that without great care the whole of the ferrocyanate is not
decomposed, a circumstance which much reduces its value for electro-
metallurgy. By boiling, however, the ignited residue with spirits of wine this
difficulty is said to be overcome, as the ferrocyanate is absolutely insoluble
in that menstruum, while the cyanuret, at that heat, freely dissolves, and is
as easily re-deposited on cooling.
“There is, however, a much better process by which this salt may be
formed, viz. by simply transmitting hydrocyanic acid through potassium.
Although the modes of making this acid are very numerous, there is but one
which is likely to be employed on a very large scale, and that is its
formation from the yellow ferrocyanate by means of sulphuric acid. This
process is performed as follows: any given weight of the yellow salt is
taken and dissolved in about five times its weight of water; this is placed in
a retort, or some such analogous vessel, to which is then added a quantity of
strong sulphuric acid, twice the weight of the salt, and diluted with three or
four times its quantity of water. A pipe is carried from the neck of the retort
to the receiving bottle, which should be kept as cool as possible.
“For small operations, those invaluable vessels, Florence flasks, answer
well: a bent tube being connected at one end to its month, the other passing
into the second vessel; heat should be cautiously applied by means of an
Argand lamp, a little vessel of sand being placed under the flask, which
helps the acid to decompose the salt. Prussic acid is then generated and
passes through the tube to the recipient vessel, which is to be charged with
liquor potassae.
“When the potash is saturated, the operation is completed. The Germans
recommend a strong, alcoholic solution of potassa to be used in the second
vessel, for in this case, the hydrocyanic or prussic acid combines with the
potassa, forming a hydrocyanate of potassa, or, the water being abstracted,
the cyanuret of potassium, which spontaneously precipitates, on the
saturation of the fluid, the cyanuret, being insoluble in strong alcohol. The
ferrocyanate of potash may be considered as containing three equivalents of
hydrocyanic acid, two of potash and one of iron; but, unfortunately, we can
metallo-cyanides, may be formed in several ways. It may be obtained by
heating to a dull redness the yellow ferrocyanate of potash, in a covered
vessel, filtering and rapidly evaporating it. The objection to this method,
however, is that without great care the whole of the ferrocyanate is not
decomposed, a circumstance which much reduces its value for electro-
metallurgy. By boiling, however, the ignited residue with spirits of wine this
difficulty is said to be overcome, as the ferrocyanate is absolutely insoluble
in that menstruum, while the cyanuret, at that heat, freely dissolves, and is
as easily re-deposited on cooling.
“There is, however, a much better process by which this salt may be
formed, viz. by simply transmitting hydrocyanic acid through potassium.
Although the modes of making this acid are very numerous, there is but one
which is likely to be employed on a very large scale, and that is its
formation from the yellow ferrocyanate by means of sulphuric acid. This
process is performed as follows: any given weight of the yellow salt is
taken and dissolved in about five times its weight of water; this is placed in
a retort, or some such analogous vessel, to which is then added a quantity of
strong sulphuric acid, twice the weight of the salt, and diluted with three or
four times its quantity of water. A pipe is carried from the neck of the retort
to the receiving bottle, which should be kept as cool as possible.
“For small operations, those invaluable vessels, Florence flasks, answer
well: a bent tube being connected at one end to its month, the other passing
into the second vessel; heat should be cautiously applied by means of an
Argand lamp, a little vessel of sand being placed under the flask, which
helps the acid to decompose the salt. Prussic acid is then generated and
passes through the tube to the recipient vessel, which is to be charged with
liquor potassae.
“When the potash is saturated, the operation is completed. The Germans
recommend a strong, alcoholic solution of potassa to be used in the second
vessel, for in this case, the hydrocyanic or prussic acid combines with the
potassa, forming a hydrocyanate of potassa, or, the water being abstracted,
the cyanuret of potassium, which spontaneously precipitates, on the
saturation of the fluid, the cyanuret, being insoluble in strong alcohol. The
ferrocyanate of potash may be considered as containing three equivalents of
hydrocyanic acid, two of potash and one of iron; but, unfortunately, we can
Page 57
only obtain half the acid from the salt, owing to the formation of a
compound during its decomposition which resists the action of the acid. The
decomposition of this salt taking 2 equivalents or 426 grains (to avoid
fractions) would afford 3 equivalents or 81 grains of hydrocyanic, or prussic
acid, capable of forming 198 grains of cyanuret of potassium, while in the
retort there would remain 384 grains or 3 equivalents of bisulphate of
potash, and 1 equivalent or 174 grains of a peculiar compound, said to
contain 3 equivalents of cyanogen, 1 of potassium, and one of iron
(Pereira). It is manifest that, but for this later compound, we might double
the quantity of hydrocyanic acid from the yellow salt.”
The decomposition just described is the one usually received; but too
much reliance must not be placed on its accuracy, for the analysis of the
several compounds is too difficult for the results to be fully admitted. The
residue left in the retort speedily turns to one of the blues, identical with, or
allied to, Prussian blue. This is at best a disagreeable process to conduct, for
the hydrocyanic acid formed adheres so strongly to the glass, that, instead
of being freely given off, bubbles are evolved suddenly with such explosive
violence as occasionally to crack the vessel. This may be remedied as far as
possible by the insertion of plenty of waste pieces of platinum—if
platinized, so much the better, as that facilitates the escape of the gas. The
heat should be applied to every part of the vessel, and the flame should not
be allowed to play upon one single part alone. Large commercial operations
are performed in green glass or stone-ware retorts.
“Now for one word of advice to the tyro: Remember that you are
working with prussic acid; therefore, never conduct the process in a room,
the fumes being quite as poisonous as the solution of the acid itself;
moreover, have always a bottle of ammonia or chlorine by your side, that
should you have chanced to inhale more than is pleasant, it will be instantly
at hand to counteract any bad effects. It is stated by Pereira, that a little
sulphuric acid or hydroferrocyanic acid passes to the outer vessel, but
probably the amount would be of no consequence for electro-metallurgy,
otherwise, it might be as well to use a Woulfe’s apparatus, and discard the
salt formed in the first vessel. To the large manufacturer it may be worth
considering whether some other metallo-cyanuret, formed in a similar
manner to the ferrocyanuret, might not be more advantageously employed,
because the residue of the process last described contains a large quantity of
cyanogen which the acid is unable to set free.
compound during its decomposition which resists the action of the acid. The
decomposition of this salt taking 2 equivalents or 426 grains (to avoid
fractions) would afford 3 equivalents or 81 grains of hydrocyanic, or prussic
acid, capable of forming 198 grains of cyanuret of potassium, while in the
retort there would remain 384 grains or 3 equivalents of bisulphate of
potash, and 1 equivalent or 174 grains of a peculiar compound, said to
contain 3 equivalents of cyanogen, 1 of potassium, and one of iron
(Pereira). It is manifest that, but for this later compound, we might double
the quantity of hydrocyanic acid from the yellow salt.”
The decomposition just described is the one usually received; but too
much reliance must not be placed on its accuracy, for the analysis of the
several compounds is too difficult for the results to be fully admitted. The
residue left in the retort speedily turns to one of the blues, identical with, or
allied to, Prussian blue. This is at best a disagreeable process to conduct, for
the hydrocyanic acid formed adheres so strongly to the glass, that, instead
of being freely given off, bubbles are evolved suddenly with such explosive
violence as occasionally to crack the vessel. This may be remedied as far as
possible by the insertion of plenty of waste pieces of platinum—if
platinized, so much the better, as that facilitates the escape of the gas. The
heat should be applied to every part of the vessel, and the flame should not
be allowed to play upon one single part alone. Large commercial operations
are performed in green glass or stone-ware retorts.
“Now for one word of advice to the tyro: Remember that you are
working with prussic acid; therefore, never conduct the process in a room,
the fumes being quite as poisonous as the solution of the acid itself;
moreover, have always a bottle of ammonia or chlorine by your side, that
should you have chanced to inhale more than is pleasant, it will be instantly
at hand to counteract any bad effects. It is stated by Pereira, that a little
sulphuric acid or hydroferrocyanic acid passes to the outer vessel, but
probably the amount would be of no consequence for electro-metallurgy,
otherwise, it might be as well to use a Woulfe’s apparatus, and discard the
salt formed in the first vessel. To the large manufacturer it may be worth
considering whether some other metallo-cyanuret, formed in a similar
manner to the ferrocyanuret, might not be more advantageously employed,
because the residue of the process last described contains a large quantity of
cyanogen which the acid is unable to set free.
Page 58
“There are other modes of procuring prussic acid, besides the one which
has been so tediously described; but these are found to be more expensive.
The only one which I shall now notice is the process by which it is obtained
from bicyanide of mercury. The bicyanide of mercury itself is formed when
peroxide of mercury is digested with Prussian blue, the peroxide of mercury
abstracting the whole of the cyanogen from the blue, and leaving the oxides
of iron at the bottom of the vessel. The solution may be evaporated to
dryness, and one part of the salt dissolved in six of water; one part of
muriatic acid, sp. gr. 1.15, is then added, and the solution distilled, when the
whole of the hydrocyanic acid passes over, and by being conducted into a
solution of potassa, as in the former process, forms cyanuret of potassium.
This process, though easier than the first described, is rather given as a
resource under peculiar circumstances than as one to be adopted by the
large manufacturer. The expense is the only objection, but in a small
quantity this cannot be a consideration.
“In giving this very rough outline of the general mode of forming salts,
the minutiae necessary for chemical work have altogether been avoided,
and those parts alone are entered upon which are more immediately
necessary for the electro metallurgist to know and practice for himself. This
will account for the long description of the cyanuret of potassium, while the
preparation of the equally important and even more used acids, the
sulphuric, muriatic, etc., commonly found in commerce, are altogether
neglected.
“In using solutions of cyanide of potassium, the workman should not
immerse his arms into them, otherwise it occasionally happens that the
solution produces very troublesome eruptions over the skin.”
HYPOSULPHITE OF SODA.
Hyposulphite of Soda.—This salt forms one of the important chemicals
for the Daguerreotype operator. Its application to this art is of an interesting
nature. It is used to dissolve the sensitive salt of silver which remains
unchanged during the exposure in the camera. It has the property of readily
dissolving the chloride, bromide and iodide of silver. It should be pure and
free from sulphuret of sodium; should this last be present, it will cause
has been so tediously described; but these are found to be more expensive.
The only one which I shall now notice is the process by which it is obtained
from bicyanide of mercury. The bicyanide of mercury itself is formed when
peroxide of mercury is digested with Prussian blue, the peroxide of mercury
abstracting the whole of the cyanogen from the blue, and leaving the oxides
of iron at the bottom of the vessel. The solution may be evaporated to
dryness, and one part of the salt dissolved in six of water; one part of
muriatic acid, sp. gr. 1.15, is then added, and the solution distilled, when the
whole of the hydrocyanic acid passes over, and by being conducted into a
solution of potassa, as in the former process, forms cyanuret of potassium.
This process, though easier than the first described, is rather given as a
resource under peculiar circumstances than as one to be adopted by the
large manufacturer. The expense is the only objection, but in a small
quantity this cannot be a consideration.
“In giving this very rough outline of the general mode of forming salts,
the minutiae necessary for chemical work have altogether been avoided,
and those parts alone are entered upon which are more immediately
necessary for the electro metallurgist to know and practice for himself. This
will account for the long description of the cyanuret of potassium, while the
preparation of the equally important and even more used acids, the
sulphuric, muriatic, etc., commonly found in commerce, are altogether
neglected.
“In using solutions of cyanide of potassium, the workman should not
immerse his arms into them, otherwise it occasionally happens that the
solution produces very troublesome eruptions over the skin.”
HYPOSULPHITE OF SODA.
Hyposulphite of Soda.—This salt forms one of the important chemicals
for the Daguerreotype operator. Its application to this art is of an interesting
nature. It is used to dissolve the sensitive salt of silver which remains
unchanged during the exposure in the camera. It has the property of readily
dissolving the chloride, bromide and iodide of silver. It should be pure and
free from sulphuret of sodium; should this last be present, it will cause
Page 59
brown spots of sulphurated silver upon the Daguerreotype impression. This
annoyance is a great source of complaint from many operators, and ever
will be, so long as it is prepared by men who have no reputation to lose, and
whose eyes are blinded by the “Almighty Dollar.”
A good article may be prepared as follows:
“Mix one pound of finely pulverized carbonate of soda with ten ounces
of flowers of sulphur, and heat the mixture slowly in a porcelain dish till the
sulphur melts. Stir the fused mass, so as to expose all its parts freely to the
atmosphere, whereby it passes from the state of a sulphuret, by the
absorption of atmospheric oxygen, into that of a sulphite, with the
phenomenon of very slight incandescence. Dissolve in water, filter the
solution, and boil it immediately along with flowers of sulphur. The filtered
concentrated saline liquid will afford, on cooling, a large quantity of pure
and beautiful crystals of hyposulphite of soda.”
Hyposulphite of Gold.—This compound salt is by a few considered
preferable to the chloride of gold, but our experience has induced us to use
the latter, believing we are enabled to produce a more brilliant and warm-
toned impression with it. When the hyposulphite of gold is used in gilding,
it requires less heat and a longer application, as there is some danger of
producing a glossy scum over some parts of the surface of the plate. I
prepare this salt as follows:
Dissolve one part chloride of gold and four parts hyposulphite of soda in
equal quantities of distilled water: pour the gold into the hyposulphite
solution, in the same manner as in mixing the gilding solution; let it stand
until it becomes limpid; filter and evaporate to dryness. Re-dissolve and add
a few grains of burnt alum.
After standing a few hours, filter and evaporate again. If not sufficiently
pure, repeat the crystallization until it is so. For gilding, dissolve in water
and use in the same manner as the common gilding solution.
N.B.—The four following mixtures were employed in Neipce’s process
in his earliest experiments:
Aqueous Solution of Bichloride of Mercury.—Eight grains of bichloride
of mercury in 10,000 grains of distilled water.
Solution of Cyanide of Mercury.—A flask of distilled water is saturated
with cyanide of mercury, and a certain quantity is decanted, which is diluted
annoyance is a great source of complaint from many operators, and ever
will be, so long as it is prepared by men who have no reputation to lose, and
whose eyes are blinded by the “Almighty Dollar.”
A good article may be prepared as follows:
“Mix one pound of finely pulverized carbonate of soda with ten ounces
of flowers of sulphur, and heat the mixture slowly in a porcelain dish till the
sulphur melts. Stir the fused mass, so as to expose all its parts freely to the
atmosphere, whereby it passes from the state of a sulphuret, by the
absorption of atmospheric oxygen, into that of a sulphite, with the
phenomenon of very slight incandescence. Dissolve in water, filter the
solution, and boil it immediately along with flowers of sulphur. The filtered
concentrated saline liquid will afford, on cooling, a large quantity of pure
and beautiful crystals of hyposulphite of soda.”
Hyposulphite of Gold.—This compound salt is by a few considered
preferable to the chloride of gold, but our experience has induced us to use
the latter, believing we are enabled to produce a more brilliant and warm-
toned impression with it. When the hyposulphite of gold is used in gilding,
it requires less heat and a longer application, as there is some danger of
producing a glossy scum over some parts of the surface of the plate. I
prepare this salt as follows:
Dissolve one part chloride of gold and four parts hyposulphite of soda in
equal quantities of distilled water: pour the gold into the hyposulphite
solution, in the same manner as in mixing the gilding solution; let it stand
until it becomes limpid; filter and evaporate to dryness. Re-dissolve and add
a few grains of burnt alum.
After standing a few hours, filter and evaporate again. If not sufficiently
pure, repeat the crystallization until it is so. For gilding, dissolve in water
and use in the same manner as the common gilding solution.
N.B.—The four following mixtures were employed in Neipce’s process
in his earliest experiments:
Aqueous Solution of Bichloride of Mercury.—Eight grains of bichloride
of mercury in 10,000 grains of distilled water.
Solution of Cyanide of Mercury.—A flask of distilled water is saturated
with cyanide of mercury, and a certain quantity is decanted, which is diluted
Page 60
with an equal quantity of distilled water.
Acidulated White Oil of Petroleum.—This oil is acidulated by mixing
with it one tenth of pure nitric acid, leaving it for at least 48 hours,
occasionally agitating the flask. The oil, which is acidulated, and which
then powerfully reddens litmus paper, is decanted. It is also a little colored,
but remains very limpid.
Solution of Chloride of Gold and Platinum.—In order not to multiply the
solutions, take the ordinary chloride of gold, used for fixing the
impressions, and which is composed of 1 gramme of chloride of gold and
50 grains of hyposulphate of soda, to a quart of distilled water.
With respect to chloride of platinum, 4 grains must be dissolved in 3
quarts of distilled water; these two solutions are mixed in equal quantities.
Acids.—I shall not go into the preparations of the various acids
employed in the Daguerreotype. This would be useless to the operator, as
there are few, if any, that it would be advisable to prepare. It is only
necessary for the experimenter to be made acquainted with their properties,
and this in order to prevent any haphazard experiments, which are too
common among operators. Any person who may be desirous to try an
experiment, should first study the agents he wishes to employ. By so doing
much time and money will be saved; while the searcher after new
discoveries would rarely become vexed on account of his own ignorance, or
be obliged to avail himself of the experience of others in any department of
science.
Nitric Acid—Exists in combination with the bases, potash, soda, lime,
magnesia, in both the mineral and vegetable kingdoms, and is never found
insoluble. It has the same constituents as common air, but in different
proportions. The strongest nitric acid contains in every pound, two and a
quarter ounces of water. Pure nitric acid is colorless, with a specific gravity
of 1.5, and boiling at 248 deg.. It is a most powerful oxidizing agent, and is
decomposed with more or less rapidity, by almost all the metals, to which it
yields a portion of its oxygen.
The nitric acid of commerce, is generally the article used by the
Daguerreotypist. This usually contains some chlorine and sulphuric acid. It
is obtained by the distillation of saltpetre with sulphuric acid. It is employed
in the Daguerreotype process for dissolving silver, preparing chloride or
oxide, nitrate of silver, [the former used in galvanizing,] and in combination
Acidulated White Oil of Petroleum.—This oil is acidulated by mixing
with it one tenth of pure nitric acid, leaving it for at least 48 hours,
occasionally agitating the flask. The oil, which is acidulated, and which
then powerfully reddens litmus paper, is decanted. It is also a little colored,
but remains very limpid.
Solution of Chloride of Gold and Platinum.—In order not to multiply the
solutions, take the ordinary chloride of gold, used for fixing the
impressions, and which is composed of 1 gramme of chloride of gold and
50 grains of hyposulphate of soda, to a quart of distilled water.
With respect to chloride of platinum, 4 grains must be dissolved in 3
quarts of distilled water; these two solutions are mixed in equal quantities.
Acids.—I shall not go into the preparations of the various acids
employed in the Daguerreotype. This would be useless to the operator, as
there are few, if any, that it would be advisable to prepare. It is only
necessary for the experimenter to be made acquainted with their properties,
and this in order to prevent any haphazard experiments, which are too
common among operators. Any person who may be desirous to try an
experiment, should first study the agents he wishes to employ. By so doing
much time and money will be saved; while the searcher after new
discoveries would rarely become vexed on account of his own ignorance, or
be obliged to avail himself of the experience of others in any department of
science.
Nitric Acid—Exists in combination with the bases, potash, soda, lime,
magnesia, in both the mineral and vegetable kingdoms, and is never found
insoluble. It has the same constituents as common air, but in different
proportions. The strongest nitric acid contains in every pound, two and a
quarter ounces of water. Pure nitric acid is colorless, with a specific gravity
of 1.5, and boiling at 248 deg.. It is a most powerful oxidizing agent, and is
decomposed with more or less rapidity, by almost all the metals, to which it
yields a portion of its oxygen.
The nitric acid of commerce, is generally the article used by the
Daguerreotypist. This usually contains some chlorine and sulphuric acid. It
is obtained by the distillation of saltpetre with sulphuric acid. It is employed
in the Daguerreotype process for dissolving silver, preparing chloride or
oxide, nitrate of silver, [the former used in galvanizing,] and in combination
Page 61
with muriatic acid for preparing chloride of gold, used in gilding. It is also
used by some for preparing the plate.
Acidulated Solution.—This solution is used for cleaning the surface of
the Daguerreotype plate. It has the property of softening the silver, and
bringing it to a state in which it is very susceptible of being either oxidized
or iodized, hence it contributes to increase the sensibility of the plate. The
proportions are to one drop of acid add from 15 to 20 drops of water, or
make the solution about like sharp vinegar to the taste.
Nitro-Muriatic Acid.—Aqua Regia is a compound menstruum invented
by the alchemists for dissolving gold. It is composed of colorless nitric acid
(aqua-fortis) and ordinary muriatic acid; the mixture is yellow, and acquires
the power of dissolving gold and platinum. These materials are not properly
oxidized; it nearly causes their combination with chlorine, which is in the
Muriatic acid.
Hydrochloric Acid (Muriatic Acid).—This acid forms a valuable addition
to the chemicals employed by the practical Daguerreotypist. This acid is
formed by acting upon common salt (which is chloride of sodium) by
concentrated sulphuric acid. The water of the acid is decomposed, and its
hydrogen combines with the chloride of the salt to form muriatic acid, and
this unites with the sulphuric acid to form sulphate of soda; 60 parts of
common salt and 49 parts of concentrated sulphuric acid, afford, by this
mutual action, 37 parts of muriatic acid and 72 parts of sulphate of soda.
The muriatic acid of commerce has usually a yellowish tinge, but when
chemically pure it is colorless. The former is commonly contaminated with
sulphurous acid, sulphuric acid, chlorine, iron, and sometimes with arsenic.
Muriatic acid, from the fact of the presence of the chlorine, is used in the
Daguerreotype process for dissolving gold, and in combination with various
accelerators. Its presence can be detected by ammonia. A strip of paper
dipped in this and waved to and fro will emit a thick white smoke if the acid
vapor be in the atmosphere. The ammonia neutralizes the acid fumes. By
reversing the experiment we can determine whether vapor of ammonia be in
the air, and also deprive these suffocating and dangerous gases of their
injurious properties, and remove them from the air. Every Daguerreotype
operator should be furnished with, at least, a six ounce bottle of aqua
ammonia. Its operation is very nearly the same on bromine and iodine
vapor.
used by some for preparing the plate.
Acidulated Solution.—This solution is used for cleaning the surface of
the Daguerreotype plate. It has the property of softening the silver, and
bringing it to a state in which it is very susceptible of being either oxidized
or iodized, hence it contributes to increase the sensibility of the plate. The
proportions are to one drop of acid add from 15 to 20 drops of water, or
make the solution about like sharp vinegar to the taste.
Nitro-Muriatic Acid.—Aqua Regia is a compound menstruum invented
by the alchemists for dissolving gold. It is composed of colorless nitric acid
(aqua-fortis) and ordinary muriatic acid; the mixture is yellow, and acquires
the power of dissolving gold and platinum. These materials are not properly
oxidized; it nearly causes their combination with chlorine, which is in the
Muriatic acid.
Hydrochloric Acid (Muriatic Acid).—This acid forms a valuable addition
to the chemicals employed by the practical Daguerreotypist. This acid is
formed by acting upon common salt (which is chloride of sodium) by
concentrated sulphuric acid. The water of the acid is decomposed, and its
hydrogen combines with the chloride of the salt to form muriatic acid, and
this unites with the sulphuric acid to form sulphate of soda; 60 parts of
common salt and 49 parts of concentrated sulphuric acid, afford, by this
mutual action, 37 parts of muriatic acid and 72 parts of sulphate of soda.
The muriatic acid of commerce has usually a yellowish tinge, but when
chemically pure it is colorless. The former is commonly contaminated with
sulphurous acid, sulphuric acid, chlorine, iron, and sometimes with arsenic.
Muriatic acid, from the fact of the presence of the chlorine, is used in the
Daguerreotype process for dissolving gold, and in combination with various
accelerators. Its presence can be detected by ammonia. A strip of paper
dipped in this and waved to and fro will emit a thick white smoke if the acid
vapor be in the atmosphere. The ammonia neutralizes the acid fumes. By
reversing the experiment we can determine whether vapor of ammonia be in
the air, and also deprive these suffocating and dangerous gases of their
injurious properties, and remove them from the air. Every Daguerreotype
operator should be furnished with, at least, a six ounce bottle of aqua
ammonia. Its operation is very nearly the same on bromine and iodine
vapor.
Page 62
Hydrofluoric Acid (Fluorohydric Acid).—This acid is used to form some
of the most volatile and sensitive compounds employed in the
Daguerreotype. It is one of the most dangerous bodies to experiment with: it
is volatile and corrosive, giving off dense white fumes in the air. It
combines with water with great heat. At 32 deg. it condenses into a
colorless fluid, with a density 1.069. It is obtained from decomposition of
fluorspar by strong sulphuric acid. It readily dissolves the silica in glass,
and consequently cannot be kept in a vessel of that material. It is prepared
and kept in lead. It is employed in accelerators on account of its fluorine.
One small drop on the tongue of a dog causes death. The operator who
wishes to use it should pour some of the liquid for which he intends it into a
graduate, or other vessel, and then add the desired quantity of acid. If by
accident any of the spray should fall upon the skin, it should at once be
copiously drenched with water.
Sulphuric Acid.—There are two sorts of this acid: one is an oily, fuming
liquid; this is made in Nordhausen, in Saxony, and is commonly called
“Nordhausen sulphuric acid,” or oil of vitriol. The other which is the kind
used in connection with the Daguerreotype, is common sulphuric acid. It is
somewhat thinner, and when undiluted is not fuming. This acid may be
obtained in a solid and dry state, called anhydrous sulphuric acid.
The common sulphuric acid is made by burning sulphur, which forms
sulphurous acid. To convert this into sulphuric acid and gain more oxygen,
nitric acid, which is rich in that body, is added. It forms a limpid, colorless
fluid, of a specific gravity of 1.8. It boils at 620 deg.; it freezes at 15 deg. It
is acrid and caustic, and intensely acid in all its characters, even when
largely diluted.
Its attraction for basis is such that it separates or expels all other acids,
more or less perfectly, from their combinations. Its affinity for water is such
that it rapidly absorbs it from the atmosphere, and when mixed with water
much heat is evolved. It acts energetically upon animal and vegetable
substances, and is a poisonous, dangerous substance to get on the skin. It is
a powerful oxidizing agent; hence its use in the galvanic battery, for which
purpose it is mostly used by the Daguerreotypist. The fumes of this being so
much more offensive than nitric acid, the latter is sometimes used. It is also
employed in some of the more sensitive accelerators.
of the most volatile and sensitive compounds employed in the
Daguerreotype. It is one of the most dangerous bodies to experiment with: it
is volatile and corrosive, giving off dense white fumes in the air. It
combines with water with great heat. At 32 deg. it condenses into a
colorless fluid, with a density 1.069. It is obtained from decomposition of
fluorspar by strong sulphuric acid. It readily dissolves the silica in glass,
and consequently cannot be kept in a vessel of that material. It is prepared
and kept in lead. It is employed in accelerators on account of its fluorine.
One small drop on the tongue of a dog causes death. The operator who
wishes to use it should pour some of the liquid for which he intends it into a
graduate, or other vessel, and then add the desired quantity of acid. If by
accident any of the spray should fall upon the skin, it should at once be
copiously drenched with water.
Sulphuric Acid.—There are two sorts of this acid: one is an oily, fuming
liquid; this is made in Nordhausen, in Saxony, and is commonly called
“Nordhausen sulphuric acid,” or oil of vitriol. The other which is the kind
used in connection with the Daguerreotype, is common sulphuric acid. It is
somewhat thinner, and when undiluted is not fuming. This acid may be
obtained in a solid and dry state, called anhydrous sulphuric acid.
The common sulphuric acid is made by burning sulphur, which forms
sulphurous acid. To convert this into sulphuric acid and gain more oxygen,
nitric acid, which is rich in that body, is added. It forms a limpid, colorless
fluid, of a specific gravity of 1.8. It boils at 620 deg.; it freezes at 15 deg. It
is acrid and caustic, and intensely acid in all its characters, even when
largely diluted.
Its attraction for basis is such that it separates or expels all other acids,
more or less perfectly, from their combinations. Its affinity for water is such
that it rapidly absorbs it from the atmosphere, and when mixed with water
much heat is evolved. It acts energetically upon animal and vegetable
substances, and is a poisonous, dangerous substance to get on the skin. It is
a powerful oxidizing agent; hence its use in the galvanic battery, for which
purpose it is mostly used by the Daguerreotypist. The fumes of this being so
much more offensive than nitric acid, the latter is sometimes used. It is also
employed in some of the more sensitive accelerators.
Page 63
ACCELERATING SUBSTANCES.
Remarks on the Accelerating substances Used in the Daguerreotype.—I
have now arrived at a point in this work, where the eye of the
Daguerreotype public will intently search for something new. This search
will prove in vain, at least so far as regards those who have enjoyed and
embraced the opportunities for studying the principles of our art. Every
experienced operator has in a degree become familiar with the mechanical
uses of all the agents employed, while I fear but few understand the
properties, and laws governing those properties, which are so indispensable
to produce an image impressed upon the silver surface.
There are three substances which form the bases for producing a
Daguerreotype; silver, iodine and bromine. Each forms a separate body
which is indispensable to the operators success as the art is now practiced in
America. With these three, compounds of great variety are formed.
The silver surface is first thoroughly cleaned and freed from all organic
matter, then exposed to vapor of iodine, producing an iodide of silver. The
plate upon which is this salt, is again exposed to the vapor of bromine,
forming a bromo-iodide of silver, a salt also.
As most of the various accelerators are compounds of bromine, with
either chlorine or fluorine combination, they partake somewhat of the
nature of these latter, giving results which can be detected by the
experienced operator. Thus muriatic acid is added for its chlorine, which
can generally be detected by the impression produced, being of a light, soft,
mellow tone, and in most cases presenting a brilliant black to that colored
drapery. Those who wish to experiment with agents for accelerating
substances, should first study to well understand their peculiar nature and
properties; as well, also, to endeavor to find out what will be the probable
changes they undergo in combination as an accelerator. This should be done
before making the experiments. From the foregoing it will be seen that
numerous compounds are formed from the same basis, and, consequently, it
would be a waste of time and a useless appropriation to devote more of our
space than is necessary to give the principal and most reliable combination.
In America, the words “Quick” and “Quick Stuff,” are more generally
used for and instead of the more proper names, “Sensitives,” or
Remarks on the Accelerating substances Used in the Daguerreotype.—I
have now arrived at a point in this work, where the eye of the
Daguerreotype public will intently search for something new. This search
will prove in vain, at least so far as regards those who have enjoyed and
embraced the opportunities for studying the principles of our art. Every
experienced operator has in a degree become familiar with the mechanical
uses of all the agents employed, while I fear but few understand the
properties, and laws governing those properties, which are so indispensable
to produce an image impressed upon the silver surface.
There are three substances which form the bases for producing a
Daguerreotype; silver, iodine and bromine. Each forms a separate body
which is indispensable to the operators success as the art is now practiced in
America. With these three, compounds of great variety are formed.
The silver surface is first thoroughly cleaned and freed from all organic
matter, then exposed to vapor of iodine, producing an iodide of silver. The
plate upon which is this salt, is again exposed to the vapor of bromine,
forming a bromo-iodide of silver, a salt also.
As most of the various accelerators are compounds of bromine, with
either chlorine or fluorine combination, they partake somewhat of the
nature of these latter, giving results which can be detected by the
experienced operator. Thus muriatic acid is added for its chlorine, which
can generally be detected by the impression produced, being of a light, soft,
mellow tone, and in most cases presenting a brilliant black to that colored
drapery. Those who wish to experiment with agents for accelerating
substances, should first study to well understand their peculiar nature and
properties; as well, also, to endeavor to find out what will be the probable
changes they undergo in combination as an accelerator. This should be done
before making the experiments. From the foregoing it will be seen that
numerous compounds are formed from the same basis, and, consequently, it
would be a waste of time and a useless appropriation to devote more of our
space than is necessary to give the principal and most reliable combination.
In America, the words “Quick” and “Quick Stuff,” are more generally
used for and instead of the more proper names, “Sensitives,” or
Page 64
“Accelerators,” etc. As it has by use become common, I frequently use it in
this work.
Liquid Accelerator, No. 1.—This mixture was used by me in 1849, and is
given as it appeared in my “System of Photography,” published at the above
date:
Take pure rain or distilled water, one quart, filter through paper into a
ground stopper bottle, and add, for warm weather, one and a half ounce
chloride of iodine; or for cold, one ounce; then add one ounce bromine, and
shake well. Now with care not to allow the vapor to escape, add drop by
drop, thirty drops of aqua ammonia, shaking well at each drop. Care must
be taken not to add more at a time, as it evokes too much heat. This mixed,
in equal proportions with John Roach’s quick, forms an excellent chemical
combination. For this purpose, take one and a half ounce of each, to which
add ten ounces water, for warm weather, or from six to seven for cold. Pour
the whole into a large box, and it will work from two to four months. I am
now using (1849) one charged as above which has been in constant use for
three months, and works uniformly well. The above is right for half or full
size boxes, but half of it would be sufficient for a quarter size box.
Coat to the first shade of rose over iodine, change to a deep rosy red over
quick, and black about one tenth the first.
I would not now recommend the addition of “John Roach’s quick,” as I
believe equally good results can be produced without it. This liquid is now
used by many, and is very good for taking views.
Lime Water Quick.—This mixture is more used at present than all the
other liquids ever introduced. It produced the most uniform results, giving
the fine soft tone so characteristic in pictures produces from accelerators
containing chlorine. To one quart of lime water (this can be had of any
druggist) add one and a half ounce of pulverized alum. This should be
shook at intervals for twenty—four hours; then add one ounce of chloride
of iodine and three fourths ounce of bromine.
Lime Water.—This is easily prepared by putting lime into water, say a
piece of quick-lime about the size of an egg into one quart of water. This
should be shook occasionally for two or three days and allowed to settle,
when the water can be poured off and used.
Use.—To one part of quick add six parts of water; coat to a light yellow
over the iodine, to a rose color over the quick, and recoat about one tenth.
this work.
Liquid Accelerator, No. 1.—This mixture was used by me in 1849, and is
given as it appeared in my “System of Photography,” published at the above
date:
Take pure rain or distilled water, one quart, filter through paper into a
ground stopper bottle, and add, for warm weather, one and a half ounce
chloride of iodine; or for cold, one ounce; then add one ounce bromine, and
shake well. Now with care not to allow the vapor to escape, add drop by
drop, thirty drops of aqua ammonia, shaking well at each drop. Care must
be taken not to add more at a time, as it evokes too much heat. This mixed,
in equal proportions with John Roach’s quick, forms an excellent chemical
combination. For this purpose, take one and a half ounce of each, to which
add ten ounces water, for warm weather, or from six to seven for cold. Pour
the whole into a large box, and it will work from two to four months. I am
now using (1849) one charged as above which has been in constant use for
three months, and works uniformly well. The above is right for half or full
size boxes, but half of it would be sufficient for a quarter size box.
Coat to the first shade of rose over iodine, change to a deep rosy red over
quick, and black about one tenth the first.
I would not now recommend the addition of “John Roach’s quick,” as I
believe equally good results can be produced without it. This liquid is now
used by many, and is very good for taking views.
Lime Water Quick.—This mixture is more used at present than all the
other liquids ever introduced. It produced the most uniform results, giving
the fine soft tone so characteristic in pictures produces from accelerators
containing chlorine. To one quart of lime water (this can be had of any
druggist) add one and a half ounce of pulverized alum. This should be
shook at intervals for twenty—four hours; then add one ounce of chloride
of iodine and three fourths ounce of bromine.
Lime Water.—This is easily prepared by putting lime into water, say a
piece of quick-lime about the size of an egg into one quart of water. This
should be shook occasionally for two or three days and allowed to settle,
when the water can be poured off and used.
Use.—To one part of quick add six parts of water; coat to a light yellow
over the iodine, to a rose color over the quick, and recoat about one tenth.
Page 65
The above coating may be increased or diminished, it matters not, so that
there is not too much, and the proper proportions are preserved. Some add
to the above a small quantity of magnesia, say about a teaspoonful to the
quart of liquid.
Liquid Accelerator, No. 2.—The following was for a long time used by
one of the first houses in the United States, and probably was one of the
first liquids ever used. It produces a fine-toned picture, but is not considered
as sure as the lime water quick:
Take rain water one quart, add pulverized alum until it is a little sour to
the taste, and a small piece, say one half inch square, of magnesia. Filter
through paper, and add chloride of iodine one half ounce, bromine sufficient
to take it up, which is a little less than half an ounce.
Charge with one of quick to six of water; coat over iodine to a soft
yellow, nearly, but not quite, bordering on a rose; over quick to a dark
purple, or steel, and back one sixth to one tenth.
Wolcott’s American Mixture.—Van Loan Quick.—This mixture was first
formed and used by T. Wolcott & Johnson and gained great celebrity for its
productions. I have now a bottle hermetically sealed that contains about a
half ounce of this mixture prepared in 1841 by John Johnson, now a
resident of this city, and the former partner of Mr. Wolcott. The preparation
of this mixture, as furnished by Mr. Johnson himself, is given as follows:
“One part of bromine, eight parts of nitric acid, sixteen parts of muriatic
acid, water one hundred parts. This mixture should be allowed to stand for
several days; it improves by age.
“Use.—A few drops say, 6 to 12, of this mixture, should be put into about
6 or 8 ounces of water; it will require frequent replenishing by the addition
of a few more drops. The plate should be coated over the dry iodine to a red
just bordering on a slate, and then exposed to the mixture only sufficiently
long to change the color. If this is not done in less than six seconds it is not
strong enough. Re-coat over the iodine full one fourth as long as first
coating.”
This exceedingly volatile compound is difficult to control from its
instability; it is but little used. The impressions successfully produced by
this mixture are very brilliant, and possess a pleasing peculiarity.
there is not too much, and the proper proportions are preserved. Some add
to the above a small quantity of magnesia, say about a teaspoonful to the
quart of liquid.
Liquid Accelerator, No. 2.—The following was for a long time used by
one of the first houses in the United States, and probably was one of the
first liquids ever used. It produces a fine-toned picture, but is not considered
as sure as the lime water quick:
Take rain water one quart, add pulverized alum until it is a little sour to
the taste, and a small piece, say one half inch square, of magnesia. Filter
through paper, and add chloride of iodine one half ounce, bromine sufficient
to take it up, which is a little less than half an ounce.
Charge with one of quick to six of water; coat over iodine to a soft
yellow, nearly, but not quite, bordering on a rose; over quick to a dark
purple, or steel, and back one sixth to one tenth.
Wolcott’s American Mixture.—Van Loan Quick.—This mixture was first
formed and used by T. Wolcott & Johnson and gained great celebrity for its
productions. I have now a bottle hermetically sealed that contains about a
half ounce of this mixture prepared in 1841 by John Johnson, now a
resident of this city, and the former partner of Mr. Wolcott. The preparation
of this mixture, as furnished by Mr. Johnson himself, is given as follows:
“One part of bromine, eight parts of nitric acid, sixteen parts of muriatic
acid, water one hundred parts. This mixture should be allowed to stand for
several days; it improves by age.
“Use.—A few drops say, 6 to 12, of this mixture, should be put into about
6 or 8 ounces of water; it will require frequent replenishing by the addition
of a few more drops. The plate should be coated over the dry iodine to a red
just bordering on a slate, and then exposed to the mixture only sufficiently
long to change the color. If this is not done in less than six seconds it is not
strong enough. Re-coat over the iodine full one fourth as long as first
coating.”
This exceedingly volatile compound is difficult to control from its
instability; it is but little used. The impressions successfully produced by
this mixture are very brilliant, and possess a pleasing peculiarity.
Page 66
DRY SENSITIVES.
Hydrate of Lime.—The operation by which water is combined with lime
is called slaking. Take a piece of quick lime, common lime used in mortar,
and immerse it in warm water for about fifteen seconds; then place it in an
iron or tin vessel. It will soon begin to swell, evolving a great deal of heat
and emitting steam, and soon falls into a fine powder, hydrate of lime. This
should be well stirred and allowed to cool, and then bottled in order to
prevent it from giving off the hydrate and recovering the carbonic acid from
the atmosphere. The last is detrimental to its use with bromine, and is one
cause of the complaint that “it will not take bromine.” The hydrate of lime
should, not be dried over a heat, as has been supposed by many, for in that
case the hydrogen is expelled and it returns to a carbonate. It is advisable to
cool it in a damp place like a ground cellar. Much of the lime in our market
will not, except it be quite damp, combine with the bromine. This is owing
to impurities. Nothing is equal to oyster-shell lime, which I use altogether.
Bromide of Lime.—In preparing large quantities of this, we adopt the
following method: Fill a four-quart bottle about two-thirds full of hydrate of
lime; pour into this about one or two ounces of bromine; then shake well,
add more of the bromine, shake well and let it stand for a few hours, adding
sufficient bromine to give it a fine red color. It is better when kept in the
large bottles, as it forms a more perfect combination: in other words it
improves by age.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a rose red and then over this mixture to a
purple or slate; recoat over the first about one fourth as long as first coating.
Gurneys American Compound.—Of this compound there are two
combinations, one for use, when the temperature of the atmosphere is above
65 or 70 deg., and the other at a lower temperature. The first is called No. 1,
the second No. 2.
No. 1 is prepared by placing hydrate of lime in a bottle, say to three
quarts of the hydrate of lime, add one ounce of pulverized burnt alum, and
as much chloride of lime as can be put on a quarter of a dollar, and from 15
to 30 grains of dry pulverized iodine, or enough to change the color of the
hydrate of lime, to the slightest possible tinge of yellow. There had better be
less than carry the color to a deeper shade. The object of using the iodine is
to form a compound with bromine that is not so volatile as the bromine
Hydrate of Lime.—The operation by which water is combined with lime
is called slaking. Take a piece of quick lime, common lime used in mortar,
and immerse it in warm water for about fifteen seconds; then place it in an
iron or tin vessel. It will soon begin to swell, evolving a great deal of heat
and emitting steam, and soon falls into a fine powder, hydrate of lime. This
should be well stirred and allowed to cool, and then bottled in order to
prevent it from giving off the hydrate and recovering the carbonic acid from
the atmosphere. The last is detrimental to its use with bromine, and is one
cause of the complaint that “it will not take bromine.” The hydrate of lime
should, not be dried over a heat, as has been supposed by many, for in that
case the hydrogen is expelled and it returns to a carbonate. It is advisable to
cool it in a damp place like a ground cellar. Much of the lime in our market
will not, except it be quite damp, combine with the bromine. This is owing
to impurities. Nothing is equal to oyster-shell lime, which I use altogether.
Bromide of Lime.—In preparing large quantities of this, we adopt the
following method: Fill a four-quart bottle about two-thirds full of hydrate of
lime; pour into this about one or two ounces of bromine; then shake well,
add more of the bromine, shake well and let it stand for a few hours, adding
sufficient bromine to give it a fine red color. It is better when kept in the
large bottles, as it forms a more perfect combination: in other words it
improves by age.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a rose red and then over this mixture to a
purple or slate; recoat over the first about one fourth as long as first coating.
Gurneys American Compound.—Of this compound there are two
combinations, one for use, when the temperature of the atmosphere is above
65 or 70 deg., and the other at a lower temperature. The first is called No. 1,
the second No. 2.
No. 1 is prepared by placing hydrate of lime in a bottle, say to three
quarts of the hydrate of lime, add one ounce of pulverized burnt alum, and
as much chloride of lime as can be put on a quarter of a dollar, and from 15
to 30 grains of dry pulverized iodine, or enough to change the color of the
hydrate of lime, to the slightest possible tinge of yellow. There had better be
less than carry the color to a deeper shade. The object of using the iodine is
to form a compound with bromine that is not so volatile as the bromine
Page 67
itself. No matter how little iodine is combined with the bromine, the vapors
possess their relative proportion; hence, only enough iodine to prevent
“flaring,” or as it is often termed a “scum-coating,” is used. The iodine
should be thoroughly combined with the lime, which will take about one or
two days. Should add bromine the same as in bromide of lime, until the
compound assumes a light red color.
No. 2 is prepared in the same manner as No. 1, except the addition of the
iodine, which is omitted.
Use.—No. 1. Coat over the iodine to a bright yellow color, then over the
compound, No. 1, to red color, recoat over iodine, about one sixth as long,
as the time occupied in first coating.
No. 2. Coat over iodine same as above, except recoat over the iodine
about one fourth to one half as long as first coating.
Dry Quick, No. 1.—Bromide of Lime and Starch.—The following
compound forms an excellent accelerator, and is used by many. It is claimed
for this preparation, that it will hold the bromine longer than others where
starch is not employed. As regards this claim we do not think it can be
substantiated. Our experience in practice has led us to the conclusion that
there is no great difference as respects durability, but there is some little
difference as regards the tone of the impressions produced by its use.
To one quart of hydrate of lime add one quart of finely pulverized starch.
To this mixture add bromine, until it assumes a deep yellow or pink color.
Starch may be added to any of the dry mixtures.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a deep yellow, then over this quick to a red
color, recoat about one sixth of the time of first coating.
I will here again remark, that the exact color of the coating is not
essentially provided a proper proportion is preserved.
I have never seen it stated, though it be a fact worthy of note, that a
proportionate time for coating over the iodine and accelerator, will not
answer. For example: if a plate exposed to the vapor of iodine be perfectly
coated in sixteen seconds, and then exposed to an accelerator, (not having
iodine in its combination) receives its coating in four seconds, it will be
found that a proper proportionate coating cannot be preserved by adopting,
a proportion of time, but on the contrary, the time will diminish; for
exposure over the accelerator, as in the above example, if it be desired to
possess their relative proportion; hence, only enough iodine to prevent
“flaring,” or as it is often termed a “scum-coating,” is used. The iodine
should be thoroughly combined with the lime, which will take about one or
two days. Should add bromine the same as in bromide of lime, until the
compound assumes a light red color.
No. 2 is prepared in the same manner as No. 1, except the addition of the
iodine, which is omitted.
Use.—No. 1. Coat over the iodine to a bright yellow color, then over the
compound, No. 1, to red color, recoat over iodine, about one sixth as long,
as the time occupied in first coating.
No. 2. Coat over iodine same as above, except recoat over the iodine
about one fourth to one half as long as first coating.
Dry Quick, No. 1.—Bromide of Lime and Starch.—The following
compound forms an excellent accelerator, and is used by many. It is claimed
for this preparation, that it will hold the bromine longer than others where
starch is not employed. As regards this claim we do not think it can be
substantiated. Our experience in practice has led us to the conclusion that
there is no great difference as respects durability, but there is some little
difference as regards the tone of the impressions produced by its use.
To one quart of hydrate of lime add one quart of finely pulverized starch.
To this mixture add bromine, until it assumes a deep yellow or pink color.
Starch may be added to any of the dry mixtures.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a deep yellow, then over this quick to a red
color, recoat about one sixth of the time of first coating.
I will here again remark, that the exact color of the coating is not
essentially provided a proper proportion is preserved.
I have never seen it stated, though it be a fact worthy of note, that a
proportionate time for coating over the iodine and accelerator, will not
answer. For example: if a plate exposed to the vapor of iodine be perfectly
coated in sixteen seconds, and then exposed to an accelerator, (not having
iodine in its combination) receives its coating in four seconds, it will be
found that a proper proportionate coating cannot be preserved by adopting,
a proportion of time, but on the contrary, the time will diminish; for
exposure over the accelerator, as in the above example, if it be desired to
Page 68
coat the plate with twice as much iodine as in the above example, the time
would be, over iodine thirty-two seconds, and over the accelerator (to
possess a proper proportion) from six to seven seconds. Hence it is that
many inexperienced operators, when wishing to vary their usual manner of
coating, fail in producing a favorable result. They coat calculating a
proportion of time when they should not.
Dry Quick, No. 2.—Bromide of Lime and Magnesia.—To one quart of
hydrate of lime add one quart of magnesia, and mix them well together; add
bromine same as in preparing bromide of lime; coat the same as over dry
quick No. 1. This combination produces very uniform results, and is worked
with much success by beginners.
Chloro-Bromide of Lime.—To the bromide of lime add chloride of
bromine until the mixture becomes a pale yellow color, resembling sulphur.
It should be shook well, and enough of the chloride of bromine added to
bring the compound to a deep blood red color.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a pink color, and then over the above to a
red, or just changing the color. It should be remembered that accelerators
containing chlorine do not admit of a great change of color of coating on
the plate.
Iodide of Starch.—This mixture can be employed for coating over in
warm weather, and prevent the flashing resulting at high temperatures. It
may be used the same as the iodide alone.
To six ounces of finely pulverized starch, add one fourth ounce of dry
iodine.
Use.—Same as the dry iodine alone.
The same combination may be made with lime, magnesia and other
substances.
Concentrated Solution of Iodine for First Coating.—It may appear
strange to some of our old operators that an aqueous solution of iodine can
be used for coating the plate and forming the iodide of silver. It has long
been a cry among most operators that it is impossible to succeed when the
iodine box contains dampness. Now this is a great mistake, and we will here
state that in all cases where dampness appears upon a properly prepared
Daguerreotype plate, it is the result of a different temperature of the metal
from the air which surrounds it. Mr. Senter, of Auburn, was the first of our
would be, over iodine thirty-two seconds, and over the accelerator (to
possess a proper proportion) from six to seven seconds. Hence it is that
many inexperienced operators, when wishing to vary their usual manner of
coating, fail in producing a favorable result. They coat calculating a
proportion of time when they should not.
Dry Quick, No. 2.—Bromide of Lime and Magnesia.—To one quart of
hydrate of lime add one quart of magnesia, and mix them well together; add
bromine same as in preparing bromide of lime; coat the same as over dry
quick No. 1. This combination produces very uniform results, and is worked
with much success by beginners.
Chloro-Bromide of Lime.—To the bromide of lime add chloride of
bromine until the mixture becomes a pale yellow color, resembling sulphur.
It should be shook well, and enough of the chloride of bromine added to
bring the compound to a deep blood red color.
Use.—Coat over the iodine to a pink color, and then over the above to a
red, or just changing the color. It should be remembered that accelerators
containing chlorine do not admit of a great change of color of coating on
the plate.
Iodide of Starch.—This mixture can be employed for coating over in
warm weather, and prevent the flashing resulting at high temperatures. It
may be used the same as the iodide alone.
To six ounces of finely pulverized starch, add one fourth ounce of dry
iodine.
Use.—Same as the dry iodine alone.
The same combination may be made with lime, magnesia and other
substances.
Concentrated Solution of Iodine for First Coating.—It may appear
strange to some of our old operators that an aqueous solution of iodine can
be used for coating the plate and forming the iodide of silver. It has long
been a cry among most operators that it is impossible to succeed when the
iodine box contains dampness. Now this is a great mistake, and we will here
state that in all cases where dampness appears upon a properly prepared
Daguerreotype plate, it is the result of a different temperature of the metal
from the air which surrounds it. Mr. Senter, of Auburn, was the first of our
Page 69
operators who used a solution of iodine for coating the plate, and we several
years since saw his results, which would rival the production of any other
operator. A concentrated solution of iodine is prepared by putting into a
common bottle two thimblesful of hyposulphite of soda and a rather larger
quantity of iodine, so that there may be more than sufficient. Add to it about
40 ounces of common water (heated to 60 or 70 degrees), by little and little,
moving, the bottle to warm it, for fear of breaking. After shaking it a short
time, the water is rapidly and strongly colored. The solution should be
poured into a bottle with a ground stopper, and when cool used for iodizing.
A solution of sufficient strength can be made by moistening or just
covering the iodine with water.
Chloride of Iodine as an Accelerator.—This is probably one of the best
accelerators that can be used for coating the plate for taking views; it works
too slow, however, to meet the wants of the operating room, yet its use was
formerly, for a long time, adhered to by some of our best professors. In
producing views with this, we are successful in obtaining well-developed
impressions, with a depth of tone and richness of appearance not to be met
with in the productions of any other substances. I give its use as furnished
me by an old and experienced operator, and published in Humphrey’s
Journal, vol. i. p. 180:
“As the process of using chloride of iodine may be of interest to some of
our subscribers, I take pleasure in giving the following manipulation. To
one ounce of chloride of iodine add two ounces of water; place this mixture
in a coating-box, the same as quick stuff; coat the plate with dry iodine to a
light yellow, or lemon color; then bring the coating to a deep pink over the
chloride. The plate must be recoated over the dry iodine.”
This combination has been very successfully used in one of our most
extensive establishments in this city, and the superiority of the pictures
produced by it was considered as an equivalent for the additional time
required to bring out the impressions.
Chlorine as an Accelerator.—I shall here refer to but a single experiment
in which I employed chlorine gas for coating the plate. I was provided with
a retort, the neck of which was fitted to the jar of my coating-box, through a
hole drilled for its reception. This was fitted perfectly tight in my coating-
box. I placed some pure undiluted bromine water and the agents necessary
for producing chlorine gas (in small quantity) in the retort. The result was
years since saw his results, which would rival the production of any other
operator. A concentrated solution of iodine is prepared by putting into a
common bottle two thimblesful of hyposulphite of soda and a rather larger
quantity of iodine, so that there may be more than sufficient. Add to it about
40 ounces of common water (heated to 60 or 70 degrees), by little and little,
moving, the bottle to warm it, for fear of breaking. After shaking it a short
time, the water is rapidly and strongly colored. The solution should be
poured into a bottle with a ground stopper, and when cool used for iodizing.
A solution of sufficient strength can be made by moistening or just
covering the iodine with water.
Chloride of Iodine as an Accelerator.—This is probably one of the best
accelerators that can be used for coating the plate for taking views; it works
too slow, however, to meet the wants of the operating room, yet its use was
formerly, for a long time, adhered to by some of our best professors. In
producing views with this, we are successful in obtaining well-developed
impressions, with a depth of tone and richness of appearance not to be met
with in the productions of any other substances. I give its use as furnished
me by an old and experienced operator, and published in Humphrey’s
Journal, vol. i. p. 180:
“As the process of using chloride of iodine may be of interest to some of
our subscribers, I take pleasure in giving the following manipulation. To
one ounce of chloride of iodine add two ounces of water; place this mixture
in a coating-box, the same as quick stuff; coat the plate with dry iodine to a
light yellow, or lemon color; then bring the coating to a deep pink over the
chloride. The plate must be recoated over the dry iodine.”
This combination has been very successfully used in one of our most
extensive establishments in this city, and the superiority of the pictures
produced by it was considered as an equivalent for the additional time
required to bring out the impressions.
Chlorine as an Accelerator.—I shall here refer to but a single experiment
in which I employed chlorine gas for coating the plate. I was provided with
a retort, the neck of which was fitted to the jar of my coating-box, through a
hole drilled for its reception. This was fitted perfectly tight in my coating-
box. I placed some pure undiluted bromine water and the agents necessary
for producing chlorine gas (in small quantity) in the retort. The result was
Page 70
that my first experiment produced an impression completely solarized in all
its parts by an exposure of four seconds of time, which would have required
an exposure of twenty seconds to produce a perfectly developed impression
by the usual process.
Another trial immediately produced one of the finest toned impressions I
ever saw, perfectly developed in one second of time.
My next two or three experiments proved total failures. I was unable to
produce even a sign of an impression. By accident my retort was broken,
and not being in a locality convenient to obtain another, my experiments
were necessarily suspended.
My attention was not called to this subject again for several years, when I
noticed an account of some similar experiments by F. A. P. Barnard and Dr.
W. H. Harrington, the latter of whom is now of the firm of Dobyns &
Harrington, of New Orleans.
From reading this article, I found my own difficulties explained. Too
much of the chlorine gas was present in my coating jar. I would like to see
some of our enterprising operators investigate this combination.
It is a singular fact, that the vapors of bromine and chlorine combining
upon the iodide of silver, produce a more sensitive coating than when the
two are combined in solution, as in chloride of bromine solution. Those
having Humphrey’s Journal at hand, can refer to vol. i. p. 142.
To use Bromine Water or other Accelerators in Hot Weather.—An
excellent plan for using bromine water is as follows:
Fill a two-ounce bottle quarter full of it, and then fill the bottle with fine
sand, which serves to preserve a low temperature; then place the bottle in a
porous cup, same as used in the battery; fill this also with sand, and close
the end with plaster of Paris. Place this in a coating-box, and it will be
found to act with great uniformity and be quite permanent.
Bromide of Lime, another accelerator, can be used in the same manner,
except it is, only necessary, when a solid sensitive is used, to mix it with the
sand without placing it in a bottle. This method is employed with great
success by a few, who have regarded it as a secret worth keeping.
A Combination, requiring the Use of only One Coating-box.—It is often
wondered by beginners, why some solution requiring only one coating
cannot be employed. This can be done, but the results are not so satisfactory
its parts by an exposure of four seconds of time, which would have required
an exposure of twenty seconds to produce a perfectly developed impression
by the usual process.
Another trial immediately produced one of the finest toned impressions I
ever saw, perfectly developed in one second of time.
My next two or three experiments proved total failures. I was unable to
produce even a sign of an impression. By accident my retort was broken,
and not being in a locality convenient to obtain another, my experiments
were necessarily suspended.
My attention was not called to this subject again for several years, when I
noticed an account of some similar experiments by F. A. P. Barnard and Dr.
W. H. Harrington, the latter of whom is now of the firm of Dobyns &
Harrington, of New Orleans.
From reading this article, I found my own difficulties explained. Too
much of the chlorine gas was present in my coating jar. I would like to see
some of our enterprising operators investigate this combination.
It is a singular fact, that the vapors of bromine and chlorine combining
upon the iodide of silver, produce a more sensitive coating than when the
two are combined in solution, as in chloride of bromine solution. Those
having Humphrey’s Journal at hand, can refer to vol. i. p. 142.
To use Bromine Water or other Accelerators in Hot Weather.—An
excellent plan for using bromine water is as follows:
Fill a two-ounce bottle quarter full of it, and then fill the bottle with fine
sand, which serves to preserve a low temperature; then place the bottle in a
porous cup, same as used in the battery; fill this also with sand, and close
the end with plaster of Paris. Place this in a coating-box, and it will be
found to act with great uniformity and be quite permanent.
Bromide of Lime, another accelerator, can be used in the same manner,
except it is, only necessary, when a solid sensitive is used, to mix it with the
sand without placing it in a bottle. This method is employed with great
success by a few, who have regarded it as a secret worth keeping.
A Combination, requiring the Use of only One Coating-box.—It is often
wondered by beginners, why some solution requiring only one coating
cannot be employed. This can be done, but the results are not so satisfactory
Page 71
as when two or more are employed. Such an accelerator may be produced
by adding alcoholic solution of iodine to a solution of chlorate of potash,
until the latter will take up no more of the former, and to each ounce, by
measure of this solution, ten drops of a saturated solution of bromide in
water are added. The solution of chlorate of potash is made by diluting, one
part of a saturated solution of the salt with ten parts of water. The use of the
chlorate is simply as a solvent of iodine.
Fats as Accelerators.—The use of fats, oils, or greasy substances, has
been one of the most emphatic prohibitions about the Daguerreotype plate.
Yet it has been proved that its presence in a small quantity upon the silver
surface has the effect of reducing the time of exposure in the camera from
two-thirds to three-fourths. An application may be made as follows: Pour
sweet oil, or rub beef or mutton fat, on a common buff, which is free from
all polishing powders. With this, buff a well-cleaned plate, and it will leave
a scum, which should be mostly removed by using another buff, which
should be clean. Coat the plate in the usual manner, and the result will be a
great reduction in the time of exposure in the camera. The impression
produced upon a plate so prepared presents, when coming from the vapor of
mercury, a grey, scummy appearance, which, on the application of heat in
gilding, does not improve; hence its use is not generally adopted.
We have instituted some investigations upon this subject, and in the
present volume, we shall not refer to it further. Those wishing to learn more
fully the effect of light upon organic substances will find Robert Hunt’s
“Researches on Light” an invaluable work.
by adding alcoholic solution of iodine to a solution of chlorate of potash,
until the latter will take up no more of the former, and to each ounce, by
measure of this solution, ten drops of a saturated solution of bromide in
water are added. The solution of chlorate of potash is made by diluting, one
part of a saturated solution of the salt with ten parts of water. The use of the
chlorate is simply as a solvent of iodine.
Fats as Accelerators.—The use of fats, oils, or greasy substances, has
been one of the most emphatic prohibitions about the Daguerreotype plate.
Yet it has been proved that its presence in a small quantity upon the silver
surface has the effect of reducing the time of exposure in the camera from
two-thirds to three-fourths. An application may be made as follows: Pour
sweet oil, or rub beef or mutton fat, on a common buff, which is free from
all polishing powders. With this, buff a well-cleaned plate, and it will leave
a scum, which should be mostly removed by using another buff, which
should be clean. Coat the plate in the usual manner, and the result will be a
great reduction in the time of exposure in the camera. The impression
produced upon a plate so prepared presents, when coming from the vapor of
mercury, a grey, scummy appearance, which, on the application of heat in
gilding, does not improve; hence its use is not generally adopted.
We have instituted some investigations upon this subject, and in the
present volume, we shall not refer to it further. Those wishing to learn more
fully the effect of light upon organic substances will find Robert Hunt’s
“Researches on Light” an invaluable work.
Page 72
CHAPTER IV.
LIGHT AND OPTICS.
Light—Optics—Solar Spectrum—Decomposition of Light
—Light, Heat, and Actinism—Blue Paper and Color for the
Walls of the Operating Room—Proportions of Light, Heat,
and Actinism composing a Sunbeam—Refraction—
Reflection—Lenses—Copying Spherical Aberration—
Chromatic Aberration.
It is advisable that persons engaging in the Daguerreotype art should
have at least a little knowledge of the general principles of light and optics.
It is not the author’s design here to give a full treatise on these subjects, but
he only briefly refers to the matter, giving a few facts.
It has been well observed by an able writer, that it is impossible to trace
the path of a sunbeam through our atmosphere without feeling a desire to
know its nature, by what power it traverses the immensity of space, and the
various modifications it undergoes at the surfaces and interior of terrestrial
substances.
Light is white and colorless, as long as it does not come in contact with
matter. When in apposition with any body, it suffers variable degrees of
decomposition, resulting in color, as by reflection, dispersion, refraction,
and unequal absorption.
To Sir I. Newton the world is indebted for proving the compound nature
of a ray of white light emitted from the sun. The object of this work is not to
engage in an extended theory upon the subject of light, but to recur only to
some points of more particular interest to the photographic operator.
The decomposition of a beam of light can be noticed by exposing it to a
prism. If, in a dark room, a beam of light be admitted through a small hole
LIGHT AND OPTICS.
Light—Optics—Solar Spectrum—Decomposition of Light
—Light, Heat, and Actinism—Blue Paper and Color for the
Walls of the Operating Room—Proportions of Light, Heat,
and Actinism composing a Sunbeam—Refraction—
Reflection—Lenses—Copying Spherical Aberration—
Chromatic Aberration.
It is advisable that persons engaging in the Daguerreotype art should
have at least a little knowledge of the general principles of light and optics.
It is not the author’s design here to give a full treatise on these subjects, but
he only briefly refers to the matter, giving a few facts.
It has been well observed by an able writer, that it is impossible to trace
the path of a sunbeam through our atmosphere without feeling a desire to
know its nature, by what power it traverses the immensity of space, and the
various modifications it undergoes at the surfaces and interior of terrestrial
substances.
Light is white and colorless, as long as it does not come in contact with
matter. When in apposition with any body, it suffers variable degrees of
decomposition, resulting in color, as by reflection, dispersion, refraction,
and unequal absorption.
To Sir I. Newton the world is indebted for proving the compound nature
of a ray of white light emitted from the sun. The object of this work is not to
engage in an extended theory upon the subject of light, but to recur only to
some points of more particular interest to the photographic operator.
The decomposition of a beam of light can be noticed by exposing it to a
prism. If, in a dark room, a beam of light be admitted through a small hole
Page 73
in a shutter, it will form a white round spot upon the place where it falls. If a
triangular prism of glass be placed on the inside of the dark room, so that
the beam of light falls upon it, it no longer has the same direction, nor does
it form a round spot, but an oblong painted image of seven colors—red,
orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. This is called the solar
spectrum, and will be readily understood by reference to the accompanying
diagram, Fig. 1.
{133}
To those who are unacquainted with the theory of light (and for their
benefit this chapter is given), it may be a matter of wonder how a beam of
light can be divided.
triangular prism of glass be placed on the inside of the dark room, so that
the beam of light falls upon it, it no longer has the same direction, nor does
it form a round spot, but an oblong painted image of seven colors—red,
orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. This is called the solar
spectrum, and will be readily understood by reference to the accompanying
diagram, Fig. 1.
{133}
To those who are unacquainted with the theory of light (and for their
benefit this chapter is given), it may be a matter of wonder how a beam of
light can be divided.
Page 74
This can be understood when I say, that white light is a bundle of colored
rays united together, and when so incorporated, they are colorless; but in
passing through the prism the bond of union is severed, and the colored rays
come out singly and separately, because each ray has a certain amount of
refracting (bending) power, peculiar to itself. These rays always hold the
same relation to each other, as may be seen by comparing every spectrum or
rainbow; there is never any confusion or misplacement.
There are various other means of decomposing {134} white light besides
the prism, of which one of the principal and most interesting to the
Daguerreotypist is by reflection from colored bodies. If a beam of white
light falls upon a white surface, it is reflected without change; but if it falls
upon a red surface, only the red ray is reflected: so also with yellow and
other colors. The ray which is reflected corresponds with the color of the
object. It is this reflected decomposed light which prevents the beautifully-
colored image we see upon the ground glass in our cameras.
rays united together, and when so incorporated, they are colorless; but in
passing through the prism the bond of union is severed, and the colored rays
come out singly and separately, because each ray has a certain amount of
refracting (bending) power, peculiar to itself. These rays always hold the
same relation to each other, as may be seen by comparing every spectrum or
rainbow; there is never any confusion or misplacement.
There are various other means of decomposing {134} white light besides
the prism, of which one of the principal and most interesting to the
Daguerreotypist is by reflection from colored bodies. If a beam of white
light falls upon a white surface, it is reflected without change; but if it falls
upon a red surface, only the red ray is reflected: so also with yellow and
other colors. The ray which is reflected corresponds with the color of the
object. It is this reflected decomposed light which prevents the beautifully-
colored image we see upon the ground glass in our cameras.
Page 75
A sunbeam may be capable of three divisions—LIGHT, HEAT, and
ACTINISM; the last causes all the chemical changes, and is the acting
power upon surfaces prepared to receive the photographic image. The
accompanying illustration, Fig. 2, will readily bring to the mind of the reader
the relation of these one to another, and their intensities in the different parts
of a decomposed sunbeam.
The various points of the solar spectrum are represented in the order in
which they occur between A, and B, this exhibits the limits of the Newtonian
spectrum, corresponding with Fig. 1. Sir John Herschel and Seebeck have
shown that there exists, beyond the violet, a faint violet light, or rather a
ACTINISM; the last causes all the chemical changes, and is the acting
power upon surfaces prepared to receive the photographic image. The
accompanying illustration, Fig. 2, will readily bring to the mind of the reader
the relation of these one to another, and their intensities in the different parts
of a decomposed sunbeam.
The various points of the solar spectrum are represented in the order in
which they occur between A, and B, this exhibits the limits of the Newtonian
spectrum, corresponding with Fig. 1. Sir John Herschel and Seebeck have
shown that there exists, beyond the violet, a faint violet light, or rather a
Page 76
lavender to b, to which gradually becomes colorless; similarly, red light
exists beyond the assigned limits of the red ray to a. The greatest amount of
actinic power is shown at E opposite the violet; hence this color “exerts” the
greatest amount of influence in the formation of the photographic image.
(Blue paper and blue color have been somewhat extensively used by our
Daguerreotype operators in their operating rooms and skylights, in order to
facilitate the operation in the camera. I fancy, however, that this plan cannot
be productive of as much good as thought by some, from the fact, that the
light falling upon the subject, and then reflected into the camera, is, coming
through colorless glass, not affected by such rays as may be reflected from
the walls of the operating room; and even if it were so, I conceive that it
would be injurious, by destroying the harmony of shadows which might
otherwise occur.) The greatest amount of white light is at C; the yellow
contains less of the chemical power than any other portion of the solar
spectrum. It has been found that the most intense heat is at the extreme red,
b.
Artificial lights differ in their color; the white light of burning charcoal,
which is the principal light from candles, oil and gas, contains three rays—
red, yellow, and blue. The dazzling light emitted from lime intensely heated,
known as the Drummond light, gives the colors of the prism almost as bright
as the solar spectrum.
If we expose a prepared Daguerreotype plate or sensitive paper to the
solar spectrum, it will be observed that the luminous power (the yellow)
occupies but a small space compared with the influence of heat and chemical
power. R. Hunt, in his Researches on Light, has presented the following
remarks upon the accompanying illustration:
exists beyond the assigned limits of the red ray to a. The greatest amount of
actinic power is shown at E opposite the violet; hence this color “exerts” the
greatest amount of influence in the formation of the photographic image.
(Blue paper and blue color have been somewhat extensively used by our
Daguerreotype operators in their operating rooms and skylights, in order to
facilitate the operation in the camera. I fancy, however, that this plan cannot
be productive of as much good as thought by some, from the fact, that the
light falling upon the subject, and then reflected into the camera, is, coming
through colorless glass, not affected by such rays as may be reflected from
the walls of the operating room; and even if it were so, I conceive that it
would be injurious, by destroying the harmony of shadows which might
otherwise occur.) The greatest amount of white light is at C; the yellow
contains less of the chemical power than any other portion of the solar
spectrum. It has been found that the most intense heat is at the extreme red,
b.
Artificial lights differ in their color; the white light of burning charcoal,
which is the principal light from candles, oil and gas, contains three rays—
red, yellow, and blue. The dazzling light emitted from lime intensely heated,
known as the Drummond light, gives the colors of the prism almost as bright
as the solar spectrum.
If we expose a prepared Daguerreotype plate or sensitive paper to the
solar spectrum, it will be observed that the luminous power (the yellow)
occupies but a small space compared with the influence of heat and chemical
power. R. Hunt, in his Researches on Light, has presented the following
remarks upon the accompanying illustration:
Page 77
“If the linear measure, or the diameter of a circle which shall include the
luminous rays, is 25, that of the calorific spectrum will be 42.10, and of the
chemical spectrum 55.10. Such a series of circles may well be used to
represent a beam from the sun, which may be regarded as an atom of Light,
surrounded with an invisible atmosphere of Heat, and another still more
extended, which possesses the remarkable property of producing chemical
and molecular change.
luminous rays, is 25, that of the calorific spectrum will be 42.10, and of the
chemical spectrum 55.10. Such a series of circles may well be used to
represent a beam from the sun, which may be regarded as an atom of Light,
surrounded with an invisible atmosphere of Heat, and another still more
extended, which possesses the remarkable property of producing chemical
and molecular change.
Page 78
A ray of light, in passing obliquely through any medium of uniform
density, does not change its course; but if it should pass into a denser body, it
would turn from a straight line, pursue a less oblique direction, and in a line
nearer to a perpendicular to the surface of that body. Water exerts a stronger
refracting power than air; and if a ray of light fall upon a body of this fluid
its course is changed, as may be seen by reference to Fig. 4.
It is observed that it proceeds in a less oblique direction (towards the
dotted line), and, on passing on through, leaves the liquid, proceeding in a
line parallel to that at which it entered. It should be observed that at the
surface of bodies the refractive power is exerted, and that the light proceeds
in a straight line until leaving the body. The refraction is more or less, and in
all cases in proportion as the rays fall more or less obliquely on the
refracting surface. It is this law of optics which has given rise to the lenses in
our camera tubes, by which means we are enabled to secure a well-
delineated representation of any object we choose to picture.
density, does not change its course; but if it should pass into a denser body, it
would turn from a straight line, pursue a less oblique direction, and in a line
nearer to a perpendicular to the surface of that body. Water exerts a stronger
refracting power than air; and if a ray of light fall upon a body of this fluid
its course is changed, as may be seen by reference to Fig. 4.
It is observed that it proceeds in a less oblique direction (towards the
dotted line), and, on passing on through, leaves the liquid, proceeding in a
line parallel to that at which it entered. It should be observed that at the
surface of bodies the refractive power is exerted, and that the light proceeds
in a straight line until leaving the body. The refraction is more or less, and in
all cases in proportion as the rays fall more or less obliquely on the
refracting surface. It is this law of optics which has given rise to the lenses in
our camera tubes, by which means we are enabled to secure a well-
delineated representation of any object we choose to picture.
Page 79
When a ray of light passes from one medium to another, and through that
into the first again, if the two refractions be equal, and in opposite directions,
no sensible effect will be produced.
The reader may readily comprehend the phenomena of refraction, by
means of light passing through lenses of different curves, by reference to the
following diagrams:—
Fig 5 represents a double-convex lens, Fig. 6 a double-concave, and Fig. 7
a concavo-convex or meniscus. By these it is seen that a double-convex lens
tends to condense the rays of light to a focus, a double-concave to scatter
them, and a concavo-convex combines both powers.
If parallel rays of light fall upon a double-convex lens, D D, Fig. 8, they
will be refracted (excepting such as pass directly through the centre) to a
point termed the principal focus.
into the first again, if the two refractions be equal, and in opposite directions,
no sensible effect will be produced.
The reader may readily comprehend the phenomena of refraction, by
means of light passing through lenses of different curves, by reference to the
following diagrams:—
Fig 5 represents a double-convex lens, Fig. 6 a double-concave, and Fig. 7
a concavo-convex or meniscus. By these it is seen that a double-convex lens
tends to condense the rays of light to a focus, a double-concave to scatter
them, and a concavo-convex combines both powers.
If parallel rays of light fall upon a double-convex lens, D D, Fig. 8, they
will be refracted (excepting such as pass directly through the centre) to a
point termed the principal focus.
Page 80
The lines A B C represent parallel rays which pass through the lens, D D,
and meet at F; this point being the principal focus, its distance from the lens
is called the focal length. Those rays of light which are traversing a parallel
course, when they enter the lens are brought to a focus nearer the lens than
others. Hence the difficulty the operator sometimes experiences by not being
able to “obtain a focus,” when he wishes to secure a picture of some very
distant objects; he does not get his ground glass near enough to the lenses.
Again, the rays from an object near by may be termed diverging rays. This
will be better comprehended by reference to Fig. 9, where it will be seen that
the dotted lines, representing parallel rays, meet nearer the lenses than those
from the point A. The closer the object is to the lenses, the greater will be the
divergence. This rule is applicable to copying. Did we wish to copy a 1/6
size Daguerreotype on a 1/16 size plate, we should place it in such a position
to the lenses at A that the focus would be at F, where the image would be
represented at about the proper size. Now, if we should wish to copy the 1/6
size picture, and produce another of exactly the same dimensions, we have
only to bring it nearer to the lenses, so that the lens D E shall be equi-distant
from the picture and the focus, i. e. from A to B. The reason of this is, that
the distance of the picture from the lens, in the last copy, is less than the
other, and the divergence has increased, throwing, the focus further from the
lens.”
and meet at F; this point being the principal focus, its distance from the lens
is called the focal length. Those rays of light which are traversing a parallel
course, when they enter the lens are brought to a focus nearer the lens than
others. Hence the difficulty the operator sometimes experiences by not being
able to “obtain a focus,” when he wishes to secure a picture of some very
distant objects; he does not get his ground glass near enough to the lenses.
Again, the rays from an object near by may be termed diverging rays. This
will be better comprehended by reference to Fig. 9, where it will be seen that
the dotted lines, representing parallel rays, meet nearer the lenses than those
from the point A. The closer the object is to the lenses, the greater will be the
divergence. This rule is applicable to copying. Did we wish to copy a 1/6
size Daguerreotype on a 1/16 size plate, we should place it in such a position
to the lenses at A that the focus would be at F, where the image would be
represented at about the proper size. Now, if we should wish to copy the 1/6
size picture, and produce another of exactly the same dimensions, we have
only to bring it nearer to the lenses, so that the lens D E shall be equi-distant
from the picture and the focus, i. e. from A to B. The reason of this is, that
the distance of the picture from the lens, in the last copy, is less than the
other, and the divergence has increased, throwing, the focus further from the
lens.”
Page 81
These remarks have been introduced here as being important for those
who may not understand the principles of enlarging or reducing pictures in
copying.
I would remark that the points F and A, in Fig. 9, are termed “conjugate
foci.”
If we hold a double-convex lens opposite any object, we find that an
inverted image of that object will be formed on a paper held behind it. To
illustrate this more clearly, I will refer to the following woodcut:
who may not understand the principles of enlarging or reducing pictures in
copying.
I would remark that the points F and A, in Fig. 9, are termed “conjugate
foci.”
If we hold a double-convex lens opposite any object, we find that an
inverted image of that object will be formed on a paper held behind it. To
illustrate this more clearly, I will refer to the following woodcut:
Page 82
“If A B C is an object placed before a convex lens, L L, every point of it
will send forth rays in all directions; but, for the sake of simplicity, suppose
only three points to give out rays, one at the top, one at the middle, and one
at the bottom; the whole of the rays then that proceed from the point A, and
fall on the lens L L, will be refracted and form an image somewhere on the
line A G E, which is drawn direct through the centre of the lens;
consequently the focus E, produced by the convergence of the rays
proceding from A, must form an image of A, only in a different relative
position; the middle point of C being in a direct line with the axis of the lens,
will have its image formed on the axis F, and the rays proceeding from the
point B will form an image at D; so that by imagining luminous objects to be
made up of all infinite number of radiating points and the rays from each
individual point, although falling on the whole surface of the lens, to
converge again and form a focus or representation of that point from which
the rays first emerged, it will be very easy to comprehend how images are
formed, and the cause of those images being reversed.
“It must also be evident, that in the two triangles A G B and D G E, that E
D, the length of the image, must be to A B, the length of the object, as G D,
the distance of the image, is to G B, the distance of the object from the lens.
It will be observed that in the last cut the image produced by the lens is
curved. Now, it would be impossible to produce a well-defined image from
the centre to the edge upon a plain surface; the outer edges would be misty,
indistinct, or crayon-like. The centre of the image might be represented clear
and sharp on the ground glass, yet this would be far from the case in regard
to the outer portions. This is called spherical aberration, and to it is due the
want of distinctness which is frequently noticed around the edges of pictures
taken in the camera. To secure a camera with a flat, sharp, field, should be
the object of every operator; and, in a measure, this constitutes the great
difference in cameras manufactured in this country.
Spherical aberration is overcome by proper care in the formation of the
lens: “It can be shown upon mathematical data that a lens similar to that
given in the following diagram—one surface of which is a section of an
ellipse, and the other of a circle struck from the furthest of the two foci of
that ellipse—produces no aberration.
“At the earliest period of the employment of the camera obscura, a
double-convex lens was used to produce the image; but this form was soon
abandoned, on account of the spherical aberration so caused. Lenses for the
will send forth rays in all directions; but, for the sake of simplicity, suppose
only three points to give out rays, one at the top, one at the middle, and one
at the bottom; the whole of the rays then that proceed from the point A, and
fall on the lens L L, will be refracted and form an image somewhere on the
line A G E, which is drawn direct through the centre of the lens;
consequently the focus E, produced by the convergence of the rays
proceding from A, must form an image of A, only in a different relative
position; the middle point of C being in a direct line with the axis of the lens,
will have its image formed on the axis F, and the rays proceeding from the
point B will form an image at D; so that by imagining luminous objects to be
made up of all infinite number of radiating points and the rays from each
individual point, although falling on the whole surface of the lens, to
converge again and form a focus or representation of that point from which
the rays first emerged, it will be very easy to comprehend how images are
formed, and the cause of those images being reversed.
“It must also be evident, that in the two triangles A G B and D G E, that E
D, the length of the image, must be to A B, the length of the object, as G D,
the distance of the image, is to G B, the distance of the object from the lens.
It will be observed that in the last cut the image produced by the lens is
curved. Now, it would be impossible to produce a well-defined image from
the centre to the edge upon a plain surface; the outer edges would be misty,
indistinct, or crayon-like. The centre of the image might be represented clear
and sharp on the ground glass, yet this would be far from the case in regard
to the outer portions. This is called spherical aberration, and to it is due the
want of distinctness which is frequently noticed around the edges of pictures
taken in the camera. To secure a camera with a flat, sharp, field, should be
the object of every operator; and, in a measure, this constitutes the great
difference in cameras manufactured in this country.
Spherical aberration is overcome by proper care in the formation of the
lens: “It can be shown upon mathematical data that a lens similar to that
given in the following diagram—one surface of which is a section of an
ellipse, and the other of a circle struck from the furthest of the two foci of
that ellipse—produces no aberration.
“At the earliest period of the employment of the camera obscura, a
double-convex lens was used to produce the image; but this form was soon
abandoned, on account of the spherical aberration so caused. Lenses for the
Page 83
photographic camera are now always ground of a concavo-convex form, or
meniscus, which corresponds more nearly to the accompanying diagram.”
Chromatic Aberration is another difficulty that opticians have to contend
with in the manufacturing of lenses. It will be remembered, that in a former
page (133) a beam of light is decomposed by passing through a glass prism
giving seven distinct colors—red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and
violet.
Now, as has been said before, the dissimilar rays having an unequal
degree of refrangibility, it will be impossible to obtain a focus by the light
passing through a double-convex lens without its being fringed with color.
Its effect will be readily understood by reference to the accompanying cut.
meniscus, which corresponds more nearly to the accompanying diagram.”
Chromatic Aberration is another difficulty that opticians have to contend
with in the manufacturing of lenses. It will be remembered, that in a former
page (133) a beam of light is decomposed by passing through a glass prism
giving seven distinct colors—red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and
violet.
Now, as has been said before, the dissimilar rays having an unequal
degree of refrangibility, it will be impossible to obtain a focus by the light
passing through a double-convex lens without its being fringed with color.
Its effect will be readily understood by reference to the accompanying cut.
Page 84
If L L be a double convex-lens, and R R R parallel rays of white light,
composed of the seven colored rays, each having a different index of
refraction, they cannot be refracted to one and the same point; the red rays,
being the least refrangible, will be bent to r, and the violet rays, being the
most refrangible, to v: the distance v r constitutes the chromatic aberration,
and the circle, of which the diameter is a l, the place or point of mean
refraction, and is called the circle of least aberration. If the rays of the sun
are refracted by means of a lens, and the image received on a screen placed
between C and o, so as to cut the cone L a l L, a luminous circle will be
formed on the paper, only surrounded by a red border, because it is produced
by a section of the cone L a l L, of which the external rays L a L l, are red; if
the screen be moved to the other side of o, the luminous circle will be
bordered with violet, because it will be a section of the cone M a M l, of
which the exterior rays are violet. To avoid the influence of spherical
aberration, and to render the phenomena of coloration more evident, let an
opaque disc be placed over the central portion of the lens, so as to allow the
rays only to pass which are at the edge of the glass; a violet image of the sun
will then be seen at v, red at r, and, finally, images of all the colors of the
spectrum in the intermediate space; consequently, the general image will not
only be confused, but clothed with prismatic colors.”
To overcome the difficulty arising from the chromatic aberration, the
optician has only to employ a combination of lenses of opposite focal length,
and cut from glass possessing different refrangible powers, so that the rays
composed of the seven colored rays, each having a different index of
refraction, they cannot be refracted to one and the same point; the red rays,
being the least refrangible, will be bent to r, and the violet rays, being the
most refrangible, to v: the distance v r constitutes the chromatic aberration,
and the circle, of which the diameter is a l, the place or point of mean
refraction, and is called the circle of least aberration. If the rays of the sun
are refracted by means of a lens, and the image received on a screen placed
between C and o, so as to cut the cone L a l L, a luminous circle will be
formed on the paper, only surrounded by a red border, because it is produced
by a section of the cone L a l L, of which the external rays L a L l, are red; if
the screen be moved to the other side of o, the luminous circle will be
bordered with violet, because it will be a section of the cone M a M l, of
which the exterior rays are violet. To avoid the influence of spherical
aberration, and to render the phenomena of coloration more evident, let an
opaque disc be placed over the central portion of the lens, so as to allow the
rays only to pass which are at the edge of the glass; a violet image of the sun
will then be seen at v, red at r, and, finally, images of all the colors of the
spectrum in the intermediate space; consequently, the general image will not
only be confused, but clothed with prismatic colors.”
To overcome the difficulty arising from the chromatic aberration, the
optician has only to employ a combination of lenses of opposite focal length,
and cut from glass possessing different refrangible powers, so that the rays
Page 85
of light passing through the one are strongly refracted, and in the other are
bent asunder again, reproducing white light.
To the photographer one of the most important features, requiring his
particular attention, is, that he be provided with a good lens. By the remarks
given in the preceding pages, he will be enabled, in a measure, to judge of
some of the difficulties to which he is occasionally subjected. We have in
this country but two or three individuals who are giving their attention to the
manufacture of lenses, and their construction is such, that they are quite free
from the spherical or chromatic aberration.
bent asunder again, reproducing white light.
To the photographer one of the most important features, requiring his
particular attention, is, that he be provided with a good lens. By the remarks
given in the preceding pages, he will be enabled, in a measure, to judge of
some of the difficulties to which he is occasionally subjected. We have in
this country but two or three individuals who are giving their attention to the
manufacture of lenses, and their construction is such, that they are quite free
from the spherical or chromatic aberration.
Page 86
CHAPTER V.
To make Plates for the Daguerreotype—Determining the
Time of Exposure in the Camera—Instantaneous Process for
Producing Daguerreotype—Galvanizing the Daguerreotype
Plate—Silvering Solution—Daguerreotype without Mercury
—Management of Chemicals—Hints and Cautions—
Electrotyping—Crayon Daguerreotypes—Illuminated
Daguerreotypes—Natural Colors in Heliography—
Multiplying Daguerreotypes on one Plate—Deposit in
Gilding—Practical Hints on the Daguerreotype.
TO MAKE PLATES FOR THE
DAGUERREOTYPE.
I do not give the method employed by our regular plate manufacturers;
this is not important, as the operator could not possibly profit by it from the
fact of the great expense of manufacturing. The following will be found
practical:
Procure a well planished copper plate of the required size, and well polish
it, first with pumice stone and water, then with snake stone, jewelers’ rouge.
Plates can be purchased in a high state of preparation from the engravers.
Having prepared the copper-plate, well rub it with salt and water, and then
with the silvering powder. No kind answers better than that used by clock-
makers to silver their dial-plates. It is composed of one part of well washed
chloride of silver, five parts of cream of tartar, and four parts of table salt.
This powder must be kept in a dark vessel, and in a dry place. For a plate six
inches by five, as much of this composition as can be taken up on a shilling
is sufficient. It is to be laid in the centre of the copper, and the figures being
wetted, to be quickly rubbed over every part of the plate, adding
To make Plates for the Daguerreotype—Determining the
Time of Exposure in the Camera—Instantaneous Process for
Producing Daguerreotype—Galvanizing the Daguerreotype
Plate—Silvering Solution—Daguerreotype without Mercury
—Management of Chemicals—Hints and Cautions—
Electrotyping—Crayon Daguerreotypes—Illuminated
Daguerreotypes—Natural Colors in Heliography—
Multiplying Daguerreotypes on one Plate—Deposit in
Gilding—Practical Hints on the Daguerreotype.
TO MAKE PLATES FOR THE
DAGUERREOTYPE.
I do not give the method employed by our regular plate manufacturers;
this is not important, as the operator could not possibly profit by it from the
fact of the great expense of manufacturing. The following will be found
practical:
Procure a well planished copper plate of the required size, and well polish
it, first with pumice stone and water, then with snake stone, jewelers’ rouge.
Plates can be purchased in a high state of preparation from the engravers.
Having prepared the copper-plate, well rub it with salt and water, and then
with the silvering powder. No kind answers better than that used by clock-
makers to silver their dial-plates. It is composed of one part of well washed
chloride of silver, five parts of cream of tartar, and four parts of table salt.
This powder must be kept in a dark vessel, and in a dry place. For a plate six
inches by five, as much of this composition as can be taken up on a shilling
is sufficient. It is to be laid in the centre of the copper, and the figures being
wetted, to be quickly rubbed over every part of the plate, adding
Page 87
occasionally a little damp salt. The copper being covered with the silvering
is to be speedily well washed in water, in which a little soda is dissolved, and
as soon as the surface is of a fine silvery whiteness, it is to be dried with a
very clean warm cloth. In this state the plates may be kept for use. The first
process is to expose the plate to the heat of a spirit flame, until the silvered
surface becomes of a well-defined golden-yellow color; then, when the plate
is cold, take a piece of cotton, dipped in very dilute nitric acid, and rub
lightly over it until the white hue is restored, and dry it with very soft clean
cloths. A weak solution of the hydriodate of potash, in which a small portion
of iodine is dissolved, is now passed over the plate with a wide camel’s hair
brush. The silver is thus converted, over its surface, into an ioduret of silver;
and in this state it is exposed to light, which blackens it. When dry, it is to be
again polished, either with dilute acid or a solution of carbonate of soda, and
afterwards with dry cotton, and the smallest possible portion of prepared
chalk: by this means a surface of the highest polish is produced. The
rationale of this process is, in the first place, the heat applied dries off any
adhering acid, and effects more perfect union between the copper and silver,
so as to enable it to bear the subsequent processes. The first yellow surface
appears to be an oxide of silver with, possibly, a minute quantity of copper in
combination, which being removed leaves a surface chemically pure.
Another Method.—The best and simplest mode with which we are
acquainted is to divide an earthenware vessel with a diaphragm: one side
should be filled with a very dilute solution of sulphuric acid, and the other
with either a solution of ferroprussiate of potash, or muriate of soda,
saturated with chloride of silver. The copper plate, varnished on one side, is
united, by means of a copper wire, with a plate of zinc. The zinc plate being
immersed in the acid, and the copper in the salt, a weak electric current is
generated, which precipitates the silver in a very uniform manner over the
entire surface.
Another Method.—A piece of brass or of polished copper, brass is
preferred, is perfectly planished and its surface made perfectly clean. A
solution of nitrate of silver, so weak that the silver is precipitated slowly, and
a brownish color, on the brass, is laid uniformly over it, “at least three
times,” with a camel’s hair pencil. After each application of the nitrate, the
plate should be rubbed gently in one direction, with moistened bitartrate of
potassa, applied with buff. This coat of silver receives a fine polish from
is to be speedily well washed in water, in which a little soda is dissolved, and
as soon as the surface is of a fine silvery whiteness, it is to be dried with a
very clean warm cloth. In this state the plates may be kept for use. The first
process is to expose the plate to the heat of a spirit flame, until the silvered
surface becomes of a well-defined golden-yellow color; then, when the plate
is cold, take a piece of cotton, dipped in very dilute nitric acid, and rub
lightly over it until the white hue is restored, and dry it with very soft clean
cloths. A weak solution of the hydriodate of potash, in which a small portion
of iodine is dissolved, is now passed over the plate with a wide camel’s hair
brush. The silver is thus converted, over its surface, into an ioduret of silver;
and in this state it is exposed to light, which blackens it. When dry, it is to be
again polished, either with dilute acid or a solution of carbonate of soda, and
afterwards with dry cotton, and the smallest possible portion of prepared
chalk: by this means a surface of the highest polish is produced. The
rationale of this process is, in the first place, the heat applied dries off any
adhering acid, and effects more perfect union between the copper and silver,
so as to enable it to bear the subsequent processes. The first yellow surface
appears to be an oxide of silver with, possibly, a minute quantity of copper in
combination, which being removed leaves a surface chemically pure.
Another Method.—The best and simplest mode with which we are
acquainted is to divide an earthenware vessel with a diaphragm: one side
should be filled with a very dilute solution of sulphuric acid, and the other
with either a solution of ferroprussiate of potash, or muriate of soda,
saturated with chloride of silver. The copper plate, varnished on one side, is
united, by means of a copper wire, with a plate of zinc. The zinc plate being
immersed in the acid, and the copper in the salt, a weak electric current is
generated, which precipitates the silver in a very uniform manner over the
entire surface.
Another Method.—A piece of brass or of polished copper, brass is
preferred, is perfectly planished and its surface made perfectly clean. A
solution of nitrate of silver, so weak that the silver is precipitated slowly, and
a brownish color, on the brass, is laid uniformly over it, “at least three
times,” with a camel’s hair pencil. After each application of the nitrate, the
plate should be rubbed gently in one direction, with moistened bitartrate of
potassa, applied with buff. This coat of silver receives a fine polish from
Page 88
peroxide of iron and buff. Proofs are said to have been taken on it,
comparable with those obtained on French plates.
M. SOLIEL’S PROCESS FOR DETERMINING THE
TIME OF EXPOSURE IN THE CAMERA.
M. Soliel has proposed the use of the chloride of silver to determine the
time required to produce a good impression on the iodated plate in the
camera. His method is to fix at the bottom of a tube, blackened within, a
piece of card, on which chloride of silver, mixed with gum or dextrine, is
spread. The tube thus disposed is turned from the side of the object of which
we wish to take the image, and the time that the chloride of silver takes to
become of a greyish slate color will be the time required for the light of the
camera to produce a good effect on the iodated silver.
INSTANTANEOUS PROCESS FOR PROCURING
DAGUERREOTYPES.
The following method of producing Daguerreotypes has by some been
named as above. Most experienced operators have been long acquainted
with the effect of the vapor of ammonia upon the chemically coated plate. I
will here insert Mr. W. H. Hewett’s plan of proceeding. This gentleman, in
referring to it (published in 1845), says:
“This improvement consists in using the vapor of ammonia, as an object
to accelerate the action of light upon the plate. The effect is produced upon a
simple iodized plate, but still more upon a plate prepared in the ordinary
way, with both iodine and bromine. By this means, the author obtained
impressions instantaneously in the sunshine, and in five to ten seconds in a
moderate light; and he hopes to be able to take moving objects. It can be
applied by exposing the prepared plate over a surface of water, to which a
few drops of ammonia have been added (sufficient to make it smell of
ammonia); or the vapor can be introduced into the camera during the action.
comparable with those obtained on French plates.
M. SOLIEL’S PROCESS FOR DETERMINING THE
TIME OF EXPOSURE IN THE CAMERA.
M. Soliel has proposed the use of the chloride of silver to determine the
time required to produce a good impression on the iodated plate in the
camera. His method is to fix at the bottom of a tube, blackened within, a
piece of card, on which chloride of silver, mixed with gum or dextrine, is
spread. The tube thus disposed is turned from the side of the object of which
we wish to take the image, and the time that the chloride of silver takes to
become of a greyish slate color will be the time required for the light of the
camera to produce a good effect on the iodated silver.
INSTANTANEOUS PROCESS FOR PROCURING
DAGUERREOTYPES.
The following method of producing Daguerreotypes has by some been
named as above. Most experienced operators have been long acquainted
with the effect of the vapor of ammonia upon the chemically coated plate. I
will here insert Mr. W. H. Hewett’s plan of proceeding. This gentleman, in
referring to it (published in 1845), says:
“This improvement consists in using the vapor of ammonia, as an object
to accelerate the action of light upon the plate. The effect is produced upon a
simple iodized plate, but still more upon a plate prepared in the ordinary
way, with both iodine and bromine. By this means, the author obtained
impressions instantaneously in the sunshine, and in five to ten seconds in a
moderate light; and he hopes to be able to take moving objects. It can be
applied by exposing the prepared plate over a surface of water, to which a
few drops of ammonia have been added (sufficient to make it smell of
ammonia); or the vapor can be introduced into the camera during the action.
Page 89
In fact, the presence of ammonia, in the operating-room, appears to have a
good effect, as it also neutralizes the vapors of iodine and bromine that may
be floating about, and which are so detrimental to the influences of light
upon the plate.”
GALVANIZING THE DAGUERREOTYPE PLATE.
In consideration of the importance of galvanized plates, I shall endeavor
to give as plain and concise a manner of manipulation as possible. For some
time it was a question among the operators generally, as to the beneficial
result of electrotyping, the Daguerreotype plate, but for a few years past our
first operators have found it a fact, that a well electro-silvered surface is the
best for producing a portrait by the Daguerreotype.
From my own experiments, I have found that a plate, by being galvanized,
can be rendered more sensitive to the operation of the light in proportion of
one to five, viz.: if a plate as furnished by the market, be cleaned, polished,
coated and exposed in the camera, if the required time to freely develop an
impression be ten seconds, a similar plate prepared in like manner and
galvanized, will produce an equally well-defined image in eight seconds. In
connection with this subject, there is one fact worthy of notice; a plate with a
very heavy coating of pure silver, will not produce an equally developed
image, as a plate with a thinner coating, hence the thin coating, providing it
entirely covers the surface, is the best, and is the one most to be desired. The
experiment is plain and simple. Let the slate receive a heavy or thick coating
by the electrotype, then polish, coat, expose in the usual manner, and the
result will be a flat, ashy, indistinct impression; when, on the other hand, the
thin coating will produce a bright, clear and distinct image, with all the
details delineated.
The style of battery best for the purpose has been, and now is, a question
of dispute among operators; some preferring the Daniell battery to Smee’s.
Some claim the superiority of the first from its uniformity of action; others,
of the latter, for its strength. I consider either good, and for the inexperienced
would prefer the Daniell. This is more simple in its construction, while it has
certainty in action. The more skillful electrotyper would prefer Smee’s, and
this is the one most generally in use. I would remark that the plan of
good effect, as it also neutralizes the vapors of iodine and bromine that may
be floating about, and which are so detrimental to the influences of light
upon the plate.”
GALVANIZING THE DAGUERREOTYPE PLATE.
In consideration of the importance of galvanized plates, I shall endeavor
to give as plain and concise a manner of manipulation as possible. For some
time it was a question among the operators generally, as to the beneficial
result of electrotyping, the Daguerreotype plate, but for a few years past our
first operators have found it a fact, that a well electro-silvered surface is the
best for producing a portrait by the Daguerreotype.
From my own experiments, I have found that a plate, by being galvanized,
can be rendered more sensitive to the operation of the light in proportion of
one to five, viz.: if a plate as furnished by the market, be cleaned, polished,
coated and exposed in the camera, if the required time to freely develop an
impression be ten seconds, a similar plate prepared in like manner and
galvanized, will produce an equally well-defined image in eight seconds. In
connection with this subject, there is one fact worthy of notice; a plate with a
very heavy coating of pure silver, will not produce an equally developed
image, as a plate with a thinner coating, hence the thin coating, providing it
entirely covers the surface, is the best, and is the one most to be desired. The
experiment is plain and simple. Let the slate receive a heavy or thick coating
by the electrotype, then polish, coat, expose in the usual manner, and the
result will be a flat, ashy, indistinct impression; when, on the other hand, the
thin coating will produce a bright, clear and distinct image, with all the
details delineated.
The style of battery best for the purpose has been, and now is, a question
of dispute among operators; some preferring the Daniell battery to Smee’s.
Some claim the superiority of the first from its uniformity of action; others,
of the latter, for its strength. I consider either good, and for the inexperienced
would prefer the Daniell. This is more simple in its construction, while it has
certainty in action. The more skillful electrotyper would prefer Smee’s, and
this is the one most generally in use. I would remark that the plan of
Page 90
galvanizing plates should be followed by every operator, and when once
thoroughly tested, no one will abandon it.
SILVERING SOLUTION.
To any desired quantity of chloride of silver in water add, little by little,
cyanide of potassium, shaking well at each addition, until all the cyanide is
dissolved. Continue this operation, and add the cyanide, until all the
precipitate is taken up and held in solution.
This solution is now ready for the plate-cup. Enough water may be added
to cover any sized plate when held perpendicular in the cup. The strength of
the solution may be kept up by occasionally adding the chloride of silver and
cyanide of potassium. There should alway be a very little excess of the
cyanide.
The plate should be well cleaned and buffed, and the solution well stirred
before it is immersed. Care should be observed to keep the solution clean,
and allow no particle of dust to come in contact with the surface of the plate.
The plate is now to be attached to the pole of the battery.
After remaining a short time, it assumes a blue color; take it out, rinse
freely with pure water, then dry with a spirit lamp, and it is ready for buffing.
Buff and coat in the usual manner. Some operators are in the practice of
immersing the plate in the solution and buffing twice. This additional
silvering is no improvement wherever there has been a proper first coating.
Sometimes the operator is troubled with streaks or scum on the plate. This
may arise from three causes, all of which experience must teach the
experimenter to avoid; first, too great an excess of cyanide in the solution;
second, a lack of silver; third, the current too strong. Another annoyance
arises from the solution being dirty and the dirt collecting on the surface.
When this is the case, the dirt is sure to come in contact with the surface of
the plate as it is plunged into the solution, and the result is a scum that it is
difficult to dispose of. This can be prevented only by frequent filtering. One
thing should always be borne in mind in electrotyping Daguerreotype plates
—that in order to secure a perfectly coated surface, the plate should be
perfectly cleaned. In this point, many who have tried the electrotype process
have failed, attributing their ill success to other than the proper cause.
thoroughly tested, no one will abandon it.
SILVERING SOLUTION.
To any desired quantity of chloride of silver in water add, little by little,
cyanide of potassium, shaking well at each addition, until all the cyanide is
dissolved. Continue this operation, and add the cyanide, until all the
precipitate is taken up and held in solution.
This solution is now ready for the plate-cup. Enough water may be added
to cover any sized plate when held perpendicular in the cup. The strength of
the solution may be kept up by occasionally adding the chloride of silver and
cyanide of potassium. There should alway be a very little excess of the
cyanide.
The plate should be well cleaned and buffed, and the solution well stirred
before it is immersed. Care should be observed to keep the solution clean,
and allow no particle of dust to come in contact with the surface of the plate.
The plate is now to be attached to the pole of the battery.
After remaining a short time, it assumes a blue color; take it out, rinse
freely with pure water, then dry with a spirit lamp, and it is ready for buffing.
Buff and coat in the usual manner. Some operators are in the practice of
immersing the plate in the solution and buffing twice. This additional
silvering is no improvement wherever there has been a proper first coating.
Sometimes the operator is troubled with streaks or scum on the plate. This
may arise from three causes, all of which experience must teach the
experimenter to avoid; first, too great an excess of cyanide in the solution;
second, a lack of silver; third, the current too strong. Another annoyance
arises from the solution being dirty and the dirt collecting on the surface.
When this is the case, the dirt is sure to come in contact with the surface of
the plate as it is plunged into the solution, and the result is a scum that it is
difficult to dispose of. This can be prevented only by frequent filtering. One
thing should always be borne in mind in electrotyping Daguerreotype plates
—that in order to secure a perfectly coated surface, the plate should be
perfectly cleaned. In this point, many who have tried the electrotype process
have failed, attributing their ill success to other than the proper cause.
Page 91
DAGUERREOTYPES WITHOUT MERCURY.
The following process possesses some interest, and is worthy a trial from
operators. M. Natterer, of Vienna, discovered a process for obtaining proofs
on iodized plates with the chloride of sulphur, without the use of mercury. A
plate of silver is iodized in the usual manner, and then placed on the top of a
vessel six or eight inches high, having at the bottom, in a small cup, a few
drops of chloride of sulphur; it should remain exposed to the action of the
vapor until the sombre yellow color is changed to a red, after which it is
brought to a focus in the camera, where it is exposed to the light in the
camera, for about the time necessary to produce an ordinary daguerreotype.
The plate is then taken out and examined in the camera by the light of a
candle. It often occurs that no trace of the image is as yet perceptible, but if
the plate is heated by placing over a spirit lamp the unprepared side, or if left
for some time in the dark, or, lastly, if exposed only a few seconds to a weak,
dimmed light, the positive picture then appears with all its shades. Of these
three modes of bringing out the image, the second is superior to the others.
MANAGEMENT OF CHEMICALS.
It is necessary, first of all, to know that you have a chemical which is
capable of producing good results when in skillful hands. For this reason it is
best to prepare your own quick, after some formula which is known to be
good. Those quick-stuffs which contain chloride of iodine are noted for their
depth of tone while they probably operate with less uniformity than those
which are destitute of it. For operating under ordinary circumstances,
especially with an inferior light, probably no accelerator is more quick and
sure than Wolcott’s. It also produces a very fine, white pleasing picture,
though lacking that depth of impression so much to be desired. The dry
quick operates with surety, and its use is simple and easy, producing an
impression much like Wolcott’s. For those having a good and permanent
light, however, we would recommend a chemical giving more body to the
impression.
There is a class of accelerators called sensitives, claiming to work in from
three to ten seconds, which, however, will be found very little, if any, more
The following process possesses some interest, and is worthy a trial from
operators. M. Natterer, of Vienna, discovered a process for obtaining proofs
on iodized plates with the chloride of sulphur, without the use of mercury. A
plate of silver is iodized in the usual manner, and then placed on the top of a
vessel six or eight inches high, having at the bottom, in a small cup, a few
drops of chloride of sulphur; it should remain exposed to the action of the
vapor until the sombre yellow color is changed to a red, after which it is
brought to a focus in the camera, where it is exposed to the light in the
camera, for about the time necessary to produce an ordinary daguerreotype.
The plate is then taken out and examined in the camera by the light of a
candle. It often occurs that no trace of the image is as yet perceptible, but if
the plate is heated by placing over a spirit lamp the unprepared side, or if left
for some time in the dark, or, lastly, if exposed only a few seconds to a weak,
dimmed light, the positive picture then appears with all its shades. Of these
three modes of bringing out the image, the second is superior to the others.
MANAGEMENT OF CHEMICALS.
It is necessary, first of all, to know that you have a chemical which is
capable of producing good results when in skillful hands. For this reason it is
best to prepare your own quick, after some formula which is known to be
good. Those quick-stuffs which contain chloride of iodine are noted for their
depth of tone while they probably operate with less uniformity than those
which are destitute of it. For operating under ordinary circumstances,
especially with an inferior light, probably no accelerator is more quick and
sure than Wolcott’s. It also produces a very fine, white pleasing picture,
though lacking that depth of impression so much to be desired. The dry
quick operates with surety, and its use is simple and easy, producing an
impression much like Wolcott’s. For those having a good and permanent
light, however, we would recommend a chemical giving more body to the
impression.
There is a class of accelerators called sensitives, claiming to work in from
three to ten seconds, which, however, will be found very little, if any, more
Page 92
sensitive than this. We frequently work it with the ordinary coating in twelve
and fifteen seconds. The manner in which the sensitives are worked is by
coating very light. In this way, a flat, shallow picture is obtained in a few
seconds; and the same can be done with any of the more volatile quicks.
It is a fact not generally known, that a plate coated in a light chemical
room is more sensitive than when coated in darkness. By admitting a free,
uniform light, and exposing the plate to it a few seconds after coating, then
timing short in the camera, a very light, clear impression is obtained. The
time in the camera is reduced in proportion to the previous action of light.
The shades, of course, are destroyed, and the tone injured; still, for taking
children, we have succeeded better by this method than by the use of
“sensitives.” The discovery of this principle was accidental, while operating
where the direct ray s of the sun, entering the window just before sunset, fell
on the curtain of our dark room, rendering it very light within.
The selection of iodine is not unimportant. Reject, at once, that which has
anything like a dull, black, greasy appearance; and select that which is in
beautiful large crystalline scales, of a purple color, and brilliant steel lustre.
Solarization, and general blueness of all the light parts of the picture, were
formerly great obstacles to success, though now scarcely thought of by first-
class artists. Beginners in the art, however, are still apt to meet with this
difficulty. It is occasioned by dampness in the iodine box, which causes the
plate to become coated with a hydro-iodide of silver, instead of the iodide.
The remedy is in drying your iodine. If in summer, you can open your box
and set it in sunshine a few minutes; or if in winter, set it under a stove a
short time. The true method, however, is to dry it by means of the chloride of
calcium. It has such a remarkable affinity for water, that a small fragment
placed in the open air, even in the dryest weather, soon becomes dissolved.
Take one or two ounces of this chemical, heat it in the drying bath, or in a
hot stove, to perfect dryness; place it in a small glass toy dish, or large watch
crystal, and set it in the centre of your iodine box. Take this out and heat to
dryness every morning. Adopt this process, and with your mercury at a high
temperature, you will never be troubled with blue pictures.
Young operators are apt to impute all want of success in operating to their
chemicals, even though the cause is quite as likely to be elsewhere. Failure is
quite likely to occur from dampness in the buffs, or in the polish; it is
therefore necessary to be constantly on the guard in this quarter. With a view
and fifteen seconds. The manner in which the sensitives are worked is by
coating very light. In this way, a flat, shallow picture is obtained in a few
seconds; and the same can be done with any of the more volatile quicks.
It is a fact not generally known, that a plate coated in a light chemical
room is more sensitive than when coated in darkness. By admitting a free,
uniform light, and exposing the plate to it a few seconds after coating, then
timing short in the camera, a very light, clear impression is obtained. The
time in the camera is reduced in proportion to the previous action of light.
The shades, of course, are destroyed, and the tone injured; still, for taking
children, we have succeeded better by this method than by the use of
“sensitives.” The discovery of this principle was accidental, while operating
where the direct ray s of the sun, entering the window just before sunset, fell
on the curtain of our dark room, rendering it very light within.
The selection of iodine is not unimportant. Reject, at once, that which has
anything like a dull, black, greasy appearance; and select that which is in
beautiful large crystalline scales, of a purple color, and brilliant steel lustre.
Solarization, and general blueness of all the light parts of the picture, were
formerly great obstacles to success, though now scarcely thought of by first-
class artists. Beginners in the art, however, are still apt to meet with this
difficulty. It is occasioned by dampness in the iodine box, which causes the
plate to become coated with a hydro-iodide of silver, instead of the iodide.
The remedy is in drying your iodine. If in summer, you can open your box
and set it in sunshine a few minutes; or if in winter, set it under a stove a
short time. The true method, however, is to dry it by means of the chloride of
calcium. It has such a remarkable affinity for water, that a small fragment
placed in the open air, even in the dryest weather, soon becomes dissolved.
Take one or two ounces of this chemical, heat it in the drying bath, or in a
hot stove, to perfect dryness; place it in a small glass toy dish, or large watch
crystal, and set it in the centre of your iodine box. Take this out and heat to
dryness every morning. Adopt this process, and with your mercury at a high
temperature, you will never be troubled with blue pictures.
Young operators are apt to impute all want of success in operating to their
chemicals, even though the cause is quite as likely to be elsewhere. Failure is
quite likely to occur from dampness in the buffs, or in the polish; it is
therefore necessary to be constantly on the guard in this quarter. With a view
Page 93
to this, always scrape your buffs with a dull knife, or with one blade of your
shears, the first thing in the morning, and after brushing them thoroughly,
dry them, either in the sun, by a stove, or in the buff-dryer. It is equally
important that the polish and the brush should be kept dry.
Want of success may arise from vapors of iodine or bromine in the camera
box, mercury bath, or even in the buffs. It is incredible how small a quantity
of these vapors will affect the effect of light when coming in contact with the
plate, after or during the exposure in the camera. It is therefore necessary to
be cautious not to mix chemicals, nor open your boxes or bottles in your
room, but take them out to do it. Never hurry the operation through from
lack of confidence in the result. The fact of anything being out of order,
forms no excuse for slighting the process. If unsuccessful, do not pursue the
same course every trial, but vary with a view to detect the cause of the
difficulty.
In case of a long series of failures, institute a regular course of
investigation, after this manner, commencing where the trouble is most
likely to occur:
1. Are the plates well cleaned?
2. Is the iodine dry? If the impressions come out blue, you may rest
assured it is not. Take out the iodine, wipe and dry the box, and dry the
calcium.
3. Is the quick battery of the right strength? If dry, it must change the plate
in from six to fifteen seconds. If any of the chloride of iodine class, it may
vary from five seconds to a minute. Begin by coating light, and increase on
each trial, observing the effect. If the light side of the picture seems loth to
come out, and shows no contrast with the dark side, it is to be inferred that
your battery is too strong, and must be reduced with water or set out in the
open air for a few minutes, with the lid off. If working an old battery, never
renew very strong, or it will work dark and heavy. A battery, to work well,
should be gradually losing strength, but never gaining. An old battery,
however, may be quickened up and made to work well for some time, by
adding five of six drops of sulphuric acid, repeating the quantity as often as
necessary, providing always that acid be not used in manufacturing the
quick.
4. Have the plates lost their sensitiveness by being many times exposed to
mercury? Clean and burn them; but if French plates, burn light, or you spoil
shears, the first thing in the morning, and after brushing them thoroughly,
dry them, either in the sun, by a stove, or in the buff-dryer. It is equally
important that the polish and the brush should be kept dry.
Want of success may arise from vapors of iodine or bromine in the camera
box, mercury bath, or even in the buffs. It is incredible how small a quantity
of these vapors will affect the effect of light when coming in contact with the
plate, after or during the exposure in the camera. It is therefore necessary to
be cautious not to mix chemicals, nor open your boxes or bottles in your
room, but take them out to do it. Never hurry the operation through from
lack of confidence in the result. The fact of anything being out of order,
forms no excuse for slighting the process. If unsuccessful, do not pursue the
same course every trial, but vary with a view to detect the cause of the
difficulty.
In case of a long series of failures, institute a regular course of
investigation, after this manner, commencing where the trouble is most
likely to occur:
1. Are the plates well cleaned?
2. Is the iodine dry? If the impressions come out blue, you may rest
assured it is not. Take out the iodine, wipe and dry the box, and dry the
calcium.
3. Is the quick battery of the right strength? If dry, it must change the plate
in from six to fifteen seconds. If any of the chloride of iodine class, it may
vary from five seconds to a minute. Begin by coating light, and increase on
each trial, observing the effect. If the light side of the picture seems loth to
come out, and shows no contrast with the dark side, it is to be inferred that
your battery is too strong, and must be reduced with water or set out in the
open air for a few minutes, with the lid off. If working an old battery, never
renew very strong, or it will work dark and heavy. A battery, to work well,
should be gradually losing strength, but never gaining. An old battery,
however, may be quickened up and made to work well for some time, by
adding five of six drops of sulphuric acid, repeating the quantity as often as
necessary, providing always that acid be not used in manufacturing the
quick.
4. Have the plates lost their sensitiveness by being many times exposed to
mercury? Clean and burn them; but if French plates, burn light, or you spoil
Page 94
them.
5. Are the buff s dry and clean? Examine the plate critically after buffing
to detect any appearance of scum or film on the surface. If so, the longer you
buff the more it shows. Scrape and dry the buffs thoroughly.
6. Is the mercury free from scum and dirt? If not, filter. Is it also far
enough from the coating boxes? Should be at least three feet, and kept
covered.
7. Is the mercury sufficiently heated? This is important. Long exposure,
however, will answer the same purpose.
8. Are your lenses clean, and in proper place?
9. Are the tablets in focus with the ground-glass? If you can attribute the
failure to none of these, mix a new box of some other kind of quick, say the
dry, for instance. If you fail in the same manner here, take time, wash your
buffs, overhaul all the chemicals, and start anew. Do not be discouraged.
There is no day so dark but that the sun will shine again. We will close
with this brief summary of advice:
Clean your plates. Keep everything dry. Keep the mercury hot. Follow
these instructions carefully, and you must succeed.
HINTS AND CAUTIONS.
First of all, cleanliness should be observed. When there is dust or dirt
about your room, particularly about the work-bench, failures will be
frequent; for the smallest particles of rotten-stone, when allowed to come in
contact with the buffs, will produce scratches on the surface of the plate,
which very much injures the operation, and often causes failures.
Dust flying about the room is injurious, if allowed to fall on the plate,
either before or after it has been coated, as it causes black spots which
cannot be removed.
The polished plate should not be allowed to come in contact with a strong
current of air, for it tends to oxidize the surface. Breathing on the surface
should also be avoided, for the same reason.
5. Are the buff s dry and clean? Examine the plate critically after buffing
to detect any appearance of scum or film on the surface. If so, the longer you
buff the more it shows. Scrape and dry the buffs thoroughly.
6. Is the mercury free from scum and dirt? If not, filter. Is it also far
enough from the coating boxes? Should be at least three feet, and kept
covered.
7. Is the mercury sufficiently heated? This is important. Long exposure,
however, will answer the same purpose.
8. Are your lenses clean, and in proper place?
9. Are the tablets in focus with the ground-glass? If you can attribute the
failure to none of these, mix a new box of some other kind of quick, say the
dry, for instance. If you fail in the same manner here, take time, wash your
buffs, overhaul all the chemicals, and start anew. Do not be discouraged.
There is no day so dark but that the sun will shine again. We will close
with this brief summary of advice:
Clean your plates. Keep everything dry. Keep the mercury hot. Follow
these instructions carefully, and you must succeed.
HINTS AND CAUTIONS.
First of all, cleanliness should be observed. When there is dust or dirt
about your room, particularly about the work-bench, failures will be
frequent; for the smallest particles of rotten-stone, when allowed to come in
contact with the buffs, will produce scratches on the surface of the plate,
which very much injures the operation, and often causes failures.
Dust flying about the room is injurious, if allowed to fall on the plate,
either before or after it has been coated, as it causes black spots which
cannot be removed.
The polished plate should not be allowed to come in contact with a strong
current of air, for it tends to oxidize the surface. Breathing on the surface
should also be avoided, for the same reason.
Page 95
The plate should, in all cases, be buffed immediately before using, and not
allowed to stand any length of time. It should be held with the polished face
downward.
It is always best that the plate should be of the same temperature of the
atmosphere in the room.
Keep the camera and mercury-bath perfectly free from the vapors of
iodine and bromine; for the presence of the slightest degree of either of the
above will injure the impression in no small degree. As a preventive, let the
camera be exposed to the sun or fire for a few minutes in the morning.
Filter your mercury often, to keep the surface free from film and dust.
The hyposulphite solution should be filtered through sponge every time it
is used.
The direct rays of light must not enter the camera in conjunction with
those reflected from the object; or the picture will be veiled, and the color of
the plate changed to a thick green.
If the plate be iodized only to a light-yellow, the result might be of a
bluish or grey tinge: and this is generally the case, when the quick is new
and strong, and there is an excess of it on the plate, and yet not enough to
form the bromide iodide of silver; in which case it would wholly spoil the
impression.
Your iodine will be found to operate more successfully, when the time
required for coating the plate does not fall short of fifteen seconds, or exceed
one minute.
Too quick coating can be avoided by using less iodine in your box. In the
summer months, when the weather is 80 deg. and over, one quarter of an
ounce, or even less, will work to advantage.
ELECTROTYPING.
I am indebted to Mr. J. H. Fitzgibbons for the following process, which he
employed in producing the excellent specimens he exhibited at the Crystal
Palace:
“I shall endeavor to lay down in as comprehensive a manner as possible
the method by which I have been enabled to produce the most satisfactory
allowed to stand any length of time. It should be held with the polished face
downward.
It is always best that the plate should be of the same temperature of the
atmosphere in the room.
Keep the camera and mercury-bath perfectly free from the vapors of
iodine and bromine; for the presence of the slightest degree of either of the
above will injure the impression in no small degree. As a preventive, let the
camera be exposed to the sun or fire for a few minutes in the morning.
Filter your mercury often, to keep the surface free from film and dust.
The hyposulphite solution should be filtered through sponge every time it
is used.
The direct rays of light must not enter the camera in conjunction with
those reflected from the object; or the picture will be veiled, and the color of
the plate changed to a thick green.
If the plate be iodized only to a light-yellow, the result might be of a
bluish or grey tinge: and this is generally the case, when the quick is new
and strong, and there is an excess of it on the plate, and yet not enough to
form the bromide iodide of silver; in which case it would wholly spoil the
impression.
Your iodine will be found to operate more successfully, when the time
required for coating the plate does not fall short of fifteen seconds, or exceed
one minute.
Too quick coating can be avoided by using less iodine in your box. In the
summer months, when the weather is 80 deg. and over, one quarter of an
ounce, or even less, will work to advantage.
ELECTROTYPING.
I am indebted to Mr. J. H. Fitzgibbons for the following process, which he
employed in producing the excellent specimens he exhibited at the Crystal
Palace:
“I shall endeavor to lay down in as comprehensive a manner as possible
the method by which I have been enabled to produce the most satisfactory
Page 96
results. I use a Smee’s battery (another kind will do). After filling the cell, of
common size, nearly full with water; add about quarter of an ounce of
sulphuric acid. Mix this well, and let it stand for about three hours, or until
the action of the battery becomes weak, when it is in order to work with a
very uniform action. Put one pound of sulphate of copper in one quart of
water; stir it until the sulphate of copper is all dissolved, and then add one
half ounce of sulphuric acid and a quarter of an ounce of nitric acid. This
solution, well mixed, should be filtered, and it is ready for use. It is very
important that the solution should be kept clean, clear, and free from all
foreign substance. The above quantity of this solution will be found
sufficient for electrotyping a dozen of the sixth-size plates. When it is
required to be strengthened, it is only necessary to add a little of the sulphate
of copper.
“With the battery prepared as above, and the solution of sulphate of
copper in a vessel of proper dimensions to receive your plate, connect the
galvanic current, and immerse the impressioned plate, letting it remain until
a thin film of copper has been formed, then the battery can be strengthened,
and the impression will be of sufficient thickness to be removed in from
eight to twelve hours. An old Daguerreotype plate attached to the opposite
pole of the battery (copper side towards the face of the plate to be
electrotyped), will answer the same purpose as the silver-plate.
“The great difficulty in taking an electrotype impression, and preserving
the original, has been attributed to the battery being too powerful. I am led to
believe from practice that the principal difficulty has been in the
Daguerreotype plate itself, for if we use an impression that has been taken
but a few days, and taken in the usual way, we will find it difficult to
succeed without spoiling both the copy and original, and so also with an old
impression.
“I have found the most certain method to be as follows:—Coat the
Daguerreotype plate as usual, except use less of the accelerators, the
proportion of iodine coating being greater, of course the time of exposure in
the camera will be lengthened. Mercurialize it at about a temperature
requiring to develop the image, from six to eight minutes, at least. Gilding
the Daguerreotype has much to do towards producing a good electrotype
copy. This should be done by applying a little heat, and gilding very slowly,
giving a coating of gold with the greatest possible uniformity. By this
method, I have been enabled to produce any number of proofs. I have
common size, nearly full with water; add about quarter of an ounce of
sulphuric acid. Mix this well, and let it stand for about three hours, or until
the action of the battery becomes weak, when it is in order to work with a
very uniform action. Put one pound of sulphate of copper in one quart of
water; stir it until the sulphate of copper is all dissolved, and then add one
half ounce of sulphuric acid and a quarter of an ounce of nitric acid. This
solution, well mixed, should be filtered, and it is ready for use. It is very
important that the solution should be kept clean, clear, and free from all
foreign substance. The above quantity of this solution will be found
sufficient for electrotyping a dozen of the sixth-size plates. When it is
required to be strengthened, it is only necessary to add a little of the sulphate
of copper.
“With the battery prepared as above, and the solution of sulphate of
copper in a vessel of proper dimensions to receive your plate, connect the
galvanic current, and immerse the impressioned plate, letting it remain until
a thin film of copper has been formed, then the battery can be strengthened,
and the impression will be of sufficient thickness to be removed in from
eight to twelve hours. An old Daguerreotype plate attached to the opposite
pole of the battery (copper side towards the face of the plate to be
electrotyped), will answer the same purpose as the silver-plate.
“The great difficulty in taking an electrotype impression, and preserving
the original, has been attributed to the battery being too powerful. I am led to
believe from practice that the principal difficulty has been in the
Daguerreotype plate itself, for if we use an impression that has been taken
but a few days, and taken in the usual way, we will find it difficult to
succeed without spoiling both the copy and original, and so also with an old
impression.
“I have found the most certain method to be as follows:—Coat the
Daguerreotype plate as usual, except use less of the accelerators, the
proportion of iodine coating being greater, of course the time of exposure in
the camera will be lengthened. Mercurialize it at about a temperature
requiring to develop the image, from six to eight minutes, at least. Gilding
the Daguerreotype has much to do towards producing a good electrotype
copy. This should be done by applying a little heat, and gilding very slowly,
giving a coating of gold with the greatest possible uniformity. By this
method, I have been enabled to produce any number of proofs. I have
Page 97
produced a dozen from one impression, and it remains as perfect as when
first taken.
“By a little judgment and care the operator will be enabled to produce the
electrotype copy of the Daguerreotype plate without any difficulty. The
electrotype copy should be immediately put under a glass and sealed in the
same manner as the ordinary Daguerreotype.”
CRAYON DAGUERREOTYPES.
This process is patented in the United States, by J. A. Whipple, of Boston,
and of course no honorable person will use it for his own benefit without
purchasing a right.
A white back-ground is generally employed, the object being to blur the
lower portion of the plate, leaving the head of the subject in relief. Every
Daguerreotypist is familiar with the fact that a motion of any body between
the camera and the sitter will cause a “blur.” Cut a piece of thin paper and
scallop it, making a semicircle. This is kept straight by means of a wire
frame, and it is to be moved in front of the lower part of the body of the
sitter during the time of exposure of the plate in the camera. Develop over
mercury as usual, and the result will be a crayon Daguerreotype.
Another method is to have a wheel with a hole cut through it of a diameter
of about 12 inches. This hole is so cut as to leave teeth resembling those of a
large saw. This wheel is so arranged that it can be turned around, which
should be done during the time of exposure in the camera. It must be placed
between the camera and the sitter, and at such a distance from the camera as
to allow such proportion of the body of the sitter be seen upon the ground-
glass as is desired. It will be readily seen that by turning this wheel during
the operation will produce the same result as the paper being moved in the
other method. The teeth make the “blur.” The side of the wheel towards the
camera may be black, by which means the result will be a dark instead of a
light border.
ILLUMINATED DAGUERREOTYPES.
first taken.
“By a little judgment and care the operator will be enabled to produce the
electrotype copy of the Daguerreotype plate without any difficulty. The
electrotype copy should be immediately put under a glass and sealed in the
same manner as the ordinary Daguerreotype.”
CRAYON DAGUERREOTYPES.
This process is patented in the United States, by J. A. Whipple, of Boston,
and of course no honorable person will use it for his own benefit without
purchasing a right.
A white back-ground is generally employed, the object being to blur the
lower portion of the plate, leaving the head of the subject in relief. Every
Daguerreotypist is familiar with the fact that a motion of any body between
the camera and the sitter will cause a “blur.” Cut a piece of thin paper and
scallop it, making a semicircle. This is kept straight by means of a wire
frame, and it is to be moved in front of the lower part of the body of the
sitter during the time of exposure of the plate in the camera. Develop over
mercury as usual, and the result will be a crayon Daguerreotype.
Another method is to have a wheel with a hole cut through it of a diameter
of about 12 inches. This hole is so cut as to leave teeth resembling those of a
large saw. This wheel is so arranged that it can be turned around, which
should be done during the time of exposure in the camera. It must be placed
between the camera and the sitter, and at such a distance from the camera as
to allow such proportion of the body of the sitter be seen upon the ground-
glass as is desired. It will be readily seen that by turning this wheel during
the operation will produce the same result as the paper being moved in the
other method. The teeth make the “blur.” The side of the wheel towards the
camera may be black, by which means the result will be a dark instead of a
light border.
ILLUMINATED DAGUERREOTYPES.
Page 98
This process is also patented, and the remarks on the preceding subject
will apply in this case. The plate is prepared and exposed as in the usual
method of the Daguerreotype. A white back-ground is employed. Let the
head of the sitter come in the middle of the plate, and before exposing it to
the vapors of mercury, put a small mat or diaphragm, having a small hole
through it, over or directly on the surface of the plate. This diaphragm
should be bevelled, and the bevel should be towards the surface of the plate;
this, in order to prevent too sharp a line on the impression. It will be readily
seen that if an impressioned plate so covered is placed over the mercury, it
will be developed on such portions only as are exposed. The principle is so
familiar that further explanations are unnecessary.
NATURAL COLORS IN HELIOGRAPHY.
This subject is worthy the attention of every operator. The following
process is so plain and easy of trial that any Daguerreotypist can try it. This
is as given by Mr. James Campbell, and was published in Humphrey’s
Journal of the Daguerreotype and Photographic Arts, vol. 5, page 11. Mr.
Campbell has done much to further the process announced by M. Neipce,
and his experiments have proved highly successful.
The following is submitted as worthy of trial:
“The proper preparation of the chloridated plate, to enable it to receive
colored impressions is an object of the first importance to those wishing to
experiment on it, and consequently requires particular notice. The plate may
be prepared by making it the positive pole of a battery, and letting it at the
same time be immersed in chlorine water. The negative pole should be a slip
of platinum. All the colors may be produced from a plate so prepared if the
chlorine and water are in the right proportions; but generally one color or the
other predominates, according to the amount of chlorine in the liquid. By
adding the chlorides of strontian, uranium, potassium, sodium, iron, or
copper to the liquid, various effects may be produced, and these bodies will
be found to produce the same color on the plate that their flame gives to
alcohol.
“The honor of this discovery is due to M. Neipce. Copper gives a
variegated flame; hence many colors may be impressed on a plate prepared
will apply in this case. The plate is prepared and exposed as in the usual
method of the Daguerreotype. A white back-ground is employed. Let the
head of the sitter come in the middle of the plate, and before exposing it to
the vapors of mercury, put a small mat or diaphragm, having a small hole
through it, over or directly on the surface of the plate. This diaphragm
should be bevelled, and the bevel should be towards the surface of the plate;
this, in order to prevent too sharp a line on the impression. It will be readily
seen that if an impressioned plate so covered is placed over the mercury, it
will be developed on such portions only as are exposed. The principle is so
familiar that further explanations are unnecessary.
NATURAL COLORS IN HELIOGRAPHY.
This subject is worthy the attention of every operator. The following
process is so plain and easy of trial that any Daguerreotypist can try it. This
is as given by Mr. James Campbell, and was published in Humphrey’s
Journal of the Daguerreotype and Photographic Arts, vol. 5, page 11. Mr.
Campbell has done much to further the process announced by M. Neipce,
and his experiments have proved highly successful.
The following is submitted as worthy of trial:
“The proper preparation of the chloridated plate, to enable it to receive
colored impressions is an object of the first importance to those wishing to
experiment on it, and consequently requires particular notice. The plate may
be prepared by making it the positive pole of a battery, and letting it at the
same time be immersed in chlorine water. The negative pole should be a slip
of platinum. All the colors may be produced from a plate so prepared if the
chlorine and water are in the right proportions; but generally one color or the
other predominates, according to the amount of chlorine in the liquid. By
adding the chlorides of strontian, uranium, potassium, sodium, iron, or
copper to the liquid, various effects may be produced, and these bodies will
be found to produce the same color on the plate that their flame gives to
alcohol.
“The honor of this discovery is due to M. Neipce. Copper gives a
variegated flame; hence many colors may be impressed on a plate prepared
Page 99
with a solution of its chloride.
“M. Neipce recommends a solution of the mixed chlorides of copper and
iron, and it is with these, that I have been most successful. As the chlorides
of copper and iron are not much used in the arts, they are not generally found
for sale in the shops; and it may be well to furnish those not much versed in
chemistry with an easy method of preparing them.
“They may be made directly from either metal by dissolving it in
hydrochloric acid; but they may be formed by a cheaper method, and by
which also the acid fumes are avoided.
“Sulphate of iron or copper, or both together, may be dissolved in water
and then neutralized with common crude potash, or its carbonate or
bicarbonate—known commonly as pearl ash and saleratus. If either of the
latter be used, there will be formed sulphate of potash and a carbonate of the
metal used, and there will also be a considerable effervescence of carbonic
acid, which will, if care is not taken, cause the mixture to run over the
vessel. After the copper or iron salt is neutralized, which is known by its
ceasing to effervesce, the carbonate of the metal will settle slowly, and will
at first nearly fill the vessel. The supernatant fluid, which is sulphate of
potash in solution, may now be carefully poured off, and its place filled with
water; this operation should be repeated several times until the water which
passes off is tasteless. The carbonate of the metal rapidly changes to an
oxide by contact with the air, and it will generally be found, when it is
sufficiently washed, that it is at least half oxide. On adding hydrochloric acid
cautiously to the mixture, a chloric of the metal will be formed, and carbonic
acid will be evolved from the remaining carbonate. The chloride formed is
soluble; but as there are two chlorides of these metals, and we wish to
produce the one which contains the most chlorine, it is best to add the acid
cautiously until the solution is decidedly acid. After filtering the solution, it
is fit for use; and it should be preserved in well-stoppered bottles. The water
used should be rain or distilled water.
“About one part of the mixed chlorides should be used to three or four of
water.
“The battery may be either Smee’s, Daniell’s, or Grove’s; if of either of
the former, it should be of two series; if of the latter, one cup is sufficient.
“The plate on being immersed in the liquid, almost instantly takes a violet
color. It should be allowed to remain from two to five minutes, according to
“M. Neipce recommends a solution of the mixed chlorides of copper and
iron, and it is with these, that I have been most successful. As the chlorides
of copper and iron are not much used in the arts, they are not generally found
for sale in the shops; and it may be well to furnish those not much versed in
chemistry with an easy method of preparing them.
“They may be made directly from either metal by dissolving it in
hydrochloric acid; but they may be formed by a cheaper method, and by
which also the acid fumes are avoided.
“Sulphate of iron or copper, or both together, may be dissolved in water
and then neutralized with common crude potash, or its carbonate or
bicarbonate—known commonly as pearl ash and saleratus. If either of the
latter be used, there will be formed sulphate of potash and a carbonate of the
metal used, and there will also be a considerable effervescence of carbonic
acid, which will, if care is not taken, cause the mixture to run over the
vessel. After the copper or iron salt is neutralized, which is known by its
ceasing to effervesce, the carbonate of the metal will settle slowly, and will
at first nearly fill the vessel. The supernatant fluid, which is sulphate of
potash in solution, may now be carefully poured off, and its place filled with
water; this operation should be repeated several times until the water which
passes off is tasteless. The carbonate of the metal rapidly changes to an
oxide by contact with the air, and it will generally be found, when it is
sufficiently washed, that it is at least half oxide. On adding hydrochloric acid
cautiously to the mixture, a chloric of the metal will be formed, and carbonic
acid will be evolved from the remaining carbonate. The chloride formed is
soluble; but as there are two chlorides of these metals, and we wish to
produce the one which contains the most chlorine, it is best to add the acid
cautiously until the solution is decidedly acid. After filtering the solution, it
is fit for use; and it should be preserved in well-stoppered bottles. The water
used should be rain or distilled water.
“About one part of the mixed chlorides should be used to three or four of
water.
“The battery may be either Smee’s, Daniell’s, or Grove’s; if of either of
the former, it should be of two series; if of the latter, one cup is sufficient.
“The plate on being immersed in the liquid, almost instantly takes a violet
color. It should be allowed to remain from two to five minutes, according to
Page 100
the strength of the battery, and until it becomes nearly black. It should now
be carefully washed, and afterwards heated over a spirit lamp until it takes a
cherry-red color, and it is then ready for exposure in the camera. Before
speaking of exposing the plate, it may be well to speak of some difficulties
which the inexperienced operator may find in preparing it. If the battery is
not in good order, and a sufficient current is not passed through the solution,
the plate will become coated—and apparently almost as well as when the
battery is working well—but on exposure it will give a negative picture, and
but little colored; while if the battery is in good order, the impression is
invariably positive.
“Sometimes on heating the plate after washing, the surface is covered with
spots or assumes a variegated appearance. This indicates that the solution is
impure, or that the plate have not been thoroughly washed and are still
contaminated with the soluble chlorides which are contained in the solution.
“From the fact that the plate if prepared with positive electricity gives a
positive picture, while it prepared otherwise it gives a negative, it is evident
that electricity plays an important part in this process. The same is true to
some extent with the compounds formed with iodine, bromine, and fluorine.
“On heating the plate, the brown coating of chloride melts into a
translucent enamel, and the heat should be withdrawn when a cherry-red
color is produced. It the heat is continued longer, the plate assumes a lighter
color, and becomes less sensitive; and the enamel will finally scale off. To
produce a picture by the ordinary process of M. Neipce, unaccelerated, it
should be exposed for from three to five hours to sunlight in the camera,
though pictures may be procured by contact, in from fifteen to thirty
minutes.”
MULTIPLYING DAGUERREOTYPES ON ONE
PLATE.
I have produced some interesting specimens of the Daguerreotypic art, by
exposing in the camera only a portion of the sensitive plate to the action of
light. When on the exposed portion an image is formed, then taking the
tablet into the dark room, change ends and expose the sensitive portion, and
be carefully washed, and afterwards heated over a spirit lamp until it takes a
cherry-red color, and it is then ready for exposure in the camera. Before
speaking of exposing the plate, it may be well to speak of some difficulties
which the inexperienced operator may find in preparing it. If the battery is
not in good order, and a sufficient current is not passed through the solution,
the plate will become coated—and apparently almost as well as when the
battery is working well—but on exposure it will give a negative picture, and
but little colored; while if the battery is in good order, the impression is
invariably positive.
“Sometimes on heating the plate after washing, the surface is covered with
spots or assumes a variegated appearance. This indicates that the solution is
impure, or that the plate have not been thoroughly washed and are still
contaminated with the soluble chlorides which are contained in the solution.
“From the fact that the plate if prepared with positive electricity gives a
positive picture, while it prepared otherwise it gives a negative, it is evident
that electricity plays an important part in this process. The same is true to
some extent with the compounds formed with iodine, bromine, and fluorine.
“On heating the plate, the brown coating of chloride melts into a
translucent enamel, and the heat should be withdrawn when a cherry-red
color is produced. It the heat is continued longer, the plate assumes a lighter
color, and becomes less sensitive; and the enamel will finally scale off. To
produce a picture by the ordinary process of M. Neipce, unaccelerated, it
should be exposed for from three to five hours to sunlight in the camera,
though pictures may be procured by contact, in from fifteen to thirty
minutes.”
MULTIPLYING DAGUERREOTYPES ON ONE
PLATE.
I have produced some interesting specimens of the Daguerreotypic art, by
exposing in the camera only a portion of the sensitive plate to the action of
light. When on the exposed portion an image is formed, then taking the
tablet into the dark room, change ends and expose the sensitive portion, and
Page 101
produce another image, developing as usual. This plan is adapted for taking
likenesses for lockets. Two images can be presented as sitting side by side,
by covering half the plate with black paper, and exposing as before. In this
manner we have been enabled to surprise persons by exhibiting their portrait
on the same plate with a stranger’s. Daguerreotypists must be cautious in
practicing this, as it might not be agreeable to the parties whose likenesses
are together, by the above process. It is impossible to produce an impression
without a line being seen where the edge of the paper prevented the
operation of the light.
I have recently seen a fine specimen produced by another plan, which far
exceeds the above, there being no line, or any peculiarity denoting two
exposures. The specimen referred to, was a gentleman represented on one
plate by two full length portraits. This was produced by using a black velvet
for the background. The plate was exposed sufficient time to produce one
impression, and then the gentleman assumed another position, and is
repeated as looking at himself. From the fact that the time required to
develop black velvet being so much longer than that for producing a portrait,
we are enabled to produce the above interesting results.
DEPOSIT IN GILDING.
Regarding specks from bad water, I would remark that gilding should be
made only with distilled water. Thus made, it produces very little deposit,
even by long keeping. It therefore preserves its original strength, and works
with great uniformity.
Every grain of deposit contains at least 7-10 its weight of gold, easily
discoverable by the blowpipe. Such gilding is continually deteriorating,
which with good chloride and distilled water may be prevented. Distilled
water should also be used for the hyposulphite. and for cleaning plates. Any
good, clear water may be afterwards used for washing off, with equally good
results. I am very rarely troubled with specs, and deem this as the main
reason.
With a portable still attached to a cooking stove, I obtain half a gallon of
water per hour, and with very little trouble. A small tin retort or still
connected with a Leibig’s condenser, would not add much to the “traps” of
likenesses for lockets. Two images can be presented as sitting side by side,
by covering half the plate with black paper, and exposing as before. In this
manner we have been enabled to surprise persons by exhibiting their portrait
on the same plate with a stranger’s. Daguerreotypists must be cautious in
practicing this, as it might not be agreeable to the parties whose likenesses
are together, by the above process. It is impossible to produce an impression
without a line being seen where the edge of the paper prevented the
operation of the light.
I have recently seen a fine specimen produced by another plan, which far
exceeds the above, there being no line, or any peculiarity denoting two
exposures. The specimen referred to, was a gentleman represented on one
plate by two full length portraits. This was produced by using a black velvet
for the background. The plate was exposed sufficient time to produce one
impression, and then the gentleman assumed another position, and is
repeated as looking at himself. From the fact that the time required to
develop black velvet being so much longer than that for producing a portrait,
we are enabled to produce the above interesting results.
DEPOSIT IN GILDING.
Regarding specks from bad water, I would remark that gilding should be
made only with distilled water. Thus made, it produces very little deposit,
even by long keeping. It therefore preserves its original strength, and works
with great uniformity.
Every grain of deposit contains at least 7-10 its weight of gold, easily
discoverable by the blowpipe. Such gilding is continually deteriorating,
which with good chloride and distilled water may be prevented. Distilled
water should also be used for the hyposulphite. and for cleaning plates. Any
good, clear water may be afterwards used for washing off, with equally good
results. I am very rarely troubled with specs, and deem this as the main
reason.
With a portable still attached to a cooking stove, I obtain half a gallon of
water per hour, and with very little trouble. A small tin retort or still
connected with a Leibig’s condenser, would not add much to the “traps” of
Page 102
the travelling operator, and save him many a disreputable specimen.—T. J.
BAILEY.—Humphrey’s Journal.
PRACTICAL HINTS ON THE DAGUERREOTYPE.
The following is from Humphrey’s Journal, vol. 5, and from the pen of Dr.
WM. HARRINGTON, one of the most able writers upon the subject of the
Daguerreotype in this country:
THE CAUSE OF THE DIFFICULTY THAT
SOMETIMES OCCURS TO PREVENT THE
PRODUCTION OF A CLEAR IMPRESSION UPON
A DAGUERREOTYPE PLATE.
Beyond all doubt this is traceable to dampness. Truly this is not a new
thought; but where does this dampness come from? How does it originate,
and where is it located? Generally it has been referred to a point entirely
remote from its real location.
This dampness exists particularly upon the surface of the plate; is
obviously derived immediately from the atmosphere; and is owing to a
certain relative temperature of the plate with the hygrometric condition of
the atmosphere.
Whenever this relation exists between the plate and atmosphere, a
precipitation of moisture takes place upon the surface of the plate, which
render all efforts at polishing impracticable. This interference is not confined
to the buffing operation alone, but sometimes is discoverable even in the
ordinary process of scouring. Every one at all experienced in this art will
remember that it is not always an easy matter for him, by scouring, to bring
his plate to the desired lustre. All his efforts become unavailing; the more he
rubs, the duller the surface of his plate appears; and although he renews his
BAILEY.—Humphrey’s Journal.
PRACTICAL HINTS ON THE DAGUERREOTYPE.
The following is from Humphrey’s Journal, vol. 5, and from the pen of Dr.
WM. HARRINGTON, one of the most able writers upon the subject of the
Daguerreotype in this country:
THE CAUSE OF THE DIFFICULTY THAT
SOMETIMES OCCURS TO PREVENT THE
PRODUCTION OF A CLEAR IMPRESSION UPON
A DAGUERREOTYPE PLATE.
Beyond all doubt this is traceable to dampness. Truly this is not a new
thought; but where does this dampness come from? How does it originate,
and where is it located? Generally it has been referred to a point entirely
remote from its real location.
This dampness exists particularly upon the surface of the plate; is
obviously derived immediately from the atmosphere; and is owing to a
certain relative temperature of the plate with the hygrometric condition of
the atmosphere.
Whenever this relation exists between the plate and atmosphere, a
precipitation of moisture takes place upon the surface of the plate, which
render all efforts at polishing impracticable. This interference is not confined
to the buffing operation alone, but sometimes is discoverable even in the
ordinary process of scouring. Every one at all experienced in this art will
remember that it is not always an easy matter for him, by scouring, to bring
his plate to the desired lustre. All his efforts become unavailing; the more he
rubs, the duller the surface of his plate appears; and although he renews his
Page 103
cotton repeatedly, still he is obliged to content himself with an unsatisfactory
finish.
This relative condition is not confined to any particular season of the year,
nor to any certain thermometric temperature; but may occur in summer as
well as in winter; the weather being warm or cold, wet or dry, clear or
cloudy, raining or shining. Under any of these circumstances, if the relation
of the plate and atmosphere be such as to invite upon the plate a precipitation
of humidity from the atmosphere, the prospect of producing a clear
impression is quite problematical.
It is reasonable to expect this occurrence from the fact that metal is a good
radiator, and radiation reduces the temperature of a metallic body below that
of the atmosphere. Consequently, if this relative condition happens, the
result will be as I have stated.
Bodies may be colder than the atmosphere and yet derive no moisture
from it; while at the same time the driest atmosphere is not devoid of
moisture, but will part with it under certain conditions.
Assuming for granted that this relative condition between the plate and
atmosphere, disposing the former to receive the humidity of the latter,
constitutes the great obstacle the operator has to contend with in producing,
a clear proof upon the plate, the remedy naturally suggests itself, and is very
simple. It consists in merely heating the plate above the temperature of the
atmosphere, previous to polishing, and retaining that temperature during the
operation. Various measures might be devised to effect the desired object;
one of which consists of a sheet-iron box, heated from the inside by a spirit-
lamp, upon the top of which are to be kept the plates ready to undergo the
process of being polished; the blocks of the swing or any other vice; or the
iron bed belonging to Lewis’s vice.
In cold weather, when it is necessary to keep a fire in the preparation
room, all of the above may be so arranged in the vicinity of the fire as to
receive the requisite degree of heat for the purpose specified.
This part of the subject, however, is left entirely for the ingenuity of the
operator. No matter by hat means he accomplishes the object; all that is
required is to heat the plate above the temperature of the atmosphere and
retain that heat during the process of polishing.
Since the adoption of this method, in connection with my partner, T. J.
Dobyns, even in this humid climate of ours, when everything in the room is
finish.
This relative condition is not confined to any particular season of the year,
nor to any certain thermometric temperature; but may occur in summer as
well as in winter; the weather being warm or cold, wet or dry, clear or
cloudy, raining or shining. Under any of these circumstances, if the relation
of the plate and atmosphere be such as to invite upon the plate a precipitation
of humidity from the atmosphere, the prospect of producing a clear
impression is quite problematical.
It is reasonable to expect this occurrence from the fact that metal is a good
radiator, and radiation reduces the temperature of a metallic body below that
of the atmosphere. Consequently, if this relative condition happens, the
result will be as I have stated.
Bodies may be colder than the atmosphere and yet derive no moisture
from it; while at the same time the driest atmosphere is not devoid of
moisture, but will part with it under certain conditions.
Assuming for granted that this relative condition between the plate and
atmosphere, disposing the former to receive the humidity of the latter,
constitutes the great obstacle the operator has to contend with in producing,
a clear proof upon the plate, the remedy naturally suggests itself, and is very
simple. It consists in merely heating the plate above the temperature of the
atmosphere, previous to polishing, and retaining that temperature during the
operation. Various measures might be devised to effect the desired object;
one of which consists of a sheet-iron box, heated from the inside by a spirit-
lamp, upon the top of which are to be kept the plates ready to undergo the
process of being polished; the blocks of the swing or any other vice; or the
iron bed belonging to Lewis’s vice.
In cold weather, when it is necessary to keep a fire in the preparation
room, all of the above may be so arranged in the vicinity of the fire as to
receive the requisite degree of heat for the purpose specified.
This part of the subject, however, is left entirely for the ingenuity of the
operator. No matter by hat means he accomplishes the object; all that is
required is to heat the plate above the temperature of the atmosphere and
retain that heat during the process of polishing.
Since the adoption of this method, in connection with my partner, T. J.
Dobyns, even in this humid climate of ours, when everything in the room is
Page 104
dripping with moisture, it has been attended with invariable success.
CHOICE OF PLATES, ETC.
In the great catalogue of complaints made by operators, none is more
common than that alleged against the quality of plates in general use.
Although the greatest diversity of opinion exists upon this subject,
nevertheless the plates of every manufactory share in this universal
condemnation.
To be sure it cannot be denied but that this necessary article of utility in
the photographic art has undergone a sad deterioration in quality owing to
the increasing demand and great reduction in price—the plates of the present
day being by no means so heavily coated with silver as formerly—but the
complaint alluded to is not predicated so much upon the thinness of silver as
upon a mysterious something which has conferred upon the plates the epithet
of not good.
That this complaint is in a great measure groundless appears evident from
the fact that while, with the same brand of plates one operator can work
successfully, another encounters the greatest difficulty; while one is able to
produce beautifully clear and altogether satisfactory results, the other labors
under the troublesome annoyance of innumerable specks, large dark
insensitive patches and brown map-like portions, together with divers other
blemishes, sufficient to prevent him from obtaining anything like a tolerable
impression.
From this wide difference in the results of the two operators using
identically the same article, it is but reasonable to conclude that the
complaint is founded in error; while the inference is no more than just, that
the fault may be traced to a want of practical skill on the part of the
complaining operator himself; rather than to the inferior quality of the plates.
The question, then, whether the plates are unfit for use, or whether those
who pronounce them so understand how to use them, appears to be
satisfactorily answered. It therefore becomes a matter worthy of
investigation, to ascertain what superior judgment and skill one operator
possesses over another which enable him to work successfully a quality of
plate, pronounced by the other entirely useless.
CHOICE OF PLATES, ETC.
In the great catalogue of complaints made by operators, none is more
common than that alleged against the quality of plates in general use.
Although the greatest diversity of opinion exists upon this subject,
nevertheless the plates of every manufactory share in this universal
condemnation.
To be sure it cannot be denied but that this necessary article of utility in
the photographic art has undergone a sad deterioration in quality owing to
the increasing demand and great reduction in price—the plates of the present
day being by no means so heavily coated with silver as formerly—but the
complaint alluded to is not predicated so much upon the thinness of silver as
upon a mysterious something which has conferred upon the plates the epithet
of not good.
That this complaint is in a great measure groundless appears evident from
the fact that while, with the same brand of plates one operator can work
successfully, another encounters the greatest difficulty; while one is able to
produce beautifully clear and altogether satisfactory results, the other labors
under the troublesome annoyance of innumerable specks, large dark
insensitive patches and brown map-like portions, together with divers other
blemishes, sufficient to prevent him from obtaining anything like a tolerable
impression.
From this wide difference in the results of the two operators using
identically the same article, it is but reasonable to conclude that the
complaint is founded in error; while the inference is no more than just, that
the fault may be traced to a want of practical skill on the part of the
complaining operator himself; rather than to the inferior quality of the plates.
The question, then, whether the plates are unfit for use, or whether those
who pronounce them so understand how to use them, appears to be
satisfactorily answered. It therefore becomes a matter worthy of
investigation, to ascertain what superior judgment and skill one operator
possesses over another which enable him to work successfully a quality of
plate, pronounced by the other entirely useless.
Page 105
Suppose we make a critical examination of one of the repudiated plates.
From its external appearance we have little hesitation in pronouncing it to be
French; indeed, this presumption is strongly corroborated by the fact that it
is ornamented upon one of its corners with a brand to designate the
manufactory from which it emanated.
Upon close inspection we cannot fail to notice a striking peculiarity upon
the surface; the roughness is very remarkable; the planishing hammer has
left amazingly visible indications of its busy work. One would suppose the
manufacturer intended the surface of the plate to represent the undulations of
the sea, instead of that smooth and level character so strongly recommended
by M. Daguerre.
Such a plate necessarily requires at the hand of the operator considerable
labor before the surface is in a proper condition to receive a suitable polish
from the buffer. The least reflection in the world should teach any one that so
long as the undulatory character continues upon the surface of the plate, it is
in a very imperfect condition for buffing, because the buffer cannot touch
every point equally; the elevated portions alone receiving a high degree of
polish while the depressed portion, from their roughness acting as nuclei,
gather dust, rouge, and other foreign bodies, so detrimental to sensitiveness.
The secret of the superior judgment and skill of one operator over another, is
intimately connected with this point: his success depends very much upon
the first process of cleaning the plate.
Let us examine the manipulation of the complaining operator. He takes
one of these plates and gives it a careful scouring with rotten-stone and
alcohol or any other liquid preferred for this part of the operation—that is, he
gives it what he terms a careful scouring—very gently indeed because, from
the frequent trials he is in the habit of making in the camera, he fears he will
rub the silver entirely away before he succeeds in obtaining a good
impression. The dark patches, specks, and granular appearance resulting
entirely from the unevenness of the surface of the plate, look like copper to
him, and he is surprised that he should have rubbed away the silver so soon,
particularly by such delicate handling.
The judgment and experience of the successful operator, however, teach
him that scouring injures a plate less than buffing. He knows that unless the
hammer marks be obliterated, he cannot by the buffer produce a surface of
uniform polish and sensitiveness, without which a fair proof is extremely
From its external appearance we have little hesitation in pronouncing it to be
French; indeed, this presumption is strongly corroborated by the fact that it
is ornamented upon one of its corners with a brand to designate the
manufactory from which it emanated.
Upon close inspection we cannot fail to notice a striking peculiarity upon
the surface; the roughness is very remarkable; the planishing hammer has
left amazingly visible indications of its busy work. One would suppose the
manufacturer intended the surface of the plate to represent the undulations of
the sea, instead of that smooth and level character so strongly recommended
by M. Daguerre.
Such a plate necessarily requires at the hand of the operator considerable
labor before the surface is in a proper condition to receive a suitable polish
from the buffer. The least reflection in the world should teach any one that so
long as the undulatory character continues upon the surface of the plate, it is
in a very imperfect condition for buffing, because the buffer cannot touch
every point equally; the elevated portions alone receiving a high degree of
polish while the depressed portion, from their roughness acting as nuclei,
gather dust, rouge, and other foreign bodies, so detrimental to sensitiveness.
The secret of the superior judgment and skill of one operator over another, is
intimately connected with this point: his success depends very much upon
the first process of cleaning the plate.
Let us examine the manipulation of the complaining operator. He takes
one of these plates and gives it a careful scouring with rotten-stone and
alcohol or any other liquid preferred for this part of the operation—that is, he
gives it what he terms a careful scouring—very gently indeed because, from
the frequent trials he is in the habit of making in the camera, he fears he will
rub the silver entirely away before he succeeds in obtaining a good
impression. The dark patches, specks, and granular appearance resulting
entirely from the unevenness of the surface of the plate, look like copper to
him, and he is surprised that he should have rubbed away the silver so soon,
particularly by such delicate handling.
The judgment and experience of the successful operator, however, teach
him that scouring injures a plate less than buffing. He knows that unless the
hammer marks be obliterated, he cannot by the buffer produce a surface of
uniform polish and sensitiveness, without which a fair proof is extremely
Page 106
doubtful; he knows that the time employed in the preliminary operation of
cleaning the plate properly is economy.
There is a style of French plates in the market, denominated heavy, which
are truly excellent, if properly managed. Much patience, however, is
required to remove the marks of the hammer; but with tripoli and alcohol the
surface is readily cut down, and the plate is then susceptible of a beautiful
black lustre by polishing with the buffer. The complaining operator could not
succeed by his own method with one of the plates; he would encounter all
manner of clouds and other unaccountable phenomena; he would imagine
this plate entirely worn out before it was half cleaned, and soon fix in his
own estimation the reputation of the heavy plate.
In making a choice of plates, therefore, it would appear to be a matter of
perfect indifference with an experienced operator what kind he would use,
except so far only as the labor required in cleaning them was to be taken into
consideration.
The distinction between a scale plate, a Scovill No. 1, S. F., heavy A, star,
crescent, eagle, or any other brand, consists in the superior finish of some,
and the thinness of the silver in the cheaper qualities.
Consequently, let the complaining operator but employ the diligence
inculcated in this article, to clean his plate thoroughly, so as to bring it to a
perfectly even and level surface, and he will seldom be troubled with specks,
clouds, dark patches, and the host of other obstacles which heretofore have
tormented him.
cleaning the plate properly is economy.
There is a style of French plates in the market, denominated heavy, which
are truly excellent, if properly managed. Much patience, however, is
required to remove the marks of the hammer; but with tripoli and alcohol the
surface is readily cut down, and the plate is then susceptible of a beautiful
black lustre by polishing with the buffer. The complaining operator could not
succeed by his own method with one of the plates; he would encounter all
manner of clouds and other unaccountable phenomena; he would imagine
this plate entirely worn out before it was half cleaned, and soon fix in his
own estimation the reputation of the heavy plate.
In making a choice of plates, therefore, it would appear to be a matter of
perfect indifference with an experienced operator what kind he would use,
except so far only as the labor required in cleaning them was to be taken into
consideration.
The distinction between a scale plate, a Scovill No. 1, S. F., heavy A, star,
crescent, eagle, or any other brand, consists in the superior finish of some,
and the thinness of the silver in the cheaper qualities.
Consequently, let the complaining operator but employ the diligence
inculcated in this article, to clean his plate thoroughly, so as to bring it to a
perfectly even and level surface, and he will seldom be troubled with specks,
clouds, dark patches, and the host of other obstacles which heretofore have
tormented him.
Page 107
CHAPTER VI.
AN ACCOUNT OF WOLCOTT AND JOHNSON’S EARLY
EXPERIMENTS, IN THE DAGUERREOTYPE. BY JOHN
JOHNSON.
[From Humphrey’s Journal, vol. ii 1851]
As a general thing, however perfect any invention may be deemed by the
inventor or discoverer, it falls to the lot of most, to be the subject of
improvement and advancement, and especially is this the case with those
new projects in science which open an untrodden field to the view of the
artisan. Such has been, in an eminent degree, the case with the discovery
first announced to the world by Mons. Jean Jaques Claude Daguerre, of
Paris, in the year 1839, and which excited unbounded astonishment,
curiosity and surprise. It may be questioned had any other than Daguerre
himself discovered a like beautiful combination, whether the world would
have been favored with details exhibiting so much care, patience and
perseverance as the Daguerreotype on its introduction. Shortly after, these
details reached the United States, by Professor S. F. B. Morse, of New York,
who was, at the time of the discovery, residing in Paris. By this
announcement, the whole scientific corps was set in operation, many
repeating the experiments, following carefully the directions pointed out by
Daguerre, as being necessary to success. Among the number in the United
States, was Alexander S. Wolcott (since deceased) and myself; both of this
city. On the morning of the 6th day of October, 1839, I took to A. Wolcott’s
residence, a full description of Daguerre’s discovery, he being at the time
engaged in the department of Mechanical Dentistry, on some work requiring
his immediate attention, the work being promised at 2 P.M. that day; having,
therefore, no opportunity to read the description for himself (a thing he was
accustomed to do at all times, when investigating any subject). I read to him
the paper, and proposed to him that if he would plan a camera (a matter he
was fully acquainted with, both theoretically and practically), I would obtain
the materials as specified by Daguerre. This being agreed to, I departed for
AN ACCOUNT OF WOLCOTT AND JOHNSON’S EARLY
EXPERIMENTS, IN THE DAGUERREOTYPE. BY JOHN
JOHNSON.
[From Humphrey’s Journal, vol. ii 1851]
As a general thing, however perfect any invention may be deemed by the
inventor or discoverer, it falls to the lot of most, to be the subject of
improvement and advancement, and especially is this the case with those
new projects in science which open an untrodden field to the view of the
artisan. Such has been, in an eminent degree, the case with the discovery
first announced to the world by Mons. Jean Jaques Claude Daguerre, of
Paris, in the year 1839, and which excited unbounded astonishment,
curiosity and surprise. It may be questioned had any other than Daguerre
himself discovered a like beautiful combination, whether the world would
have been favored with details exhibiting so much care, patience and
perseverance as the Daguerreotype on its introduction. Shortly after, these
details reached the United States, by Professor S. F. B. Morse, of New York,
who was, at the time of the discovery, residing in Paris. By this
announcement, the whole scientific corps was set in operation, many
repeating the experiments, following carefully the directions pointed out by
Daguerre, as being necessary to success. Among the number in the United
States, was Alexander S. Wolcott (since deceased) and myself; both of this
city. On the morning of the 6th day of October, 1839, I took to A. Wolcott’s
residence, a full description of Daguerre’s discovery, he being at the time
engaged in the department of Mechanical Dentistry, on some work requiring
his immediate attention, the work being promised at 2 P.M. that day; having,
therefore, no opportunity to read the description for himself (a thing he was
accustomed to do at all times, when investigating any subject). I read to him
the paper, and proposed to him that if he would plan a camera (a matter he
was fully acquainted with, both theoretically and practically), I would obtain
the materials as specified by Daguerre. This being agreed to, I departed for
Page 108
the purpose, and on my return to his shop, he handed me the sketch of a
camera box, without at all explaining in what manner the lens was to be
mounted. This I also undertook to procure. After 2, P.M., he had more
leisure, when he proceeded to complete the camera, introducing for that
purpose a reflector in the back of the box, and also to affix a plate holder on
the inside, with a slide to obtain the focus on the plate, prepared after the
manner of Daguerre. While Mr. Wolcott was engaged with the camera, I
busied myself in polishing the silver plate, or rather silver plated copper; but
ere reaching the end preparatory to iodizing, I found I had nearly or quite
removed the silver surface from off the plate, and that being the best piece of
sliver-plated copper to be found, the first remedy at hand that suggested
itself, was a burnisher, and a few strips were quickly burnished and polished.
Meantime, the camera being finished, Mr. Wolcott, after reading for himself
Daguerre’s method of iodizing, prepared two plates, and placing them in the
camera, guessed at the required time they should remain exposed to the
action of the light; after mercurializing each in turn, and removing the
iodized surface with a solution of common salt two successful impressions
were obtained, each unlike the other! Considerable surprise was excited by
this result, for each plate was managed precisely like the other. On referring
to Daguerre, no explanation was found for this strange result; time, however,
revealed to us that one picture was positive, and the other negative. On this
subject I shall have much to say during the progress of the work.
Investigating, the cause of this difference occupied the remainder of that day.
However, another attempt was agreed upon, and the instruments, plates, etc.,
prepared and taken up into an attic room, in a position most favorable for
light. Having duly arranged the camera, I sat for five minutes, and the result
was a profile miniature (a miniature in reality,) or a plate not quite three-
eighths of an inch square. Thus, with much deliberation and study, passed
the first day in Daguerreotype—little dreaming or knowing into what a
labyrinth such a beginning was hastening us.
[Description of apparatus represented on pages 192 and 199:]
A.—The Box—about 4 inches long by about 2 outside diameter.
B.—The Reflector soldered to a brass screw, and mounted in the rear of the
box.
c.—The slide to regulate the focus to the plate holder.
d.—The standard to the plate holder screwed to the slide.
camera box, without at all explaining in what manner the lens was to be
mounted. This I also undertook to procure. After 2, P.M., he had more
leisure, when he proceeded to complete the camera, introducing for that
purpose a reflector in the back of the box, and also to affix a plate holder on
the inside, with a slide to obtain the focus on the plate, prepared after the
manner of Daguerre. While Mr. Wolcott was engaged with the camera, I
busied myself in polishing the silver plate, or rather silver plated copper; but
ere reaching the end preparatory to iodizing, I found I had nearly or quite
removed the silver surface from off the plate, and that being the best piece of
sliver-plated copper to be found, the first remedy at hand that suggested
itself, was a burnisher, and a few strips were quickly burnished and polished.
Meantime, the camera being finished, Mr. Wolcott, after reading for himself
Daguerre’s method of iodizing, prepared two plates, and placing them in the
camera, guessed at the required time they should remain exposed to the
action of the light; after mercurializing each in turn, and removing the
iodized surface with a solution of common salt two successful impressions
were obtained, each unlike the other! Considerable surprise was excited by
this result, for each plate was managed precisely like the other. On referring
to Daguerre, no explanation was found for this strange result; time, however,
revealed to us that one picture was positive, and the other negative. On this
subject I shall have much to say during the progress of the work.
Investigating, the cause of this difference occupied the remainder of that day.
However, another attempt was agreed upon, and the instruments, plates, etc.,
prepared and taken up into an attic room, in a position most favorable for
light. Having duly arranged the camera, I sat for five minutes, and the result
was a profile miniature (a miniature in reality,) or a plate not quite three-
eighths of an inch square. Thus, with much deliberation and study, passed
the first day in Daguerreotype—little dreaming or knowing into what a
labyrinth such a beginning was hastening us.
[Description of apparatus represented on pages 192 and 199:]
A.—The Box—about 4 inches long by about 2 outside diameter.
B.—The Reflector soldered to a brass screw, and mounted in the rear of the
box.
c.—The slide to regulate the focus to the plate holder.
d.—The standard to the plate holder screwed to the slide.
Page 109
f.—The plate-holder frame having two small ledges, * *, for the plate to rest
upon.
{192}
g.—The plate resting upon the ledge., * *, and kept against the frame by the
spring
h. The plates used were about 3/8 of an inch square.
A.—The window with the sashes removed.
B and C (p. 199) are large looking-glasses mounted as plain reflectors, the
lower one C having rotary motion upon the saddle, resting upon the sill of
the window in order to direct the rays of the sun upon the reflector B, at any
hour of the day—the vertical motion of the reflector C being necessary, the
sun varying in altitude so much during the hours most favorable to the
production of portraits. The reflector C was {193} kept up to the required
position by the handle lever, upright post and bolts. Reflector B was hinged
at its upper end at the top of the window frame, the only motion being
necessary was that which would reflect upon the sitter the incident rays from
reflector C—the reflector B being kept at the required angle by the
connecting lever m, etc. Suitable back-grounds were placed behind the sitter.
upon.
{192}
g.—The plate resting upon the ledge., * *, and kept against the frame by the
spring
h. The plates used were about 3/8 of an inch square.
A.—The window with the sashes removed.
B and C (p. 199) are large looking-glasses mounted as plain reflectors, the
lower one C having rotary motion upon the saddle, resting upon the sill of
the window in order to direct the rays of the sun upon the reflector B, at any
hour of the day—the vertical motion of the reflector C being necessary, the
sun varying in altitude so much during the hours most favorable to the
production of portraits. The reflector C was {193} kept up to the required
position by the handle lever, upright post and bolts. Reflector B was hinged
at its upper end at the top of the window frame, the only motion being
necessary was that which would reflect upon the sitter the incident rays from
reflector C—the reflector B being kept at the required angle by the
connecting lever m, etc. Suitable back-grounds were placed behind the sitter.
Page 110
The reflector B and C, had frequently to be renewed, the heat of the sun
soon destroying their brilliance or power of reflecting, light, before renewing
them, however, we resorted to the springing of them, by which means their
power was increased for a period.
The camera or reflecting apparatus, invented by Mr. Wolcott, was, from
the nature of the case, better adapted at that day to the taking of portraits
from life, than any other instruments. After carefully examining the camera
soon destroying their brilliance or power of reflecting, light, before renewing
them, however, we resorted to the springing of them, by which means their
power was increased for a period.
The camera or reflecting apparatus, invented by Mr. Wolcott, was, from
the nature of the case, better adapted at that day to the taking of portraits
from life, than any other instruments. After carefully examining the camera
Page 111
described by Daguerre, and the time stated as necessary to produce action
for an image, it became evident to the mind of Mr. Wolcott at once, that
more light could be obtained (as the field of view required was not large) by
employing a reflector of short focus and wide aperture, than from a lens
arrangement, owing to spherical aberration and other causes. Many
experiments having been tried with the small instrument figured (p. 199), a
reflector for taking portraits from life was determined on, having eight
inches diameter, with twelve inches focal distance for parallel rays; this was
to admit plates of two inches wide by two and a half long Mr. Wolcott
having on hand reflectors of the right diameter, for Newtonian telescopes, of
eight feet focal distance, resolved (as it was a matter of experiment) to grind
down or increase the curve for the focal distance before named—this
required time. In the mean time, many plans were pursued for making good
plates, and the means of finishing, them. As the completion of the large
reflector drew to a close, our mutual friend, Henry Fitz, Jr., returned from
England, whither he had been on a visit, and when he heard what we were
about, kindly offered his assistance; he being well versed in optics, and
having been before engaged with Mr. Wolcott, in that and other business is
offer was gladly accepted—Mr. Wolcott himself having frequent
engagement; to fill as operator in the details of mechanical dentistry. Thus,
by the aid of Mr. Fitz, the reflector was polished, and experiments soon after
tried on plates of two by tow and a half inches, with tolerable success. Illness
on my part quite suspended further trial for nearly four weeks.
On my recovery, early in January, 1840, our experiments were again
resumed with improved results, so much so as to induce Mr. Wolcott and
myself to entertain serious thoughts of making a business of the taking of
likenesses from life, intending to use the reflecting apparatus invented by
Mr. Wolcott, and for which he obtained Letters Patent, on the 8th day of
May, 1840. Up to January 1st, 1840, all experiments had been tried on an
economical scale, and the apparatus then made, was unfit for public
exhibition; we resolved to make the instruments as perfect as possible while
they were in progress of manufacture. Experiments were made upon
mediums for protecting the eyes from the direct light of the sun, and also
upon the best form and material for a back-ground to the likenesses. The
length of time required for a “sitting,” even with the reflecting apparatus,
was such as to render the operation anything but pleasant. Expedients were
ever ready in the hands of Wolcott: blue glass was tried and abandoned in
for an image, it became evident to the mind of Mr. Wolcott at once, that
more light could be obtained (as the field of view required was not large) by
employing a reflector of short focus and wide aperture, than from a lens
arrangement, owing to spherical aberration and other causes. Many
experiments having been tried with the small instrument figured (p. 199), a
reflector for taking portraits from life was determined on, having eight
inches diameter, with twelve inches focal distance for parallel rays; this was
to admit plates of two inches wide by two and a half long Mr. Wolcott
having on hand reflectors of the right diameter, for Newtonian telescopes, of
eight feet focal distance, resolved (as it was a matter of experiment) to grind
down or increase the curve for the focal distance before named—this
required time. In the mean time, many plans were pursued for making good
plates, and the means of finishing, them. As the completion of the large
reflector drew to a close, our mutual friend, Henry Fitz, Jr., returned from
England, whither he had been on a visit, and when he heard what we were
about, kindly offered his assistance; he being well versed in optics, and
having been before engaged with Mr. Wolcott, in that and other business is
offer was gladly accepted—Mr. Wolcott himself having frequent
engagement; to fill as operator in the details of mechanical dentistry. Thus,
by the aid of Mr. Fitz, the reflector was polished, and experiments soon after
tried on plates of two by tow and a half inches, with tolerable success. Illness
on my part quite suspended further trial for nearly four weeks.
On my recovery, early in January, 1840, our experiments were again
resumed with improved results, so much so as to induce Mr. Wolcott and
myself to entertain serious thoughts of making a business of the taking of
likenesses from life, intending to use the reflecting apparatus invented by
Mr. Wolcott, and for which he obtained Letters Patent, on the 8th day of
May, 1840. Up to January 1st, 1840, all experiments had been tried on an
economical scale, and the apparatus then made, was unfit for public
exhibition; we resolved to make the instruments as perfect as possible while
they were in progress of manufacture. Experiments were made upon
mediums for protecting the eyes from the direct light of the sun, and also
upon the best form and material for a back-ground to the likenesses. The
length of time required for a “sitting,” even with the reflecting apparatus,
was such as to render the operation anything but pleasant. Expedients were
ever ready in the hands of Wolcott: blue glass was tried and abandoned in
Page 112
consequence of being, at that time, unable to procure a piece of uniform
density and surface: afterwards a series of thin muslin screens secured to
wire frames were prepared as a substitute for blue glass. The objections to
these screens, however, were serious, inasmuch as a multiplication of them
became necessary to lessen the intensity of the light sufficiently for due
protection to the eyes, without which, the likenesses, other than profiles,
were very unpleasant to look upon. Most of the portraits, then of necessity
were profiles formed upon back-grounds, the lighter parts relieved upon
black, and the darker parts upon light ground; the back-ground proper being
of light colored material with black velvet so disposed upon the light ground,
this being placed sufficiently far from the sitter, to produce harmony of
effect when viewed in the field of the camera. Other difficulties presented
themselves seriously to the working of the discovery of Daguerre, to portrait
taking—one of which was the necessity for a constant and nearly horizontal
light, that the shaded portions of the portrait should not be too hard, and yet,
at the same time, be sufficiently well developed without the “high light” of
the picture becoming overdone, solarized or destroyed. In almost all the
early specimens of the Daguerreotype, extremes of light and shade presented
themselves, much to the annoyance of the early operators, and seriously
objectionable were such portraits. To overcome this difficulty, Mr. Wolcott
mounted, with suitable joints, upon the top of his camera, a large looking-
glass or plane reflector, in such a manner that the light of the sun (as a strong
light was absolutely necessary), when falling upon the glass could be
directed upon the person in an almost horizontal direction.
Early in February, 1840, Mr. Johnson, Sen., (since deceased) sailed for
Europe with a few specimen likenesses taken with the instruments
completed as above, with the intention of patenting the invention. On his
arrival a joint arrangement was effected with Mr. Richard Beard, of London,
in patenting and working the invention in England. Up to February, 1840,
but few friends had been made acquainted with the progress of the art in the
hands of Mr. Wolcott and myself. From time to time reports reached us from
various sources of the success of others, and specimens of landscapes, etc.,
were exhibited at Dr. James R. Chilton’s laboratory, in Broadway, much to
the gratification of the numerous visitors and anxious expectants for this
most wonderful discovery. Dr. Chilton, Professor J. J. Mapes, Professor J. W.
Draper. Professor S. F. B. Morse, all of this city; Mr. Cornelius, Dr. Goddard
and others of Philadelphia; Mr. Southworth, Professor Plumbe, and
density and surface: afterwards a series of thin muslin screens secured to
wire frames were prepared as a substitute for blue glass. The objections to
these screens, however, were serious, inasmuch as a multiplication of them
became necessary to lessen the intensity of the light sufficiently for due
protection to the eyes, without which, the likenesses, other than profiles,
were very unpleasant to look upon. Most of the portraits, then of necessity
were profiles formed upon back-grounds, the lighter parts relieved upon
black, and the darker parts upon light ground; the back-ground proper being
of light colored material with black velvet so disposed upon the light ground,
this being placed sufficiently far from the sitter, to produce harmony of
effect when viewed in the field of the camera. Other difficulties presented
themselves seriously to the working of the discovery of Daguerre, to portrait
taking—one of which was the necessity for a constant and nearly horizontal
light, that the shaded portions of the portrait should not be too hard, and yet,
at the same time, be sufficiently well developed without the “high light” of
the picture becoming overdone, solarized or destroyed. In almost all the
early specimens of the Daguerreotype, extremes of light and shade presented
themselves, much to the annoyance of the early operators, and seriously
objectionable were such portraits. To overcome this difficulty, Mr. Wolcott
mounted, with suitable joints, upon the top of his camera, a large looking-
glass or plane reflector, in such a manner that the light of the sun (as a strong
light was absolutely necessary), when falling upon the glass could be
directed upon the person in an almost horizontal direction.
Early in February, 1840, Mr. Johnson, Sen., (since deceased) sailed for
Europe with a few specimen likenesses taken with the instruments
completed as above, with the intention of patenting the invention. On his
arrival a joint arrangement was effected with Mr. Richard Beard, of London,
in patenting and working the invention in England. Up to February, 1840,
but few friends had been made acquainted with the progress of the art in the
hands of Mr. Wolcott and myself. From time to time reports reached us from
various sources of the success of others, and specimens of landscapes, etc.,
were exhibited at Dr. James R. Chilton’s laboratory, in Broadway, much to
the gratification of the numerous visitors and anxious expectants for this
most wonderful discovery. Dr. Chilton, Professor J. J. Mapes, Professor J. W.
Draper. Professor S. F. B. Morse, all of this city; Mr. Cornelius, Dr. Goddard
and others of Philadelphia; Mr. Southworth, Professor Plumbe, and
Page 113
numerous others were early in the field; all, however, using the same
description of camera as that of Daguerre, with modification for light, either
by enlargement by lens and aperture for light, or by shortening the focal
distance.
At a conversational meeting of the Mechanics’ Institute, Professor J. J.
Mapes being present, a question was asked if any one present could give
information relative to portraiture from life by the Daguerreotype. Mr. Kells,
a friend of Mr. Wolcott and a scientific and practical man (since deceased),
at once marked out upon the black-board, the whole as contrived by Mr.
Wolcott. This gave publicity to the invention of Mr. Wolcott. Shortly after,
Professor Mapes, Dr. Chilton, and many others, sat for their portraits, and
were highly gratified. Professor Morse also came and proposed to Mr.
Wolcott to join him in the working of the invention, etc.
From this time much interest was manifested by our friends in our
progress. Rooms were obtained in the Granite Buildings, corner of
Broadway and Chambers street, and fitted for business. The rooms being
small, it was soon found impracticable to use the arrangement of looking-
glass, as previously spoken of; a new plan became necessary, to introduce
which, the sashes were removed, {199} and two large looking-glasses were
mounted in proper frames, thus:—
description of camera as that of Daguerre, with modification for light, either
by enlargement by lens and aperture for light, or by shortening the focal
distance.
At a conversational meeting of the Mechanics’ Institute, Professor J. J.
Mapes being present, a question was asked if any one present could give
information relative to portraiture from life by the Daguerreotype. Mr. Kells,
a friend of Mr. Wolcott and a scientific and practical man (since deceased),
at once marked out upon the black-board, the whole as contrived by Mr.
Wolcott. This gave publicity to the invention of Mr. Wolcott. Shortly after,
Professor Mapes, Dr. Chilton, and many others, sat for their portraits, and
were highly gratified. Professor Morse also came and proposed to Mr.
Wolcott to join him in the working of the invention, etc.
From this time much interest was manifested by our friends in our
progress. Rooms were obtained in the Granite Buildings, corner of
Broadway and Chambers street, and fitted for business. The rooms being
small, it was soon found impracticable to use the arrangement of looking-
glass, as previously spoken of; a new plan became necessary, to introduce
which, the sashes were removed, {199} and two large looking-glasses were
mounted in proper frames, thus:—
Page 114
Just in front, and between the sitter and {200} the reflector, upon a proper
stand, were used those paper muslin screen before described; also screens of
tissue paper. These screens, however, when they were used, required so
much time for a sitting, that some other medium, as a protection to the eyes,
became absolutely necessary. The most plausible thing that suggested itself
was blue glass; but, as this could not be found, numerous were the
expedients proposed by the friends of the art, who from time to time visited
our rooms. At the suggestion of Professor Mapes (who is ever ready to assist
those in perplexity), a trough of plate glass s, about twenty-eight inches
square in the clear, and from three to four inches thick, was filled with a
solution of ammonia sulphate of copper, and mounted on the frame as in the
sketch, which, for a time, answered extremely well; soon, however,
decomposition of this solution became apparent from the increased length of
time required for a sitting, although to the eye of an observer, no visible
cause for such long sittings could be pointed out. Professor Mapes being
appealed to, suggested that to the above solution a little acid be added which
acted like a charm—shortening the time for a sitting from six, eight, or ten
minutes to that of about one. Decomposition, however, would go on by the
action of light and heat through the solution. New solutions were tried, when
the whole were finally abandoned as being, too uncertain and troublesome.
(The reflecting apparatus R, was placed upon the stand as in the sketch, with
a wedge for elevating the camera, between it and the table, to obtain the
image properly upon the plate.) A quantity of blue window glass was next
obtained, and holes drilled through the corners of it, and several sheets were
wired together to increase the size, and, when complete, was suspended from
the ceiling in its proper place, and so arranged that when a person was
sitting, this sheet of glass could be moved to and from, the object of which
was to prevent shadows on the face of the sitter produced from the uneven
surface of the glass. This latter contrivance was used until a perfect plate of
glass was procured.
The number of persons desirous of obtaining, their miniatures, induced
many to entertain the idea of establishing themselves in the Art as a
profession, and numerous were the applications for information; many
persons paying for their portraits solely with the view of seeing the manner
of our manipulations, in order that they might obtain information to carry on
likeness-taking as a business.
stand, were used those paper muslin screen before described; also screens of
tissue paper. These screens, however, when they were used, required so
much time for a sitting, that some other medium, as a protection to the eyes,
became absolutely necessary. The most plausible thing that suggested itself
was blue glass; but, as this could not be found, numerous were the
expedients proposed by the friends of the art, who from time to time visited
our rooms. At the suggestion of Professor Mapes (who is ever ready to assist
those in perplexity), a trough of plate glass s, about twenty-eight inches
square in the clear, and from three to four inches thick, was filled with a
solution of ammonia sulphate of copper, and mounted on the frame as in the
sketch, which, for a time, answered extremely well; soon, however,
decomposition of this solution became apparent from the increased length of
time required for a sitting, although to the eye of an observer, no visible
cause for such long sittings could be pointed out. Professor Mapes being
appealed to, suggested that to the above solution a little acid be added which
acted like a charm—shortening the time for a sitting from six, eight, or ten
minutes to that of about one. Decomposition, however, would go on by the
action of light and heat through the solution. New solutions were tried, when
the whole were finally abandoned as being, too uncertain and troublesome.
(The reflecting apparatus R, was placed upon the stand as in the sketch, with
a wedge for elevating the camera, between it and the table, to obtain the
image properly upon the plate.) A quantity of blue window glass was next
obtained, and holes drilled through the corners of it, and several sheets were
wired together to increase the size, and, when complete, was suspended from
the ceiling in its proper place, and so arranged that when a person was
sitting, this sheet of glass could be moved to and from, the object of which
was to prevent shadows on the face of the sitter produced from the uneven
surface of the glass. This latter contrivance was used until a perfect plate of
glass was procured.
The number of persons desirous of obtaining, their miniatures, induced
many to entertain the idea of establishing themselves in the Art as a
profession, and numerous were the applications for information; many
persons paying for their portraits solely with the view of seeing the manner
of our manipulations, in order that they might obtain information to carry on
likeness-taking as a business.
Page 115
The reflecting camera being a very troublesome instrument to make, and
difficulties besetting us from every source, but little attention could be given
to teaching others; and, indeed, as the facts seemed to be at this time, we
knew but little of the necessary manipulations ourselves. In course of time,
several established themselves. The first one, after ourselves, who worked
the discovery of Daguerre for portrait taking in this city, was a Mr. Prosch;
followed soon after by many others, in almost all cases copying the
reflecting arrangement for light, as figured above, many using it even after
we had long abandoned that arrangement for a better one.
Innumerable obstacles to the rapid advance of the daguerreotype,
presented themselves almost hourly, much to the annoyance of ourselves,
and those dependent upon our movements for their advancement. Among the
most difficult problems of the day, was the procuring of good plates. Messrs.
Corduran & Co. were among the first to supply the trade; at that early day,
however, it was a very rare thing, to be able to procure an even perfect
surface, from the fact that a pure surface of silver could scarcely be obtained,
the manufacturers deeming it too much trouble to prepare silver plated
copper with pure silver—the result was, that in attempting to polish perfectly
such plated metal as could be procured, the plates would become cloudy, or
colored in spots, from the fact of having more or less alloy, according as
more or less of the silver surface was removed in polishing the plate fit for
an impression. To explain more clearly, it was the practice of most silver
platers to use an alloy for silver-plating. In the reduction of the ingot to sheet
metal, annealing has to be resorted to, and acid pickles to remove oxides,
etc. The number of times the plated metal is exposed to heat and acid in its
reduction to the required thickness, produces a surface of pure silver. The
most of this surface is, however, so rough as to be with difficulty polished,
without in places removing entirely this pellicle of pure metal, and exposing
a polished surface of the alloy used in plating. Whenever such metal was
used, very unsightly stains or spots frequently disfigured the portraits. The
portrait, or portion of it, developed upon the pure silver, being much lighter
or whiter than that developed upon the alloy; it therefore appeared that the
purer the silver, the more sensitive the plate became. Accordingly, we
directed Messrs. Scovills, of Connecticut, to prepare a roll of silver-plated
metal, with pure silver; it fortunately proved to be a good article, but,
unfortunately, a pound of this metal (early in 1840) cost the round sum of $9.
Like descriptions of metal, the same gentlemen would be glad to furnish, at
difficulties besetting us from every source, but little attention could be given
to teaching others; and, indeed, as the facts seemed to be at this time, we
knew but little of the necessary manipulations ourselves. In course of time,
several established themselves. The first one, after ourselves, who worked
the discovery of Daguerre for portrait taking in this city, was a Mr. Prosch;
followed soon after by many others, in almost all cases copying the
reflecting arrangement for light, as figured above, many using it even after
we had long abandoned that arrangement for a better one.
Innumerable obstacles to the rapid advance of the daguerreotype,
presented themselves almost hourly, much to the annoyance of ourselves,
and those dependent upon our movements for their advancement. Among the
most difficult problems of the day, was the procuring of good plates. Messrs.
Corduran & Co. were among the first to supply the trade; at that early day,
however, it was a very rare thing, to be able to procure an even perfect
surface, from the fact that a pure surface of silver could scarcely be obtained,
the manufacturers deeming it too much trouble to prepare silver plated
copper with pure silver—the result was, that in attempting to polish perfectly
such plated metal as could be procured, the plates would become cloudy, or
colored in spots, from the fact of having more or less alloy, according as
more or less of the silver surface was removed in polishing the plate fit for
an impression. To explain more clearly, it was the practice of most silver
platers to use an alloy for silver-plating. In the reduction of the ingot to sheet
metal, annealing has to be resorted to, and acid pickles to remove oxides,
etc. The number of times the plated metal is exposed to heat and acid in its
reduction to the required thickness, produces a surface of pure silver. The
most of this surface is, however, so rough as to be with difficulty polished,
without in places removing entirely this pellicle of pure metal, and exposing
a polished surface of the alloy used in plating. Whenever such metal was
used, very unsightly stains or spots frequently disfigured the portraits. The
portrait, or portion of it, developed upon the pure silver, being much lighter
or whiter than that developed upon the alloy; it therefore appeared that the
purer the silver, the more sensitive the plate became. Accordingly, we
directed Messrs. Scovills, of Connecticut, to prepare a roll of silver-plated
metal, with pure silver; it fortunately proved to be a good article, but,
unfortunately, a pound of this metal (early in 1840) cost the round sum of $9.
Like descriptions of metal, the same gentlemen would be glad to furnish, at
Page 116
this time, for $4. Soon after this, some samples of English plated metal, of a
very superior quality, came to our possession, and relieved us from the toil
of making and plating one plate at a time, an expedient we were compelled
to resort to, to command material to meet the pressing demands for portraits.
Having it now in our power to obtain good plated metal, a more rapid
mode of polishing than that recommended by Daguerre was attempted as
follows:
This metal was cut to the desired size, and having a pair of “hand rolls” at
hand, each plate, with its silvered side placed next to the highly polished
surface of a steel die, was passed and repassed through the rolls many times,
by which process a very smooth, perfect surface was obtained. The plates
were then annealed, and a number of plates thus prepared were fastened to
the bottom of a box a few inches deep a foot wide, and eighteen inches long;
this box was placed upon a table and attached to a rod connected to the face
plate of a lathe, a few inches from its centre, so as to give the box a
reciprocating motion. A quantity of emery was now strewn over the plates,
and the lathe set in motion. The action produced wag a friction or rubbing of
the emery over the surface of the plates.
When continued for some time, a greyish polish was the result. Linseed,
when used in the same manner, gave us better hope of success, and the next
step resorted to was to build a wheel and suspend it after the manner of a
grindstone. The plates being secured to the inner side of the wheel or case,
and as this case revolved, the seeds would constantly keep to the lower level,
and their sliding over the surface of the plates would polish or burnish their
surfaces. This, with the former, was soon abandoned; rounded shots of silver
placed in the same wheel were found not to perform the polishing so well as
linseed. Buff-wheels of leather with rotten-stone and oil, proved to be far
superior to all other contrivances; and, subsequently, at the suggestion of
Professor Draper, velvet was used in lieu of buff leather, and soon
superseded all other substances, both for lathe and hand-buffs, and I would
add, for the benefit of new beginners that those who are familiar with its use,
prefer cotton velvet. The only requisite necessary is, that the buffs made of
cotton velvet should be kept dry and warm.
The greater number of operators, with whose practice I am familiar, use,
for polishing plates, prepared tripoli, imported from France, or Browne’s
rotten-stone. The former of these articles is very objectionable, inasmuch as
there is no positive certainty of being enabled to procure or make the article
very superior quality, came to our possession, and relieved us from the toil
of making and plating one plate at a time, an expedient we were compelled
to resort to, to command material to meet the pressing demands for portraits.
Having it now in our power to obtain good plated metal, a more rapid
mode of polishing than that recommended by Daguerre was attempted as
follows:
This metal was cut to the desired size, and having a pair of “hand rolls” at
hand, each plate, with its silvered side placed next to the highly polished
surface of a steel die, was passed and repassed through the rolls many times,
by which process a very smooth, perfect surface was obtained. The plates
were then annealed, and a number of plates thus prepared were fastened to
the bottom of a box a few inches deep a foot wide, and eighteen inches long;
this box was placed upon a table and attached to a rod connected to the face
plate of a lathe, a few inches from its centre, so as to give the box a
reciprocating motion. A quantity of emery was now strewn over the plates,
and the lathe set in motion. The action produced wag a friction or rubbing of
the emery over the surface of the plates.
When continued for some time, a greyish polish was the result. Linseed,
when used in the same manner, gave us better hope of success, and the next
step resorted to was to build a wheel and suspend it after the manner of a
grindstone. The plates being secured to the inner side of the wheel or case,
and as this case revolved, the seeds would constantly keep to the lower level,
and their sliding over the surface of the plates would polish or burnish their
surfaces. This, with the former, was soon abandoned; rounded shots of silver
placed in the same wheel were found not to perform the polishing so well as
linseed. Buff-wheels of leather with rotten-stone and oil, proved to be far
superior to all other contrivances; and, subsequently, at the suggestion of
Professor Draper, velvet was used in lieu of buff leather, and soon
superseded all other substances, both for lathe and hand-buffs, and I would
add, for the benefit of new beginners that those who are familiar with its use,
prefer cotton velvet. The only requisite necessary is, that the buffs made of
cotton velvet should be kept dry and warm.
The greater number of operators, with whose practice I am familiar, use,
for polishing plates, prepared tripoli, imported from France, or Browne’s
rotten-stone. The former of these articles is very objectionable, inasmuch as
there is no positive certainty of being enabled to procure or make the article
Page 117
of uniform grit—the nature of the substance rendering, it impossible to
reduce it to varying degrees of evenness, by the well known process of
washing, for that purpose, and the burning of rotten-stone changes its
chemical nature somewhat, at the same time rendering, this invaluable article
harsh and gritty. And especially, no reliance can be placed upon burned
rotten stone if purchased from those who do not give very great attention and
care to its preparation; and the same remarks apply to rouge.
The best article for polishing Daguerreotype plates is rotten-stone, such as
can be procured in any town, prepared after the following manner: Procure,
say half a dozen wide-mouthed bottles, of suitable dimensions, numbering
each from one to six. Put into No. 1 about half a pound of rotten-stone, and
nearly fill the bottle with water. Then, with a proper stick or spatule, mix
well the rotten-stone and water; after which, let No. 1 rest for, say one
minute, then carefully pour off into bottle No. 2 (or, what would be better,
draw off by a syphon) as much of the floating particles of rotten-stone as is
suspended in the water. Again fill bottle No. 1 with water, agitate it as
before, and decant it to bottle No. 2, care being taken to draw off only the
suspended particles of rotten-stone.
When a sufficient quantity of washings from bottle No. 1 is collected into
bottle No. 2, a similar process must be gone through, as above stated, for No.
1; the difference being in the care required, and in the time allowed between
the stirring or mixing the rotten-stone and water. The floating particles of
rotten-stone, after four minutes’ subsiding, will be found fine enough for the
finest Daguerreotype polishing required.
A quantity of such washings may be collected in a large bottle, and
allowed to stand a few hours, when all the rotten-stone will have settled. The
water may be poured off and the rotten-stone put into an evaporating dish,
and while being dried, must be constantly stirred to obtain an impalpable
powder.
Further washings may in like manner be resorted to for finer qualities of
rotten-stone. In my practice, I have used the articles at two and four minutes’
settling, and occasionally have prepared it after standing for eight minutes.
So fine a quality as this, however, is seldom required. In using, rotten-stone,
I mix with it, for polishing, fine olive oil, until I obtain a thin paste—and the
best of all methods for polishing (well planished) Daguerreotype plates, is
one like that used for glass by lens polishers; that is, by using a disc or buff-
wheel, and having, a suitable holder by which to secure the plate, and then
reduce it to varying degrees of evenness, by the well known process of
washing, for that purpose, and the burning of rotten-stone changes its
chemical nature somewhat, at the same time rendering, this invaluable article
harsh and gritty. And especially, no reliance can be placed upon burned
rotten stone if purchased from those who do not give very great attention and
care to its preparation; and the same remarks apply to rouge.
The best article for polishing Daguerreotype plates is rotten-stone, such as
can be procured in any town, prepared after the following manner: Procure,
say half a dozen wide-mouthed bottles, of suitable dimensions, numbering
each from one to six. Put into No. 1 about half a pound of rotten-stone, and
nearly fill the bottle with water. Then, with a proper stick or spatule, mix
well the rotten-stone and water; after which, let No. 1 rest for, say one
minute, then carefully pour off into bottle No. 2 (or, what would be better,
draw off by a syphon) as much of the floating particles of rotten-stone as is
suspended in the water. Again fill bottle No. 1 with water, agitate it as
before, and decant it to bottle No. 2, care being taken to draw off only the
suspended particles of rotten-stone.
When a sufficient quantity of washings from bottle No. 1 is collected into
bottle No. 2, a similar process must be gone through, as above stated, for No.
1; the difference being in the care required, and in the time allowed between
the stirring or mixing the rotten-stone and water. The floating particles of
rotten-stone, after four minutes’ subsiding, will be found fine enough for the
finest Daguerreotype polishing required.
A quantity of such washings may be collected in a large bottle, and
allowed to stand a few hours, when all the rotten-stone will have settled. The
water may be poured off and the rotten-stone put into an evaporating dish,
and while being dried, must be constantly stirred to obtain an impalpable
powder.
Further washings may in like manner be resorted to for finer qualities of
rotten-stone. In my practice, I have used the articles at two and four minutes’
settling, and occasionally have prepared it after standing for eight minutes.
So fine a quality as this, however, is seldom required. In using, rotten-stone,
I mix with it, for polishing, fine olive oil, until I obtain a thin paste—and the
best of all methods for polishing (well planished) Daguerreotype plates, is
one like that used for glass by lens polishers; that is, by using a disc or buff-
wheel, and having, a suitable holder by which to secure the plate, and then
Page 118
by pressing the plate against the revolving buff, well saturated with the
mixed oil and rotten-stone, a very good surface is obtained. A quantity of
plates may be prepared in this way, and all the adhering oil, etc., may be
removed by a clean hand, or lathe buff, after which each plate must be
heated to the point necessary to burn off the remaining oil great care being
required not to overheat the plate. A very slight excess of temperature will at
once destroy all the polish previously obtained. The test for ascertaining the
right temperature is at hand; the adhering oil will be driven from the plate in
the form of smoke when the right temperature is reached. The moment the
smoke ceases to rise from the plate, the heat must be removed, and the plate
quickly cooled upon a piece of iron.
A quantity of plates thus prepared may be kept on hand for any required
time, and the labor of one minute, with a lathe or hand-buff with dry
charcoal, or rather, prepared lampblack, will perfectly polish the surface
ready for indexing, etc. This lampblack also requires some care in preparing.
Take a small-size crucible, properly temper it by a slow fire, that it may not
be cracked after which, fill it with common lampblack, cover it over with a
piece of soap-stone, and again replace it in the fire. Build a good hard coal
fire around it continue the heat for two or three hours, being careful not to
raise the cover till the crucible be quite cold. Pulverize when using it. It is
very desirable to keep this lampblack dry and warm. Some operators use
much rouge I would recommend the above in preference; but those who feel
that they cannot dispense with the use of rouge, had better try a large
addition of prepared lampblack to a small one of rouge, as this latter article,
unless great pains be taken in its preparation, will adhere and work itself into
the body of the surface, so that it cannot be removed therefrom; and I have
seen many specimens of Daguerreotype very much injured in effect from
this rouge tint disseminated throughout their shaded features, at the same
time that the whole general effect of such pictures is that of a want of life. It
is true that with the use of rouge a very high degree of polish may be
obtained, but probably not higher than can be produced with many other
substances of a less objectionable nature.
From the announcement of the discovery by Daguerre to the beginning of
the year 1840, I am not aware of any attempt to lessen the time for the action
of an image, or an impression, other than that of the reflecting camera
invented by Mr. Wolcott. Early, however, in 1840, Mr. Wolcott was desirous
to be enabled to further shorten the time for a sitting, and having some
mixed oil and rotten-stone, a very good surface is obtained. A quantity of
plates may be prepared in this way, and all the adhering oil, etc., may be
removed by a clean hand, or lathe buff, after which each plate must be
heated to the point necessary to burn off the remaining oil great care being
required not to overheat the plate. A very slight excess of temperature will at
once destroy all the polish previously obtained. The test for ascertaining the
right temperature is at hand; the adhering oil will be driven from the plate in
the form of smoke when the right temperature is reached. The moment the
smoke ceases to rise from the plate, the heat must be removed, and the plate
quickly cooled upon a piece of iron.
A quantity of plates thus prepared may be kept on hand for any required
time, and the labor of one minute, with a lathe or hand-buff with dry
charcoal, or rather, prepared lampblack, will perfectly polish the surface
ready for indexing, etc. This lampblack also requires some care in preparing.
Take a small-size crucible, properly temper it by a slow fire, that it may not
be cracked after which, fill it with common lampblack, cover it over with a
piece of soap-stone, and again replace it in the fire. Build a good hard coal
fire around it continue the heat for two or three hours, being careful not to
raise the cover till the crucible be quite cold. Pulverize when using it. It is
very desirable to keep this lampblack dry and warm. Some operators use
much rouge I would recommend the above in preference; but those who feel
that they cannot dispense with the use of rouge, had better try a large
addition of prepared lampblack to a small one of rouge, as this latter article,
unless great pains be taken in its preparation, will adhere and work itself into
the body of the surface, so that it cannot be removed therefrom; and I have
seen many specimens of Daguerreotype very much injured in effect from
this rouge tint disseminated throughout their shaded features, at the same
time that the whole general effect of such pictures is that of a want of life. It
is true that with the use of rouge a very high degree of polish may be
obtained, but probably not higher than can be produced with many other
substances of a less objectionable nature.
From the announcement of the discovery by Daguerre to the beginning of
the year 1840, I am not aware of any attempt to lessen the time for the action
of an image, or an impression, other than that of the reflecting camera
invented by Mr. Wolcott. Early, however, in 1840, Mr. Wolcott was desirous
to be enabled to further shorten the time for a sitting, and having some
Page 119
knowledge of bromine and its action, by request, Dr. Chilton prepared a
small quantity; but Mr. Wolcott did not succeed very well with it, he having
invariably used too much in combination with iodine to produce that
sensitive coating now well known to the profession. Professor Morse, of this
city, Dr. Goddard, of Philadelphia, and others, in the years 1840 and 1841,
were acquainted with the use of bromine. N. Griffing, of this city, or myself,
used with tolerable success, iodine in large excess to nitric acid and water;
and, subsequently, to nitro muriatic acid (which reacted and formed a
peculiar chloride of iodine); this latter combination proved to be preferable
to simple iodine, at the same time somewhat more sensitive, and was used
by me in this city up to the time of my leaving for London (October 1,
1840). On arriving in London, I instituted a series of experiments in the
various chemical combinations, solely with the view to be enabled to obtain
more speedily a portrait than it was practicable to do with any known
chemicals at that date. The high latitude, and the winter season of the year
rendering but a feeble light at best, the greater the necessity for a more
sensitive chemical preparation to the shortening the time for a sitting. Near
the beginning of the year 1841, I discovered and practically applied, chloride
of iodine to great advantage, and, as far as memory serves me, I believe the
first used in this country was some made and shipped, Messrs. Harnden &
Co., from London, to Mr. Wolcott, in New York.
About the same time, Mr. John Goddard, of London (who was associated
with myself), discovered a rather valuable combination of chemicals,
consisting of a mixture of iodine, bromine, iodus, and iodic acid, and a
proper combination of those bodies gave an action somewhat more sensitive
than chloride of iodine—but the “high lights” of the portraits would become
solarized or overdone, more frequently with this combination than with the
chloride of iodine. Throughout the year 1841, I used, with great success,
chloride of iodine, applied as one coating—occasionally in conjunction with
Mr. Wolcott, attempting the use of iodine, bromine, and chlorine, and at
times with more or less success. The difficulty of exactly combining, the
three elements above mentioned, in order to produce a certainty of result
with harmony of effect, was the work of many months, with great labor and
study, the slightest modification requiring a long, series of practical
experiments, a single change consuming, frequently, an entire day in
instituting comparisons, etc., etc.
small quantity; but Mr. Wolcott did not succeed very well with it, he having
invariably used too much in combination with iodine to produce that
sensitive coating now well known to the profession. Professor Morse, of this
city, Dr. Goddard, of Philadelphia, and others, in the years 1840 and 1841,
were acquainted with the use of bromine. N. Griffing, of this city, or myself,
used with tolerable success, iodine in large excess to nitric acid and water;
and, subsequently, to nitro muriatic acid (which reacted and formed a
peculiar chloride of iodine); this latter combination proved to be preferable
to simple iodine, at the same time somewhat more sensitive, and was used
by me in this city up to the time of my leaving for London (October 1,
1840). On arriving in London, I instituted a series of experiments in the
various chemical combinations, solely with the view to be enabled to obtain
more speedily a portrait than it was practicable to do with any known
chemicals at that date. The high latitude, and the winter season of the year
rendering but a feeble light at best, the greater the necessity for a more
sensitive chemical preparation to the shortening the time for a sitting. Near
the beginning of the year 1841, I discovered and practically applied, chloride
of iodine to great advantage, and, as far as memory serves me, I believe the
first used in this country was some made and shipped, Messrs. Harnden &
Co., from London, to Mr. Wolcott, in New York.
About the same time, Mr. John Goddard, of London (who was associated
with myself), discovered a rather valuable combination of chemicals,
consisting of a mixture of iodine, bromine, iodus, and iodic acid, and a
proper combination of those bodies gave an action somewhat more sensitive
than chloride of iodine—but the “high lights” of the portraits would become
solarized or overdone, more frequently with this combination than with the
chloride of iodine. Throughout the year 1841, I used, with great success,
chloride of iodine, applied as one coating—occasionally in conjunction with
Mr. Wolcott, attempting the use of iodine, bromine, and chlorine, and at
times with more or less success. The difficulty of exactly combining, the
three elements above mentioned, in order to produce a certainty of result
with harmony of effect, was the work of many months, with great labor and
study, the slightest modification requiring a long, series of practical
experiments, a single change consuming, frequently, an entire day in
instituting comparisons, etc., etc.
Page 120
Early in the year, 1842, I discovered a combination of chemicals (now
known in London as “Wolcott’s Mixture,” in hermetically sealed bulbs) of
exceeding uniform character, very sensitive to the action of light, and
specimens produced in 1842-3, with this combination, will bear comparison
with the best specimens produced at this late date.
About the same time, I discovered that however much overdone a
Daguerreotype might be, the means were at hand to save or redeem it. It has
long, since been known to operators, that if a plate be exposed to light after
being coated, unless it be again coated, a clear and distinct picture could not
be obtained upon the same plate without first repolishing and recoating the
same, care being taken that no light fall upon the prepared surface. To
prevent solarization, coat a plate as usual, expose to the action of light any
required time (according to circumstances), say from quarter to one half
more time than would be required in the ordinary method of procedure;
observe, before putting the plate in the mercury box, place it over the vapor
of iodine, bromine, or chlorine, etc. (carefully excluding the light), for a very
brief period, great care being required to have the selected vapor very much
diluted with air, in order to success. Many experiments will be required ere
arriving at satisfactory results. Specimens now unknown to general
operators, for harmony of effect, have been, and may again be produced by
the method pointed out above. I have found the best general effect, and the
most certain result to follow from the use of the vapor of chlorine—but this
requires more than ordinary care. I would, therefore, recommend the use of
iodine. Thus: to a few grains of iodine, add an ounce of warm water (which
will become tinged with iodine); when cold, to half a pint of pure water in a
new and clean coating box, put, of the above, fifty drops; stir and mix well
this small quantity of iodine in with the water; in ten minutes this box will be
ready for use. Great care and judgment will be required in the application of
this vapor to the plate; if the plate remain over the vapor too long, the
developed picture will have a faint and misty appearance; if not exposed
long enough, the “high light” will be solarized. I have great hope of the
ultimate use of this process, as it is the only means yet discovered to be
enabled to secure specimens of extremes of light and shade, yet producing
harmony of effect; and I would call the attention of the profession to the fact,
that a plate may be exposed to the action of light for any length of time (a
thousand times longer than required to act for the lesser quantity of mercury
to deposit itself, or that amount necessary to form a perfect specimen), and
known in London as “Wolcott’s Mixture,” in hermetically sealed bulbs) of
exceeding uniform character, very sensitive to the action of light, and
specimens produced in 1842-3, with this combination, will bear comparison
with the best specimens produced at this late date.
About the same time, I discovered that however much overdone a
Daguerreotype might be, the means were at hand to save or redeem it. It has
long, since been known to operators, that if a plate be exposed to light after
being coated, unless it be again coated, a clear and distinct picture could not
be obtained upon the same plate without first repolishing and recoating the
same, care being taken that no light fall upon the prepared surface. To
prevent solarization, coat a plate as usual, expose to the action of light any
required time (according to circumstances), say from quarter to one half
more time than would be required in the ordinary method of procedure;
observe, before putting the plate in the mercury box, place it over the vapor
of iodine, bromine, or chlorine, etc. (carefully excluding the light), for a very
brief period, great care being required to have the selected vapor very much
diluted with air, in order to success. Many experiments will be required ere
arriving at satisfactory results. Specimens now unknown to general
operators, for harmony of effect, have been, and may again be produced by
the method pointed out above. I have found the best general effect, and the
most certain result to follow from the use of the vapor of chlorine—but this
requires more than ordinary care. I would, therefore, recommend the use of
iodine. Thus: to a few grains of iodine, add an ounce of warm water (which
will become tinged with iodine); when cold, to half a pint of pure water in a
new and clean coating box, put, of the above, fifty drops; stir and mix well
this small quantity of iodine in with the water; in ten minutes this box will be
ready for use. Great care and judgment will be required in the application of
this vapor to the plate; if the plate remain over the vapor too long, the
developed picture will have a faint and misty appearance; if not exposed
long enough, the “high light” will be solarized. I have great hope of the
ultimate use of this process, as it is the only means yet discovered to be
enabled to secure specimens of extremes of light and shade, yet producing
harmony of effect; and I would call the attention of the profession to the fact,
that a plate may be exposed to the action of light for any length of time (a
thousand times longer than required to act for the lesser quantity of mercury
to deposit itself, or that amount necessary to form a perfect specimen), and
Page 121
be restored by the application of any of the vapors above mentioned,
remarking that for extremes for solarization, denser vapors will be required.
Much remains to be done with this discovery to the application of the
Daguerreotype.
HUMPHREY’S JOURNAL OF THE
DAGUERREOTYPE & PHOTOGRAPHIC ARTS.
The above-named publication is well known as the best and most valuable
one devoted to the Photographic Science in this country. Humphrey’s
Journal made its appearance November 1st, 1850, and consequently is the
first and oldest serial offered to the Photographic world.
The art of producing Portraits and Landscapes by means of Light, has
recently taken a new and enlivening impulse, which will in all probability
lead to important and interesting results. No practical Daguerreotypist,
Photographer, or amateur, should be without the means at hand for securing
all of the information upon this subject. Each should be ready to receive and
apply the improvements as they may be developed. In order to accomplish
this, it is a matter of great importance to the Practitioner or Experimenter
that he should have a reliable medium through which he can obtain
information. In what source can the inquirer better place his confidence than
in a regular Journal, whose editor is literally a practical person, and familiar
with the manipulations necessary for producing Portraits upon
“Daguerreotype Plates,” and upon glass and paper? Such is the conductor of
Humphrey’s Journal.
This Journal is published once every two weeks, and contains all the
improvements relating to the Art, and is the only American Journal whose
editor is practically acquainted with the process for producing
Daguerreotypes, Ambrotypes, and Photographs. The first No. of Vol. X. is
dated May 1st, 1858. The terms (Two Dollars per annum) are trifling
compared with the vast amount of information furnished.
remarking that for extremes for solarization, denser vapors will be required.
Much remains to be done with this discovery to the application of the
Daguerreotype.
HUMPHREY’S JOURNAL OF THE
DAGUERREOTYPE & PHOTOGRAPHIC ARTS.
The above-named publication is well known as the best and most valuable
one devoted to the Photographic Science in this country. Humphrey’s
Journal made its appearance November 1st, 1850, and consequently is the
first and oldest serial offered to the Photographic world.
The art of producing Portraits and Landscapes by means of Light, has
recently taken a new and enlivening impulse, which will in all probability
lead to important and interesting results. No practical Daguerreotypist,
Photographer, or amateur, should be without the means at hand for securing
all of the information upon this subject. Each should be ready to receive and
apply the improvements as they may be developed. In order to accomplish
this, it is a matter of great importance to the Practitioner or Experimenter
that he should have a reliable medium through which he can obtain
information. In what source can the inquirer better place his confidence than
in a regular Journal, whose editor is literally a practical person, and familiar
with the manipulations necessary for producing Portraits upon
“Daguerreotype Plates,” and upon glass and paper? Such is the conductor of
Humphrey’s Journal.
This Journal is published once every two weeks, and contains all the
improvements relating to the Art, and is the only American Journal whose
editor is practically acquainted with the process for producing
Daguerreotypes, Ambrotypes, and Photographs. The first No. of Vol. X. is
dated May 1st, 1858. The terms (Two Dollars per annum) are trifling
compared with the vast amount of information furnished.
Page 122
AMBROTYPES.—Humphrey’s Journal contains everything novel which
appears upon this subject, and has already presented more new, important,
and original matter than can be found in any other place.
Many are the letters we have received during the term of the last volume,
in which the writer has stated that a single number of Humphrey’s Journal
has contained information of more value to him than “several times the
amount paid for the entire volume.”
Our resources have grown up around us, and our facilities for procuring,
as well as distributing, all such facts and improvements as will benefit as
well as instruct all who have the progress of the Art at heart, are as ample as
they can well be made.
The future volumes will be abundantly furnished with original writings
from persons of standing in the scientific world; and the practical
Photographer will here find a full account of such improvements as may
from time to time develop themselves.
From the editor’s long practical experience in the Heliographic Science,
he will be enabled to present the subject in a plain, clear, and concise
manner.
Read what the Editors say of Humphrey’s Journal:—
“We have received a copy of a valuable Journal (Humphrey’s) published
in New York, which has reached the 18th number of Vol. VI.... We now have
the pleasure of quoting from our trans-atlantic coadjutor.”—Liverpool
Photographic Jour.
“Humphrey’s Journal is practical as well as scientific in character.”—
American Journal of Science and Arts.
“It treats the subject knowingly and with force.”—New York Tribune.
“It is both a popular and interesting publication.”—Mechanics’ Magazine.
“It is highly useful to all who practice ‘shadow catching.’”—Ohio State
Journal.
“The work is neatly gotten up, and contains many interesting varieties in
this new field of science.”—Times.
“It should be hailed and encouraged, not only by Daguerreotypists
themselves, but by every lover of Science and Art.”—The Democrat.
“We cannot too strongly urge all artists, and those persons who feel an
interest in the Heliographic Arts and Sciences, to take a copy of the
appears upon this subject, and has already presented more new, important,
and original matter than can be found in any other place.
Many are the letters we have received during the term of the last volume,
in which the writer has stated that a single number of Humphrey’s Journal
has contained information of more value to him than “several times the
amount paid for the entire volume.”
Our resources have grown up around us, and our facilities for procuring,
as well as distributing, all such facts and improvements as will benefit as
well as instruct all who have the progress of the Art at heart, are as ample as
they can well be made.
The future volumes will be abundantly furnished with original writings
from persons of standing in the scientific world; and the practical
Photographer will here find a full account of such improvements as may
from time to time develop themselves.
From the editor’s long practical experience in the Heliographic Science,
he will be enabled to present the subject in a plain, clear, and concise
manner.
Read what the Editors say of Humphrey’s Journal:—
“We have received a copy of a valuable Journal (Humphrey’s) published
in New York, which has reached the 18th number of Vol. VI.... We now have
the pleasure of quoting from our trans-atlantic coadjutor.”—Liverpool
Photographic Jour.
“Humphrey’s Journal is practical as well as scientific in character.”—
American Journal of Science and Arts.
“It treats the subject knowingly and with force.”—New York Tribune.
“It is both a popular and interesting publication.”—Mechanics’ Magazine.
“It is highly useful to all who practice ‘shadow catching.’”—Ohio State
Journal.
“The work is neatly gotten up, and contains many interesting varieties in
this new field of science.”—Times.
“It should be hailed and encouraged, not only by Daguerreotypists
themselves, but by every lover of Science and Art.”—The Democrat.
“We cannot too strongly urge all artists, and those persons who feel an
interest in the Heliographic Arts and Sciences, to take a copy of the
Page 123
work.”—Sentinel.
“It is indicative of talent worthy of the important Art it is designed to
elevate.”—American.
“This Art is entitled to its own organ, which could not have fallen into
better hands than those of the editor of ‘Humphrey’s Journal.’”—Transcript.
“It is a scientific work of interest and usefulness.”—Star of the North.
“This Journal answers many points heretofore regarded as
inexplicable.”—Hudson River Chronicle.
“It is rich with interest.”—North American.
“It contains all the ‘Improvements.’”—Delta.
“It teaches us how to take our own portraits.”—Bee.
“It will cultivate a taste for Daguerreotypes.”—Commercial Advertiser.
“It should be in the hands of all.”—Reveille.
“It is the Daguerreotypist’s friend.”—London News.
“It should be found in every library.”—Evening Journal.
From some of our Subscribers
“Humphrey’s Journal has been the means of saving much time and money,
for by its instruction I have been enabled to produce some of the finest Paper
Pictures I have ever seen.” W. P.
“Don’t fail to send me the Journal, for I would not be without it for five
times the amount of subscription. It is the only publication I can depend
upon.” A. G. R.
“Your treatment of the humbugs and humbugging members of the
profession, is of the most valuable importance to us practical Daguerreans.
Go on. God speed! Here is the amount for the renewal of my subscription.”
E. F. S.
“How can any Operator afford to be without it?” L. L. H.
“Here are five dollars: send me Humphrey’s Journal to this amount. I will
not be without it.” M. S.
“It is my best friend.” J. E. W.
“It is indicative of talent worthy of the important Art it is designed to
elevate.”—American.
“This Art is entitled to its own organ, which could not have fallen into
better hands than those of the editor of ‘Humphrey’s Journal.’”—Transcript.
“It is a scientific work of interest and usefulness.”—Star of the North.
“This Journal answers many points heretofore regarded as
inexplicable.”—Hudson River Chronicle.
“It is rich with interest.”—North American.
“It contains all the ‘Improvements.’”—Delta.
“It teaches us how to take our own portraits.”—Bee.
“It will cultivate a taste for Daguerreotypes.”—Commercial Advertiser.
“It should be in the hands of all.”—Reveille.
“It is the Daguerreotypist’s friend.”—London News.
“It should be found in every library.”—Evening Journal.
From some of our Subscribers
“Humphrey’s Journal has been the means of saving much time and money,
for by its instruction I have been enabled to produce some of the finest Paper
Pictures I have ever seen.” W. P.
“Don’t fail to send me the Journal, for I would not be without it for five
times the amount of subscription. It is the only publication I can depend
upon.” A. G. R.
“Your treatment of the humbugs and humbugging members of the
profession, is of the most valuable importance to us practical Daguerreans.
Go on. God speed! Here is the amount for the renewal of my subscription.”
E. F. S.
“How can any Operator afford to be without it?” L. L. H.
“Here are five dollars: send me Humphrey’s Journal to this amount. I will
not be without it.” M. S.
“It is my best friend.” J. E. W.
Page 124
We might quote like commendatory extracts enough to more than ten
times fill this page.
Humphrey’s Journal contains 16 octavo pages of reading matter.
TERMS.
One copy per annum, in advance . . . . . . $2 00
Three copies, do. do. . . . . . . $5 00
Six copies, do. do. . . . . . . $9 00
The thousands who read it cannot be induced to remain without it. All
who desire to keep up with the improvements should subscribe for a copy.
Subscription price Two Dollars per year.
Don’t fail to become a subscriber. Address
S. D. HUMPHREY Office, 37 Lispenard Street, NEW YORK.
THE PRACTICAL MANUAL OF THE
COLLODION PROCESS.
BY S. D. HUMPHREY.
THIRD EDITION
This Edition contains all the Improvements in the Art made public up to
the day of publication, and gives complete Practical Instructions for making
Collodion Positives or Ambrotypes, Collodion Negatives, Printing, etc., etc.
The quick, great and unprecedented sale of the first and second editions
demonstrates, more than the strongest language could possibly do, the
extraordinary and increasing popularity of this work. The Third Edition
contains two hundred and sixteen 12mo. pages, of a larger size and in
smaller type than either of the preceding editions, and is illustrated with
numerous wood-cuts. It is intended to be the best practical work extant;
times fill this page.
Humphrey’s Journal contains 16 octavo pages of reading matter.
TERMS.
One copy per annum, in advance . . . . . . $2 00
Three copies, do. do. . . . . . . $5 00
Six copies, do. do. . . . . . . $9 00
The thousands who read it cannot be induced to remain without it. All
who desire to keep up with the improvements should subscribe for a copy.
Subscription price Two Dollars per year.
Don’t fail to become a subscriber. Address
S. D. HUMPHREY Office, 37 Lispenard Street, NEW YORK.
THE PRACTICAL MANUAL OF THE
COLLODION PROCESS.
BY S. D. HUMPHREY.
THIRD EDITION
This Edition contains all the Improvements in the Art made public up to
the day of publication, and gives complete Practical Instructions for making
Collodion Positives or Ambrotypes, Collodion Negatives, Printing, etc., etc.
The quick, great and unprecedented sale of the first and second editions
demonstrates, more than the strongest language could possibly do, the
extraordinary and increasing popularity of this work. The Third Edition
contains two hundred and sixteen 12mo. pages, of a larger size and in
smaller type than either of the preceding editions, and is illustrated with
numerous wood-cuts. It is intended to be the best practical work extant;
Page 125
substantially bound in cloth, price One Dollar; forwarded by mail (postage
prepaid). Address
S. D. HUMPHREY, New York
A GUIDE TO PHOTOGRAPHY,
Containing simple and concise directions for obtaining Views, Portraits,
etc., by the chemical agency of Light, by W. H. Thornthwaite, author of
“Photogenic Manipulations,” etc. Illustrated with numerous wood-cuts. The
Book contains more than one hundred 12mo pages, bound in board, and is
sold at twenty-five cents per copy, or five copies for one dollar. Address
S. D. HUMPHREY, New York
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS,
MANUFACTURERS OF
DAGUERREOTYPE CASES,
PLATES, CAMERAS,
MATTINGS, PRESERVERS, ETC., ETC.
MANUFACTURERS AND IMPORTERS OF EVERY VARIETY OF
AMBROTYPE,
AND PHOTOGRAPHIC GOODS,
Of the Best and most approved Quality.
ESPECIAL ATTENTION GIVEN TO THE FURNISHING OF EVERY
ARTICLE USED IN THE PRACTICE OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE
Depot 81 Chambers and 63 Reade St., New York.
Manufactory at Waterbury, Conn.
prepaid). Address
S. D. HUMPHREY, New York
A GUIDE TO PHOTOGRAPHY,
Containing simple and concise directions for obtaining Views, Portraits,
etc., by the chemical agency of Light, by W. H. Thornthwaite, author of
“Photogenic Manipulations,” etc. Illustrated with numerous wood-cuts. The
Book contains more than one hundred 12mo pages, bound in board, and is
sold at twenty-five cents per copy, or five copies for one dollar. Address
S. D. HUMPHREY, New York
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS,
MANUFACTURERS OF
DAGUERREOTYPE CASES,
PLATES, CAMERAS,
MATTINGS, PRESERVERS, ETC., ETC.
MANUFACTURERS AND IMPORTERS OF EVERY VARIETY OF
AMBROTYPE,
AND PHOTOGRAPHIC GOODS,
Of the Best and most approved Quality.
ESPECIAL ATTENTION GIVEN TO THE FURNISHING OF EVERY
ARTICLE USED IN THE PRACTICE OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE
Depot 81 Chambers and 63 Reade St., New York.
Manufactory at Waterbury, Conn.
Page 126
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS’ CAMERAS
From 1/4 to the Mammoth size. These CAMERAS are of the most
superior make, and all subjected to the most thorough test before being
offered for sale.
VIEW CAMERAS, made expressly for taking views: an entirely new
article.
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES, OF EVERY VARIETY, AND WE
WOULD CALL PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE
Wreath, and H. B. & H. Eagle 40 Plates, AS HAVING NO EQUALS IN
THE MARKET.
SOLE AGENTS FOR THE CELEBRATED H. B. AND N. P. FRENCH
PLATES.
Always on hand a complete assortment of Ambrotype and Photographic
goods.
SOLE AGENTS FOR THE Patent solid glass corner Plate Holders.
All orders will receive prompt attention, and be forwarded with dispatch.
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS, 81 Chambers, and 63 Reade St. New
York.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.
MANUFACTURER OF
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES,
MATTINGS,
PRESERVERS, CASES,
APPARATUS, etc., etc.
Importers and Dealers in every description of Daguerreotype,
Photographic, AND AMBROTYPE GOODS,
The SCOVILL MANUFACTURING COMPANY flatter themselves that
an experience of nearly twenty years in the business and the most extensive
From 1/4 to the Mammoth size. These CAMERAS are of the most
superior make, and all subjected to the most thorough test before being
offered for sale.
VIEW CAMERAS, made expressly for taking views: an entirely new
article.
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES, OF EVERY VARIETY, AND WE
WOULD CALL PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE
Wreath, and H. B. & H. Eagle 40 Plates, AS HAVING NO EQUALS IN
THE MARKET.
SOLE AGENTS FOR THE CELEBRATED H. B. AND N. P. FRENCH
PLATES.
Always on hand a complete assortment of Ambrotype and Photographic
goods.
SOLE AGENTS FOR THE Patent solid glass corner Plate Holders.
All orders will receive prompt attention, and be forwarded with dispatch.
HOLMES, BOOTH & HAYDENS, 81 Chambers, and 63 Reade St. New
York.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.
MANUFACTURER OF
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES,
MATTINGS,
PRESERVERS, CASES,
APPARATUS, etc., etc.
Importers and Dealers in every description of Daguerreotype,
Photographic, AND AMBROTYPE GOODS,
The SCOVILL MANUFACTURING COMPANY flatter themselves that
an experience of nearly twenty years in the business and the most extensive
Page 127
variety of the above Goods in the United States, entitle them to the
continuance of orders for the Domestic and Foreign trade, which will receive
the most careful attention.
Park Building, New York. Entrances—36 Park Row, 4 Beekman, and 141
Nassau Street.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.
Would call especial attention to their large variety of
CASES,
Embracing many Fancy Styles made only by themselves, and to which
they are constantly adding New Designs.
Union Cases,
Of all sizes, with Riveted Hinges.
AGENTS FOR THE SALE OF
C. C. HARRISON’S CAMERAS,
with improvements, which we are now prepared to sell at reduced prices,
and warranted to give better satisfaction than ever before
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES, H. B.—N. P.—Star and other brands PLATE
GLASS, embracing three-quarters white: Crown and all other varieties. We
would call particular attention to our Black Glass, made expressly for
Ambrotypes.
CHEMICALS,
for the Daguerreotype and Photographic Art.
Iodized and Plain COLLODION. Gun Cotton, etc., etc.
Tagliabue’s Collodiometres and Actino-Hydrometres, for
testing Chemicals.
APPARATUS OF EVERY VARIETY.
Gutta Percha, Porcelain, and Glassware of all kinds used in the Art.
A large assortment of Gilt Frames always on hand and made to order.
Ambrotype Shields, with solid corners of a new style.
continuance of orders for the Domestic and Foreign trade, which will receive
the most careful attention.
Park Building, New York. Entrances—36 Park Row, 4 Beekman, and 141
Nassau Street.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.
Would call especial attention to their large variety of
CASES,
Embracing many Fancy Styles made only by themselves, and to which
they are constantly adding New Designs.
Union Cases,
Of all sizes, with Riveted Hinges.
AGENTS FOR THE SALE OF
C. C. HARRISON’S CAMERAS,
with improvements, which we are now prepared to sell at reduced prices,
and warranted to give better satisfaction than ever before
DAGUERREOTYPE PLATES, H. B.—N. P.—Star and other brands PLATE
GLASS, embracing three-quarters white: Crown and all other varieties. We
would call particular attention to our Black Glass, made expressly for
Ambrotypes.
CHEMICALS,
for the Daguerreotype and Photographic Art.
Iodized and Plain COLLODION. Gun Cotton, etc., etc.
Tagliabue’s Collodiometres and Actino-Hydrometres, for
testing Chemicals.
APPARATUS OF EVERY VARIETY.
Gutta Percha, Porcelain, and Glassware of all kinds used in the Art.
A large assortment of Gilt Frames always on hand and made to order.
Ambrotype Shields, with solid corners of a new style.
Page 128
All orders will meet with prompt attention
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.,
PARK BUILDINGM
New York
36 Park Row, 4 Beckman, and
141 Nassau Street.
HARDWICH’S PHOTOGRAPHIC CHEMISTRY
AMERICAN EDITION.
A MANUAL of
PHOTOGRAPHIC CHEMISTRY,
INCLUDING THE PRACTICE OF THE COLLODION PROCESS.
BY
T. FREDERICK HARDWICH,
LECTURER ON PHOTOGRAPHY IN KINGS COLLEGE, LONDON;
LATE DEMONSTRATOR OF CHEMISTRY IN KING’S COLLEGE.
Last Edition,
The above is the title of this new and valuable work. It is too well known
to need any further comment in this place. This volume contains nearly 300
large duodecimo pages, bound in red cloth, $1.00. Copies to be forwarded by
mail, $1.18, postage pre-paid.
S. D. HUMPHREY,
Photographic
Book Publisher,
37 LISPENARD
STREET, NEW YORK,
N.B. Postage stamps taken.
SCOVILL MANUFACTURING CO.,
PARK BUILDINGM
New York
36 Park Row, 4 Beckman, and
141 Nassau Street.
HARDWICH’S PHOTOGRAPHIC CHEMISTRY
AMERICAN EDITION.
A MANUAL of
PHOTOGRAPHIC CHEMISTRY,
INCLUDING THE PRACTICE OF THE COLLODION PROCESS.
BY
T. FREDERICK HARDWICH,
LECTURER ON PHOTOGRAPHY IN KINGS COLLEGE, LONDON;
LATE DEMONSTRATOR OF CHEMISTRY IN KING’S COLLEGE.
Last Edition,
The above is the title of this new and valuable work. It is too well known
to need any further comment in this place. This volume contains nearly 300
large duodecimo pages, bound in red cloth, $1.00. Copies to be forwarded by
mail, $1.18, postage pre-paid.
S. D. HUMPHREY,
Photographic
Book Publisher,
37 LISPENARD
STREET, NEW YORK,
N.B. Postage stamps taken.
Page 129
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK AMERICAN
HAND BOOK OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
HAND BOOK OF THE DAGUERREOTYPE ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be
renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law
means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the
Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States
without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying
and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the
PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a
registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook,
except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying
royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge
anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is
very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg
eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do
practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by
U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 130
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any
other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you
agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License
available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work,
you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the
terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright)
agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement,
you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg
electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy
of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on
or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be
bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can
do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying
with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a
lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you
follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to
Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual
work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are
Page 131
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works
based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are
removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg
mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing
Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for
keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can
easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you
share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a
constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the
laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before
downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating
derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work.
The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status
of any work in any country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied
or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in
the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country
where you are located before using this eBook.
Page 132
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice
indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the
work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without
paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a
work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on
the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs
1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the
permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply
with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed
by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project
Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the
copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License
terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any
other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently
displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or
immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the
official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no
additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of
exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work
in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format
must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph
1.E.1.
Page 133
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing,
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply
with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to
or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in
this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project
Page 134
Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works
not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™
collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and
the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as,
but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription
errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or
damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that
damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except
for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to
you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE
THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT
EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE
THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE
NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you
can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the
defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund.
If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to
Page 135
you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you
may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the
problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or
limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable
to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum
disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity
or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that
arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause
to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b)
alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg
work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic
works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including
obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the
Page 136
efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance
they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring
that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for
generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for
Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations
can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)
(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of
Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service.
The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541.
Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax
deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s
laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and
official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the
number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment
Page 137
including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort,
much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not
received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or
determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have
not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against
accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us
with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any
statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the
United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods
and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including
checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit:
www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with
anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg
eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions,
all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a
Page 138
copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
compliance with any particular paper edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how
to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email
newsletter to hear about new eBooks.